AuroraMiddleware/gtk
1
0
Fork 1
mirror of https://gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME/gtk.git synced 2024-11-10 02:40:11 +00:00
Code Issues Projects Releases Wiki Activity
337bdee253
gtk/docs/gtk_tut.sgml
GMT 1998 Tony Gale 337bdee253 Start mass update for GTK 1.1 Look for the best version of awk Fix FD leak 
Mon Dec  7 15:15:06 GMT 1998  Tony Gale <gale@gtk.org>

        * docs/gtk_tut.sgml: Start mass update for GTK 1.1
        * examples/extract.sh: Look for the best version of awk
        * examples/extract.awk: Fix FD leak
        * example/base: minimal example from Tutorial
1998-12-07 15:19:00 +00:00

14650 lines
475 KiB
Plaintext
Raw Blame History

<!doctype linuxdoc system>
<!-- This is the tutorial marked up in SGML
(just to show how to write a comment)
-->
<article>
<title>GTK v1.1 Tutorial
<author>
Tony Gale <tt><htmlurl url="mailto:gale@gtk.org"
name="&lt;gale@gtk.org&gt;"></tt>
Ian Main <tt><htmlurl url="mailto:imain@gtk.org"
name="&lt;imain@gtk.org&gt;"></tt>,
<date>December 6th, 1998
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>Introduction
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<p>
GTK (GIMP Toolkit) was originally developed as a toolkit for the GIMP
(General Image Manipulation Program). GTK is built on top of GDK
(GIMP Drawing Kit) which is basically a wrapper around the Xlib
functions. It's called the GIMP toolkit because it was originally
written for developing the GIMP, but has now been used in several free
software projects. The authors are:
<itemize>
<item> Peter Mattis <tt><htmlurl url="mailto:petm@xcf.berkeley.edu"
name="petm@xcf.berkeley.edu"></tt>
<item> Spencer Kimball <tt><htmlurl url="mailto:spencer@xcf.berkeley.edu"
name="spencer@xcf.berkeley.edu"></tt>
<item> Josh MacDonald <tt><htmlurl url="mailto:jmacd@xcf.berkeley.edu"
name="jmacd@xcf.berkeley.edu"></tt>
</itemize>
GTK is essentially an object oriented application programmers
interface (API). Although written completely in C, it is implemented
using the idea of classes and callback functions (pointers to
functions).
There is also a third component called glib which contains a few
replacements for some standard calls, as well as some additional
functions for handling linked lists etc. The replacement functions
are used to increase GTK's portability, as some of the functions
implemented here are not available or are nonstandard on other unixes
such as g_strerror(). Some also contain enhancements to the libc
versions, such as g_malloc that has enhanced debugging utilities.
This tutorial is an attempt to document as much as possible of GTK, it
is by no means complete. This tutorial assumes a good understanding
of C, and how to create C programs. It would be a great benefit for
the reader to have previous X programming experience, but it shouldn't
be necessary. If you are learning GTK as your first widget set,
please comment on how you found this tutorial, and what you had
trouble with. Note that there is also a C++ API for GTK (GTK--) in
the works, so if you prefer to use C++, you should look into this
instead. There's also an Objective C wrapper, and Guile bindings
available, but I don't follow these.
I would very much like to hear of any problems you have learning GTK
from this document, and would appreciate input as to how it may be
improved. Please see the section on <ref id="sec_Contributing"
name="Contributing"> for further information.
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>Getting Started
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<p>
The first thing to do of course, is download the GTK source and
install it. You can always get the latest version from ftp.gtk.org in
/pub/gtk. You can also view other sources of GTK information on
http://www.gtk.org/ <htmlurl url="http://www.gtk.org/"
name="http://www.gtk.org/">. GTK uses GNU autoconf for configuration.
Once untar'd, type ./configure --help to see a list of options.
Th GTK source distribution also contains the complete source to all of
the examples used in this tutorial, along with Makefiles to aid
compilation.
To begin our introduction to GTK, we'll start with the simplest
program possible. This program will create a 200x200 pixel window and
has no way of exiting except to be killed using the shell.
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start base base.c */
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
int main( int argc,
char *argv[] )
{
GtkWidget *window;
gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
gtk_widget_show (window);
gtk_main ();
return(0);
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
You can compile the above program with gcc using:
<tscreen><verb>
gcc base.c -o base `gtk-config --cflags --libs`
</verb></tscreen>
The meaning of the unusual compilation options is explained below.
All programs will of course include gtk/gtk.h which declares the
variables, functions, structures etc. that will be used in your GTK
application.
The next line:
<tscreen><verb>
gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
</verb></tscreen>
calls the function gtk_init(gint *argc, gchar ***argv) which will be
called in all GTK applications. This sets up a few things for us such
as the default visual and color map and then proceeds to call
gdk_init(gint *argc, gchar ***argv). This function initializes the
library for use, sets up default signal handlers, and checks the
arguments passed to your application on the command line, looking for
one of the following:
<itemize>
<item> <tt/--gtk-module/
<item> <tt/--g-fatal-warnings/
<item> <tt/--gtk-debug/
<item> <tt/--gtk-no-debug/
<item> <tt/--gdk-debug/
<item> <tt/--gdk-no-debug/
<item> <tt/--display/
<item> <tt/--sync/
<item> <tt/--no-xshm/
<item> <tt/--name/
<item> <tt/--class/
</itemize>
It removes these from the argument list, leaving anything it does not
recognize for your application to parse or ignore. This creates a set
of standard arguments accepted by all GTK applications.
The next two lines of code create and display a window.
<tscreen><verb>
window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
gtk_widget_show (window);
</verb></tscreen>
The GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL argument specifies that we want the window to
undergo window manager decoration and placement. Rather than create a
window of 0x0 size, a window without children is set to 200x200 by
default so you can still manipulate it.
The gtk_widget_show() function lets GTK know that we are done setting
the attributes of this widget, and that it can display it.
The last line enters the GTK main processing loop.
<tscreen><verb>
gtk_main ();
</verb></tscreen>
gtk_main() is another call you will see in every GTK application.
When control reaches this point, GTK will sleep waiting for X events
(such as button or key presses), timeouts, or file IO notifications to
occur. In our simple example however, events are ignored.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Hello World in GTK
<p>
Now for a program with a widget (a button). It's the classic
hello world a la GTK.
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start helloworld helloworld.c */
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
/* This is a callback function. The data arguments are ignored
* in this example. More on callbacks below. */
void hello( GtkWidget *widget,
gpointer data )
{
g_print ("Hello World\n");
}
gint delete_event( GtkWidget *widget,
GdkEvent *event,
gpointer data )
{
/* If you return FALSE in the "delete_event" signal handler,
* GTK will emit the "destroy" signal. Returning TRUE means
* you don't want the window to be destroyed.
* This is useful for popping up 'are you sure you want to quit?'
* type dialogs. */
g_print ("delete event occurred\n");
/* Change TRUE to FALSE and the main window will be destroyed with
* a "delete_event". */
return(TRUE);
}
/* Another callback */
void destroy( GtkWidget *widget,
gpointer data )
{
gtk_main_quit();
}
int main( int argc,
char *argv[] )
{
/* GtkWidget is the storage type for widgets */
GtkWidget *window;
GtkWidget *button;
/* This is called in all GTK applications. Arguments are parsed
* from the command line and are returned to the application. */
gtk_init(&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
/* create a new window */
window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
/* When the window is given the "delete_event" signal (this is given
* by the window manager, usually by the 'close' option, or on the
* titlebar), we ask it to call the delete_event () function
* as defined above. The data passed to the callback
* function is NULL and is ignored in the callback function. */
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "delete_event",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (delete_event), NULL);
/* Here we connect the "destroy" event to a signal handler.
* This event occurs when we call gtk_widget_destroy() on the window,
* or if we return 'FALSE' in the "delete_event" callback. */
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "destroy",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (destroy), NULL);
/* Sets the border width of the window. */
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 10);
/* Creates a new button with the label "Hello World". */
button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("Hello World");
/* When the button receives the "clicked" signal, it will call the
* function hello() passing it NULL as its argument. The hello()
* function is defined above. */
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (hello), NULL);
/* This will cause the window to be destroyed by calling
* gtk_widget_destroy(window) when "clicked". Again, the destroy
* signal could come from here, or the window manager. */
gtk_signal_connect_object (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (gtk_widget_destroy),
GTK_OBJECT (window));
/* This packs the button into the window (a gtk container). */
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), button);
/* The final step is to display this newly created widget. */
gtk_widget_show (button);
/* and the window */
gtk_widget_show (window);
/* All GTK applications must have a gtk_main(). Control ends here
* and waits for an event to occur (like a key press or
* mouse event). */
gtk_main ();
return(0);
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Compiling Hello World
<p>
To compile use:
<tscreen><verb>
gcc -Wall -g helloworld.c -o helloworld `gtk-config --cflags` \
`gtk-config --libs`
</verb></tscreen>
This uses the program <tt>gtk-config</>, which comes with gtk. This
program 'knows' what compiler switches are needed to compile programs
that use gtk. <tt>gtk-config --cflags</> will output a list of include
directories for the compiler to look in, and <tt>gtk-config --libs</>
will output the list of libraries for the compiler to link with and
the directories to find them in. In the aboce example they could have
been combined into a single instance, such as
`gtk-config --cflags --libs`.
Note that the type of single quote used in the compile command above
is significant.
The libraries that are usually linked in are:
<itemize>
<item>The GTK library (-lgtk), the widget library, based on top of GDK.
<item>The GDK library (-lgdk), the Xlib wrapper.
<item>The gmodule library (-lgmodule), which is used to load run time
extensions.
<item>The glib library (-lglib), containing miscellaneous functions, only
g_print() is used in this particular example. GTK is built on top
of glib so you will always require this library. See the section on
<ref id="sec_glib" name="glib"> for details.
<item>The Xlib library (-lX11) which is used by GDK.
<item>The Xext library (-lXext). This contains code for shared memory
pixmaps and other X extensions.
<item>The math library (-lm). This is used by GTK for various purposes.
</itemize>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Theory of Signals and Callbacks
<p>
Before we look in detail at <em>helloworld</em>, we'll discuss signals
and callbacks. GTK is an event driven toolkit, which means it will
sleep in gtk_main until an event occurs and control is passed to the
appropriate function.
This passing of control is done using the idea of "signals". When an
event occurs, such as the press of a mouse button, the appropriate
signal will be "emitted" by the widget that was pressed. This is how
GTK does most of its useful work. There are a set of signals that all
widgets inherit, such as "destroy", and there are signals that are
widget specific, such as "toggled" on a toggle button.
To make a button perform an action, we set up a signal handler to
catch these signals and call the appropriate function. This is done by
using a function such as:
<tscreen><verb>
gint gtk_signal_connect( GtkObject *object,
gchar *name,
GtkSignalFunc func,
gpointer func_data );
</verb></tscreen>
Where the first argument is the widget which will be emitting the
signal, and the second, the name of the signal you wish to catch. The
third is the function you wish to be called when it is caught, and the
fourth, the data you wish to have passed to this function.
The function specified in the third argument is called a "callback
function", and should generally be of the form:
<tscreen><verb>
void callback_func( GtkWidget *widget,
gpointer callback_data );
</verb></tscreen>
Where the first argument will be a pointer to the widget that emitted
the signal, and the second, a pointer to the data given as the last
argument to the gtk_signal_connect() function as shown above.
Note that the above form for a signal callback function declaration is
only a general guide, as some widget specific signals generate
different calling parameters. For example, the GtkCList "select_row"
signal provides both row and column parameters.
Another call used in the <em>helloworld</em> example, is:
<tscreen><verb>
gint gtk_signal_connect_object( GtkObject *object,
gchar *name,
GtkSignalFunc func,
GtkObject *slot_object );
</verb></tscreen>
gtk_signal_connect_object() is the same as gtk_signal_connect() except
that the callback function only uses one argument, a pointer to a GTK
object. So when using this function to connect signals, the callback
should be of the form:
<tscreen><verb>
void callback_func( GtkObject *object );
</verb></tscreen>
Where the object is usually a widget. We usually don't setup callbacks
for gtk_signal_connect_object however. They are usually used to call a
GTK function that accepts a single widget or object as an argument, as
is the case in our <em>helloworld</em> example.
The purpose of having two functions to connect signals is simply to
allow the callbacks to have a different number of arguments. Many
functions in the GTK library accept only a single GtkWidget pointer as
an argument, so you want to use the gtk_signal_connect_object() for
these, whereas for your functions, you may need to have additional
data supplied to the callbacks.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Events
<p>
In addition to the signal mechanism described above, there are a set
of <em>events</em> that reflect the X event mechanism. Callbacks may
also be attached to these events. These events are:
<itemize>
<item> event
<item> button_press_event
<item> button_release_event
<item> motion_notify_event
<item> delete_event
<item> destroy_event
<item> expose_event
<item> key_press_event
<item> key_release_event
<item> enter_notify_event
<item> leave_notify_event
<item> configure_event
<item> focus_in_event
<item> focus_out_event
<item> map_event
<item> unmap_event
<item> property_notify_event
<item> selection_clear_event
<item> selection_request_event
<item> selection_notify_event
<item> proximity_in_event
<item> proximity_out_event
<item> drag_begin_event
<item> drag_request_event
<item> drag_end_event
<item> drop_enter_event
<item> drop_leave_event
<item> drop_data_available_event
<item> other_event
</itemize>
In order to connect a callback function to one of these events, you
use the function gtk_signal_connect, as described above, using one of
the above event names as the <tt/name/ parameter. The callback
function for events has a slightly different form than that for
signals:
<tscreen><verb>
void callback_func( GtkWidget *widget,
GdkEvent *event,
gpointer callback_data );
</verb></tscreen>
GdkEvent is a C <tt/union/ structure whose type will depend upon which
of the above events has occurred. In order for us to tell which event
has been issued each of the possible alternatives has a <tt/type/
parameter which reflects the event being issued. The other components
of the event structure will depend upon the type of the
event. Possible values for the type are:
<tscreen><verb>
GDK_NOTHING
GDK_DELETE
GDK_DESTROY
GDK_EXPOSE
GDK_MOTION_NOTIFY
GDK_BUTTON_PRESS
GDK_2BUTTON_PRESS
GDK_3BUTTON_PRESS
GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE
GDK_KEY_PRESS
GDK_KEY_RELEASE
GDK_ENTER_NOTIFY
GDK_LEAVE_NOTIFY
GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE
GDK_CONFIGURE
GDK_MAP
GDK_UNMAP
GDK_PROPERTY_NOTIFY
GDK_SELECTION_CLEAR
GDK_SELECTION_REQUEST
GDK_SELECTION_NOTIFY
GDK_PROXIMITY_IN
GDK_PROXIMITY_OUT
GDK_DRAG_BEGIN
GDK_DRAG_REQUEST
GDK_DROP_ENTER
GDK_DROP_LEAVE
GDK_DROP_DATA_AVAIL
GDK_CLIENT_EVENT
GDK_VISIBILITY_NOTIFY
GDK_NO_EXPOSE
GDK_OTHER_EVENT /* Deprecated, use filters instead */
</verb></tscreen>
So, to connect a callback function to one of these events we would use
something like:
<tscreen><verb>
gtk_signal_connect( GTK_OBJECT(button), "button_press_event",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(button_press_callback),
NULL);
</verb></tscreen>
This assumes that <tt/button/ is a GtkButton widget. Now, when the
mouse is over the button and a mouse button is pressed, the function
<tt/button_press_callback/ will be called. This function may be
declared as:
<tscreen><verb>
static gint button_press_event (GtkWidget *widget,
GdkEventButton *event,
gpointer data);
</verb></tscreen>
Note that we can declare the second argument as type
<tt/GdkEventButton/ as we know what type of event will occur for this
function to be called.
The value returned from this function indicates whether the event
should be propagated further by the GTK event handling
mechanism. Returning TRUE indicates that the event has been handled,
and that it should not propagate further. Returning FALSE continues
the normal event handling. See the section on
<ref id="sec_Adv_Events_and_Signals"
name="Advanced Event and Signal Handling"> for more details on this
propagation process.
For details on the GdkEvent data types, see the appendix entitled
<ref id="sec_GDK_Event_Types" name="GDK Event Types">.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Stepping Through Hello World
<p>
Now that we know the theory behind this, lets clarify by walking through
the example <em>helloworld</em> program.
Here is the callback function that will be called when the button is
"clicked". We ignore both the widget and the data in this example, but
it is not hard to do things with them. The next example will use the
data argument to tell us which button was pressed.
<tscreen><verb>
void hello( GtkWidget *widget,
gpointer data )
{
g_print ("Hello World\n");
}
</verb></tscreen>
The next callback is a bit special. The "delete_event" occurs when the
window manager sends this event to the application. We have a choice
here as to what to do about these events. We can ignore them, make
some sort of response, or simply quit the application.
The value you return in this callback lets GTK know what action to
take. By returning TRUE, we let it know that we don't want to have
the "destroy" signal emitted, keeping our application running. By
returning FALSE, we ask that "destroy" is emitted, which in turn will
call our "destroy" signal handler.
<tscreen><verb>
gint delete_event( GtkWidget *widget,
GdkEvent *event,
gpointer data )
{
g_print ("delete event occurred\n");
return (TRUE);
}
</verb></tscreen>
Here is another callback function which causes the program to quit by
calling gtk_main_quit(). This function tells GTK that it is to exit
from gtk_main when control is returned to it.
<tscreen><verb>
void destroy( GtkWidget *widget,
gpointer data )
{
gtk_main_quit ();
}
</verb></tscreen>
I assume you know about the main() function... yes, as with other
applications, all GTK applications will also have one of these.
<tscreen><verb>
int main( int argc,
char *argv[] )
{
</verb></tscreen>
This next part, declares a pointer to a structure of type
GtkWidget. These are used below to create a window and a button.
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *window;
GtkWidget *button;
</verb></tscreen>
Here is our gtk_init again. As before, this initializes the toolkit,
and parses the arguments found on the command line. Any argument it
recognizes from the command line, it removes from the list, and
modifies argc and argv to make it look like they never existed,
allowing your application to parse the remaining arguments.
<tscreen><verb>
gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
</verb></tscreen>
Create a new window. This is fairly straight forward. Memory is
allocated for the GtkWidget *window structure so it now points to a
valid structure. It sets up a new window, but it is not displayed
until we call gtk_widget_show(window) near the end of our program.
<tscreen><verb>
window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
</verb></tscreen>
Here is an example of connecting a signal handler to an object, in
this case, the window. Here, the "destroy" signal is caught. This is
emitted when we use the window manager to kill the window (and we
return TRUE in the "delete_event" handler), or when we use the
gtk_widget_destroy() call passing in the window widget as the object
to destroy. By setting this up, we handle both cases with a single
call. Here, it just calls the destroy() function defined above with a
NULL argument, which quits GTK for us.
The GTK_OBJECT and GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC are macros that perform type
casting and checking for us, as well as aid the readability of the
code.
<tscreen><verb>
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "destroy",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (destroy), NULL);
</verb></tscreen>
This next function is used to set an attribute of a container object.
This just sets the window so it has a blank area along the inside of
it 10 pixels wide where no widgets will go. There are other similar
functions which we will look at in the section on
<ref id="sec_setting_widget_attributes" name="Setting Widget Attributes">
And again, GTK_CONTAINER is a macro to perform type casting.
<tscreen><verb>
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 10);
</verb></tscreen>
This call creates a new button. It allocates space for a new GtkWidget
structure in memory, initializes it, and makes the button pointer
point to it. It will have the label "Hello World" on it when
displayed.
<tscreen><verb>
button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("Hello World");
</verb></tscreen>
Here, we take this button, and make it do something useful. We attach
a signal handler to it so when it emits the "clicked" signal, our
hello() function is called. The data is ignored, so we simply pass in
NULL to the hello() callback function. Obviously, the "clicked" signal
is emitted when we click the button with our mouse pointer.
<tscreen><verb>
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (hello), NULL);
</verb></tscreen>
We are also going to use this button to exit our program. This will
illustrate how the "destroy" signal may come from either the window
manager, or our program. When the button is "clicked", same as above,
it calls the first hello() callback function, and then this one in the
order they are set up. You may have as many callback functions as you
need, and all will be executed in the order you connected
them. Because the gtk_widget_destroy() function accepts only a
GtkWidget *widget as an argument, we use the
gtk_signal_connect_object() function here instead of straight
gtk_signal_connect().
<tscreen><verb>
gtk_signal_connect_object (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (gtk_widget_destroy),
GTK_OBJECT (window));
</verb></tscreen>
This is a packing call, which will be explained in depth later on. But
it is fairly easy to understand. It simply tells GTK that the button
is to be placed in the window where it will be displayed. Note that a
GTK container can only contain one widget. There are other widgets,
that are described later, which are designed to layout multiple
widgets in various ways.
<tscreen><verb>
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), button);
</verb></tscreen>
Now we have everything set up the way we want it to be. With all the
signal handlers in place, and the button placed in the window where it
should be, we ask GTK to "show" the widgets on the screen. The window
widget is shown last so the whole window will pop up at once rather
than seeing the window pop up, and then the button form inside of
it. Although with such a simple example, you'd never notice.
<tscreen><verb>
gtk_widget_show (button);
gtk_widget_show (window);
</verb></tscreen>
And of course, we call gtk_main() which waits for events to come from
the X server and will call on the widgets to emit signals when these
events come.
<tscreen><verb>
gtk_main ();
</verb></tscreen>
And the final return. Control returns here after gtk_quit() is called.
<tscreen><verb>
return 0;
</verb></tscreen>
Now, when we click the mouse button on a GTK button, the widget emits
a "clicked" signal. In order for us to use this information, our
program sets up a signal handler to catch that signal, which
dispatches the function of our choice. In our example, when the button
we created is "clicked", the hello() function is called with a NULL
argument, and then the next handler for this signal is called. This
calls the gtk_widget_destroy() function, passing it the window widget
as its argument, destroying the window widget. This causes the window
to emit the "destroy" signal, which is caught, and calls our destroy()
callback function, which simply exits GTK.
Another course of events, is to use the window manager to kill the
window. This will cause the "delete_event" to be emitted. This will
call our "delete_event" handler. If we return TRUE here, the window
will be left as is and nothing will happen. Returning FALSE will cause
GTK to emit the "destroy" signal which of course, calls the "destroy"
callback, exiting GTK.
Note that these signals are not the same as the Unix system signals,
and are not implemented using them, although the terminology is almost
identical.
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>Moving On
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Data Types
<p>
There are a few things you probably noticed in the previous examples
that need explaining. The gint, gchar etc. that you see are typedefs
to int and char respectively. This is done to get around that nasty
dependency on the size of simple data types when doing calculations.
A good example is "gint32" which will be typedef'd to a 32 bit integer
for any given platform, whether it be the 64 bit alpha, or the 32 bit
i386. The typedefs are very straight forward and intuitive. They are
all defined in glib/glib.h (which gets included from gtk.h).
You'll also notice the ability to use GtkWidget when the function
calls for a GtkObject. GTK is an object oriented design, and a widget
is an object.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>More on Signal Handlers
<p>
Lets take another look at the gtk_signal_connect declaration.
<tscreen><verb>
gint gtk_signal_connect( GtkObject *object,
gchar *name,
GtkSignalFunc func,
gpointer func_data );
</verb></tscreen>
Notice the gint return value? This is a tag that identifies your
callback function. As stated above, you may have as many callbacks per
signal and per object as you need, and each will be executed in turn,
in the order they were attached.
This tag allows you to remove this callback from the list by using:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_signal_disconnect( GtkObject *object,
gint id );
</verb></tscreen>
So, by passing in the widget you wish to remove the handler from, and
the tag returned by one of the signal_connect functions, you can
disconnect a signal handler.
Another function to remove all the signal handers from an object is:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_signal_handlers_destroy( GtkObject *object );
</verb></tscreen>
This call is fairly self explanatory. It simply removes all the
current signal handlers from the object passed in as the first
argument.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>An Upgraded Hello World
<p>
Let's take a look at a slightly improved <em>helloworld</em> with
better examples of callbacks. This will also introduce us to our next
topic, packing widgets.
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start helloworld2 helloworld2.c */
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
/* Our new improved callback. The data passed to this function
* is printed to stdout. */
void callback( GtkWidget *widget,
gpointer data )
{
g_print ("Hello again - %s was pressed\n", (char *) data);
}
/* another callback */
void delete_event( GtkWidget *widget,
GdkEvent *event,
gpointer data )
{
gtk_main_quit ();
}
int main( int argc,
char *argv[] )
{
/* GtkWidget is the storage type for widgets */
GtkWidget *window;
GtkWidget *button;
GtkWidget *box1;
/* This is called in all GTK applications. Arguments are parsed
* from the command line and are returned to the application. */
gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
/* Create a new window */
window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
/* This is a new call, this just sets the title of our
* new window to "Hello Buttons!" */
gtk_window_set_title (GTK_WINDOW (window), "Hello Buttons!");
/* Here we just set a handler for delete_event that immediately
* exits GTK. */
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "delete_event",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (delete_event), NULL);
/* Sets the border width of the window. */
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 10);
/* We create a box to pack widgets into. This is described in detail
* in the "packing" section. The box is not really visible, it
* is just used as a tool to arrange widgets. */
box1 = gtk_hbox_new(FALSE, 0);
/* Put the box into the main window. */
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), box1);
/* Creates a new button with the label "Button 1". */
button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("Button 1");
/* Now when the button is clicked, we call the "callback" function
* with a pointer to "button 1" as its argument */
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (callback), (gpointer) "button 1");
/* Instead of gtk_container_add, we pack this button into the invisible
* box, which has been packed into the window. */
gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(box1), button, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
/* Always remember this step, this tells GTK that our preparation for
* this button is complete, and it can now be displayed. */
gtk_widget_show(button);
/* Do these same steps again to create a second button */
button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("Button 2");
/* Call the same callback function with a different argument,
* passing a pointer to "button 2" instead. */
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (callback), (gpointer) "button 2");
gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(box1), button, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
/* The order in which we show the buttons is not really important, but I
* recommend showing the window last, so it all pops up at once. */
gtk_widget_show(button);
gtk_widget_show(box1);
gtk_widget_show (window);
/* Rest in gtk_main and wait for the fun to begin! */
gtk_main ();
return(0);
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
Compile this program using the same linking arguments as our first
example. You'll notice this time there is no easy way to exit the
program, you have to use your window manager or command line to kill
it. A good exercise for the reader would be to insert a third "Quit"
button that will exit the program. You may also wish to play with the
options to gtk_box_pack_start() while reading the next section. Try
resizing the window, and observe the behavior.
Just as a side note, there is another useful define for
gtk_window_new() - GTK_WINDOW_DIALOG. This interacts with the window
manager a little differently and should be used for transient windows.
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>Packing Widgets
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<p>
When creating an application, you'll want to put more than one widget
inside a window. Our first <em>helloworld</em> example only used one
widget so we could simply use a gtk_container_add call to "pack" the
widget into the window. But when you want to put more than one widget
into a window, how do you control where that widget is positioned?
This is where packing comes in.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Theory of Packing Boxes
<p>
Most packing is done by creating boxes as in the example above. These
are invisible widget containers that we can pack our widgets into
which come in two forms, a horizontal box, and a vertical box. When
packing widgets into a horizontal box, the objects are inserted
horizontally from left to right or right to left depending on the call
used. In a vertical box, widgets are packed from top to bottom or vice
versa. You may use any combination of boxes inside or beside other
boxes to create the desired effect.
To create a new horizontal box, we use a call to gtk_hbox_new(), and
for vertical boxes, gtk_vbox_new().The gtk_box_pack_start() and
gtk_box_pack_end() functions are used to place objects inside of these
containers. The gtk_box_pack_start() function will start at the top
and work its way down in a vbox, and pack left to right in an hbox.
gtk_box_pack_end() will do the opposite, packing from bottom to top in
a vbox, and right to left in an hbox. Using these functions allow us
to right justify or left justify our widgets and may be mixed in any
way to achieve the desired effect. We will use gtk_box_pack_start() in
most of our examples. An object may be another container or a
widget. In fact, many widgets are actually containers themselves,
including the button, but we usually only use a label inside a button.
By using these calls, GTK knows where you want to place your widgets
so it can do automatic resizing and other nifty things. There's also a
number of options as to how your widgets should be packed. As you can
imagine, this method gives us a quite a bit of flexibility when
placing and creating widgets.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Details of Boxes
<p>
Because of this flexibility, packing boxes in GTK can be confusing at
first. There are a lot of options, and it's not immediately obvious how
they all fit together. In the end however, there are basically five
different styles.
<? <CENTER> >
<?
<IMG SRC="gtk_tut_packbox1.gif" VSPACE="15" HSPACE="10" WIDTH="528"
HEIGHT="235" ALT="Box Packing Example Image">
>
<? </CENTER> >
Each line contains one horizontal box (hbox) with several buttons. The
call to gtk_box_pack is shorthand for the call to pack each of the
buttons into the hbox. Each of the buttons is packed into the hbox the
same way (i.e. same arguments to the gtk_box_pack_start() function).
This is the declaration of the gtk_box_pack_start function.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_box_pack_start( GtkBox *box,
GtkWidget *child,
gint expand,
gint fill,
gint padding );
</verb></tscreen>
The first argument is the box you are packing the object into, the
second is the object. The objects will all be buttons for now, so
we'll be packing buttons into boxes.
The expand argument to gtk_box_pack_start() and gtk_box_pack_end()
controls whether the widgets are laid out in the box to fill in all
the extra space in the box so the box is expanded to fill the area
alloted to it (TRUE). Or the box is shrunk to just fit the widgets
(FALSE). Setting expand to FALSE will allow you to do right and left
justification of your widgets. Otherwise, they will all expand to fit
into the box, and the same effect could be achieved by using only one
of gtk_box_pack_start or gtk_box_pack_end.
The fill argument to the gtk_box_pack functions control whether the
extra space is allocated to the objects themselves (TRUE), or as extra
padding in the box around these objects (FALSE). It only has an effect
if the expand argument is also TRUE.
When creating a new box, the function looks like this:
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_hbox_new (gint homogeneous,
gint spacing);
</verb></tscreen>
The homogeneous argument to gtk_hbox_new (and the same for
gtk_vbox_new) controls whether each object in the box has the same
size (i.e. the same width in an hbox, or the same height in a
vbox). If it is set, the expand argument to the gtk_box_pack routines
is always turned on.
What's the difference between spacing (set when the box is created)
and padding (set when elements are packed)? Spacing is added between
objects, and padding is added on either side of an object. The
following figure should make it clearer:
<? <CENTER> >
<?
<IMG ALIGN="center" SRC="gtk_tut_packbox2.gif" WIDTH="509"
HEIGHT="213" VSPACE="15" HSPACE="10"
ALT="Box Packing Example Image">
>
<? </CENTER> >
Here is the code used to create the above images. I've commented it
fairly heavily so hopefully you won't have any problems following
it. Compile it yourself and play with it.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Packing Demonstration Program
<p>
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start packbox packbox.c */
#include <stdio.h>
#include "gtk/gtk.h"
void delete_event( GtkWidget *widget,
GdkEvent *event,
gpointer data )
{
gtk_main_quit ();
}
/* Make a new hbox filled with button-labels. Arguments for the
* variables we're interested are passed in to this function.
* We do not show the box, but do show everything inside. */
GtkWidget *make_box( gint homogeneous,
gint spacing,
gint expand,
gint fill,
gint padding )
{
GtkWidget *box;
GtkWidget *button;
char padstr[80];
/* Create a new hbox with the appropriate homogeneous
* and spacing settings */
box = gtk_hbox_new (homogeneous, spacing);
/* Create a series of buttons with the appropriate settings */
button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("gtk_box_pack");
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box), button, expand, fill, padding);
gtk_widget_show (button);
button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("(box,");
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box), button, expand, fill, padding);
gtk_widget_show (button);
button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("button,");
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box), button, expand, fill, padding);
gtk_widget_show (button);
/* Create a button with the label depending on the value of
* expand. */
if (expand == TRUE)
button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("TRUE,");
else
button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("FALSE,");
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box), button, expand, fill, padding);
gtk_widget_show (button);
/* This is the same as the button creation for "expand"
* above, but uses the shorthand form. */
button = gtk_button_new_with_label (fill ? "TRUE," : "FALSE,");
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box), button, expand, fill, padding);
gtk_widget_show (button);
sprintf (padstr, "%d);", padding);
button = gtk_button_new_with_label (padstr);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box), button, expand, fill, padding);
gtk_widget_show (button);
return box;
}
int main( int argc,
char *argv[])
{
GtkWidget *window;
GtkWidget *button;
GtkWidget *box1;
GtkWidget *box2;
GtkWidget *separator;
GtkWidget *label;
GtkWidget *quitbox;
int which;
/* Our init, don't forget this! :) */
gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
if (argc != 2) {
fprintf (stderr, "usage: packbox num, where num is 1, 2, or 3.\n");
/* this just does cleanup in GTK, and exits with an exit status of 1. */
gtk_exit (1);
}
which = atoi (argv[1]);
/* Create our window */
window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
/* You should always remember to connect the destroy signal to the
* main window. This is very important for proper intuitive
* behavior */
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "delete_event",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (delete_event), NULL);
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 10);
/* We create a vertical box (vbox) to pack the horizontal boxes into.
* This allows us to stack the horizontal boxes filled with buttons one
* on top of the other in this vbox. */
box1 = gtk_vbox_new (FALSE, 0);
/* which example to show. These correspond to the pictures above. */
switch (which) {
case 1:
/* create a new label. */
label = gtk_label_new ("gtk_hbox_new (FALSE, 0);");
/* Align the label to the left side. We'll discuss this function and
* others in the section on Widget Attributes. */
gtk_misc_set_alignment (GTK_MISC (label), 0, 0);
/* Pack the label into the vertical box (vbox box1). Remember that
* widgets added to a vbox will be packed one on top of the other in
* order. */
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), label, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
/* Show the label */
gtk_widget_show (label);
/* Call our make box function - homogeneous = FALSE, spacing = 0,
* expand = FALSE, fill = FALSE, padding = 0 */
box2 = make_box (FALSE, 0, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (box2);
/* Call our make box function - homogeneous = FALSE, spacing = 0,
* expand = FALSE, fill = FALSE, padding = 0 */
box2 = make_box (FALSE, 0, TRUE, FALSE, 0);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (box2);
/* Args are: homogeneous, spacing, expand, fill, padding */
box2 = make_box (FALSE, 0, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (box2);
/* Creates a separator, we'll learn more about these later,
* but they are quite simple. */
separator = gtk_hseparator_new ();
/* Cack the separator into the vbox. Remember each of these
* widgets are being packed into a vbox, so they'll be stacked
* vertically. */
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), separator, FALSE, TRUE, 5);
gtk_widget_show (separator);
/* Create another new label, and show it. */
label = gtk_label_new ("gtk_hbox_new (TRUE, 0);");
gtk_misc_set_alignment (GTK_MISC (label), 0, 0);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), label, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (label);
/* Args are: homogeneous, spacing, expand, fill, padding */
box2 = make_box (TRUE, 0, TRUE, FALSE, 0);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (box2);
/* Args are: homogeneous, spacing, expand, fill, padding */
box2 = make_box (TRUE, 0, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (box2);
/* Another new separator. */
separator = gtk_hseparator_new ();
/* The last 3 arguments to gtk_box_pack_start are: expand, fill, padding. */
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), separator, FALSE, TRUE, 5);
gtk_widget_show (separator);
break;
case 2:
/* Create a new label, remember box1 is a vbox as created
* near the beginning of main() */
label = gtk_label_new ("gtk_hbox_new (FALSE, 10);");
gtk_misc_set_alignment (GTK_MISC (label), 0, 0);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), label, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (label);
/* Args are: homogeneous, spacing, expand, fill, padding */
box2 = make_box (FALSE, 10, TRUE, FALSE, 0);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (box2);
/* Args are: homogeneous, spacing, expand, fill, padding */
box2 = make_box (FALSE, 10, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (box2);
separator = gtk_hseparator_new ();
/* The last 3 arguments to gtk_box_pack_start are: expand, fill, padding. */
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), separator, FALSE, TRUE, 5);
gtk_widget_show (separator);
label = gtk_label_new ("gtk_hbox_new (FALSE, 0);");
gtk_misc_set_alignment (GTK_MISC (label), 0, 0);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), label, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (label);
/* Args are: homogeneous, spacing, expand, fill, padding */
box2 = make_box (FALSE, 0, TRUE, FALSE, 10);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (box2);
/* Args are: homogeneous, spacing, expand, fill, padding */
box2 = make_box (FALSE, 0, TRUE, TRUE, 10);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (box2);
separator = gtk_hseparator_new ();
/* The last 3 arguments to gtk_box_pack_start are: expand, fill, padding. */
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), separator, FALSE, TRUE, 5);
gtk_widget_show (separator);
break;
case 3:
/* This demonstrates the ability to use gtk_box_pack_end() to
* right justify widgets. First, we create a new box as before. */
box2 = make_box (FALSE, 0, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
/* Create the label that will be put at the end. */
label = gtk_label_new ("end");
/* Pack it using gtk_box_pack_end(), so it is put on the right
* side of the hbox created in the make_box() call. */
gtk_box_pack_end (GTK_BOX (box2), label, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
/* Show the label. */
gtk_widget_show (label);
/* Pack box2 into box1 (the vbox remember ? :) */
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (box2);
/* A separator for the bottom. */
separator = gtk_hseparator_new ();
/* This explicitly sets the separator to 400 pixels wide by 5 pixels
* high. This is so the hbox we created will also be 400 pixels wide,
* and the "end" label will be separated from the other labels in the
* hbox. Otherwise, all the widgets in the hbox would be packed as
* close together as possible. */
gtk_widget_set_usize (separator, 400, 5);
/* pack the separator into the vbox (box1) created near the start
* of main() */
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), separator, FALSE, TRUE, 5);
gtk_widget_show (separator);
}
/* Create another new hbox.. remember we can use as many as we need! */
quitbox = gtk_hbox_new (FALSE, 0);
/* Our quit button. */
button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("Quit");
/* Setup the signal to destroy the window. Remember that this will send
* the "destroy" signal to the window which will be caught by our signal
* handler as defined above. */
gtk_signal_connect_object (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (gtk_main_quit),
GTK_OBJECT (window));
/* Pack the button into the quitbox.
* The last 3 arguments to gtk_box_pack_start are: expand, fill, padding. */
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (quitbox), button, TRUE, FALSE, 0);
/* pack the quitbox into the vbox (box1) */
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), quitbox, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
/* Pack the vbox (box1) which now contains all our widgets, into the
* main window. */
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), box1);
/* And show everything left */
gtk_widget_show (button);
gtk_widget_show (quitbox);
gtk_widget_show (box1);
/* Showing the window last so everything pops up at once. */
gtk_widget_show (window);
/* And of course, our main function. */
gtk_main ();
/* Control returns here when gtk_main_quit() is called, but not when
* gtk_exit is used. */
return(0);
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Packing Using Tables
<p>
Let's take a look at another way of packing - Tables. These can be
extremely useful in certain situations.
Using tables, we create a grid that we can place widgets in. The
widgets may take up as many spaces as we specify.
The first thing to look at of course, is the gtk_table_new function:
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_table_new( gint rows,
gint columns,
gint homogeneous );
</verb></tscreen>
The first argument is the number of rows to make in the table, while
the second, obviously, is the number of columns.
The homogeneous argument has to do with how the table's boxes are
sized. If homogeneous is TRUE, the table boxes are resized to the size
of the largest widget in the table. If homogeneous is FALSE, the size
of a table boxes is dictated by the tallest widget in its same row,
and the widest widget in its column.
The rows and columns are laid out from 0 to n, where n was the number
specified in the call to gtk_table_new. So, if you specify rows = 2
and columns = 2, the layout would look something like this:
<tscreen><verb>
0 1 2
0+----------+----------+
| | |
1+----------+----------+
| | |
2+----------+----------+
</verb></tscreen>
Note that the coordinate system starts in the upper left hand corner.
To place a widget into a box, use the following function:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_table_attach( GtkTable *table,
GtkWidget *child,
gint left_attach,
gint right_attach,
gint top_attach,
gint bottom_attach,
gint xoptions,
gint yoptions,
gint xpadding,
gint ypadding );
</verb></tscreen>
Where the first argument ("table") is the table you've created and the
second ("child") the widget you wish to place in the table.
The left and right attach arguments specify where to place the widget,
and how many boxes to use. If you want a button in the lower right
table entry of our 2x2 table, and want it to fill that entry ONLY,
left_attach would be = 1, right_attach = 2, top_attach = 1,
bottom_attach = 2.
Now, if you wanted a widget to take up the whole top row of our 2x2
table, you'd use left_attach = 0, right_attach = 2, top_attach = 0,
bottom_attach = 1.
The xoptions and yoptions are used to specify packing options and may
be bitwise OR'ed together to allow multiple options.
These options are:
<itemize>
<item>GTK_FILL - If the table box is larger than the widget, and
GTK_FILL is specified, the widget will expand to use all the room
available.
<item>GTK_SHRINK - If the table widget was allocated less space then
was requested (usually by the user resizing the window), then the
widgets would normally just be pushed off the bottom of the window and
disappear. If GTK_SHRINK is specified, the widgets will shrink with
the table.
<item>GTK_EXPAND - This will cause the table to expand to use up any
remaining space in the window.
</itemize>
Padding is just like in boxes, creating a clear area around the widget
specified in pixels.
gtk_table_attach() has a LOT of options. So, there's a shortcut:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_table_attach_defaults( GtkTable *table,
GtkWidget *widget,
gint left_attach,
gint right_attach,
gint top_attach,
gint bottom_attach );
</verb></tscreen>
The X and Y options default to GTK_FILL | GTK_EXPAND, and X and Y
padding are set to 0. The rest of the arguments are identical to the
previous function.
We also have gtk_table_set_row_spacing() and
gtk_table_set_col_spacing(). This places spacing between the rows at
the specified row or column.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_table_set_row_spacing( GtkTable *table,
gint row,
gint spacing );
</verb></tscreen>
and
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_table_set_col_spacing ( GtkTable *table,
gint column,
gint spacing );
</verb></tscreen>
Note that for columns, the space goes to the right of the column, and
for rows, the space goes below the row.
You can also set a consistent spacing of all rows and/or columns with:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_table_set_row_spacings( GtkTable *table,
gint spacing );
</verb></tscreen>
And,
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_table_set_col_spacings( GtkTable *table,
gint spacing );
</verb></tscreen>
Note that with these calls, the last row and last column do not get
any spacing.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Table Packing Example
<p>
Here we make a window with three buttons in a 2x2 table.
The first two buttons will be placed in the upper row.
A third, quit button, is placed in the lower row, spanning both columns.
Which means it should look something like this:
<? <CENTER> >
<?
<IMG SRC="gtk_tut_table.gif" VSPACE="15" HSPACE="10"
ALT="Table Packing Example Image" WIDTH="180" HEIGHT="120">
>
<? </CENTER> >
Here's the source code:
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start table table.c */
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
/* Our callback.
* The data passed to this function is printed to stdout */
void callback( GtkWidget *widget,
gpointer data )
{
g_print ("Hello again - %s was pressed\n", (char *) data);
}
/* This callback quits the program */
void delete_event( GtkWidget *widget,
GdkEvent *event,
gpointer data )
{
gtk_main_quit ();
}
int main( int argc,
char *argv[] )
{
GtkWidget *window;
GtkWidget *button;
GtkWidget *table;
gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
/* Create a new window */
window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
/* Set the window title */
gtk_window_set_title (GTK_WINDOW (window), "Table");
/* Set a handler for delete_event that immediately
* exits GTK. */
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "delete_event",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (delete_event), NULL);
/* Sets the border width of the window. */
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 20);
/* Create a 2x2 table */
table = gtk_table_new (2, 2, TRUE);
/* Put the table in the main window */
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), table);
/* Create first button */
button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("button 1");
/* When the button is clicked, we call the "callback" function
* with a pointer to "button 1" as its argument */
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (callback), (gpointer) "button 1");
/* Insert button 1 into the upper left quadrant of the table */
gtk_table_attach_defaults (GTK_TABLE(table), button, 0, 1, 0, 1);
gtk_widget_show (button);
/* Create second button */
button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("button 2");
/* When the button is clicked, we call the "callback" function
* with a pointer to "button 2" as its argument */
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (callback), (gpointer) "button 2");
/* Insert button 2 into the upper right quadrant of the table */
gtk_table_attach_defaults (GTK_TABLE(table), button, 1, 2, 0, 1);
gtk_widget_show (button);
/* Create "Quit" button */
button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("Quit");
/* When the button is clicked, we call the "delete_event" function
* and the program exits */
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (delete_event), NULL);
/* Insert the quit button into the both
* lower quadrants of the table */
gtk_table_attach_defaults (GTK_TABLE(table), button, 0, 2, 1, 2);
gtk_widget_show (button);
gtk_widget_show (table);
gtk_widget_show (window);
gtk_main ();
return 0;
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>Widget Overview
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<p>
The general steps to creating a widget in GTK are:
<enum>
<item> gtk_*_new - one of various functions to create a new widget.
These are all detailed in this section.
<item> Connect all signals and events we wish to use to the
appropriate handlers.
<item> Set the attributes of the widget.
<item> Pack the widget into a container using the appropriate call
such as gtk_container_add() or gtk_box_pack_start().
<item> gtk_widget_show() the widget.
</enum>
gtk_widget_show() lets GTK know that we are done setting the
attributes of the widget, and it is ready to be displayed. You may
also use gtk_widget_hide to make it disappear again. The order in
which you show the widgets is not important, but I suggest showing the
window last so the whole window pops up at once rather than seeing the
individual widgets come up on the screen as they're formed. The
children of a widget (a window is a widget too) will not be displayed
until the window itself is shown using the gtk_widget_show() function.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Casting
<p>
You'll notice as you go on, that GTK uses a type casting system. This
is always done using macros that both test the ability to cast the
given item, and perform the cast. Some common ones you will see are:
<itemize>
<item> GTK_WIDGET(widget)
<item> GTK_OBJECT(object)
<item> GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(function)
<item> GTK_CONTAINER(container)
<item> GTK_WINDOW(window)
<item> GTK_BOX(box)
</itemize>
These are all used to cast arguments in functions. You'll see them in the
examples, and can usually tell when to use them simply by looking at the
function's declaration.
As you can see below in the class hierarchy, all GtkWidgets are
derived from the GtkObject base class. This means you can use a widget
in any place the function asks for an object - simply use the
GTK_OBJECT() macro.
For example:
<tscreen><verb>
gtk_signal_connect( GTK_OBJECT(button), "clicked",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(callback_function), callback_data);
</verb></tscreen>
This casts the button into an object, and provides a cast for the
function pointer to the callback.
Many widgets are also containers. If you look in the class hierarchy
below, you'll notice that many widgets derive from the GtkContainer
class. Any one of these widgets may be used with the GTK_CONTAINER
macro to pass them to functions that ask for containers.
Unfortunately, these macros are not extensively covered in the
tutorial, but I recommend taking a look through the GTK header
files. It can be very educational. In fact, it's not difficult to
learn how a widget works just by looking at the function declarations.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Widget Hierarchy
<p>
For your reference, here is the class hierarchy tree used to implement widgets.
<tscreen><verb>
GtkObject
+GtkWidget
| +GtkMisc
| | +GtkLabel
| | | +GtkAccelLabel
| | | `GtkTipsQuery
| | +GtkArrow
| | +GtkImage
| | `GtkPixmap
| +GtkContainer
| | +GtkBin
| | | +GtkAlignment
| | | +GtkFrame
| | | | `GtkAspectFrame
| | | +GtkButton
| | | | +GtkToggleButton
| | | | | `GtkCheckButton
| | | | | `GtkRadioButton
| | | | `GtkOptionMenu
| | | +GtkItem
| | | | +GtkMenuItem
| | | | | +GtkCheckMenuItem
| | | | | | `GtkRadioMenuItem
| | | | | `GtkTearoffMenuItem
| | | | +GtkListItem
| | | | `GtkTreeItem
| | | +GtkWindow
| | | | +GtkColorSelectionDialog
| | | | +GtkDialog
| | | | | `GtkInputDialog
| | | | +GtkDrawWindow
| | | | +GtkFileSelection
| | | | +GtkFontSelectionDialog
| | | | `GtkPlug
| | | +GtkEventBox
| | | +GtkHandleBox
| | | +GtkScrolledWindow
| | | `GtkViewport
| | +GtkBox
| | | +GtkButtonBox
| | | | +GtkHButtonBox
| | | | `GtkVButtonBox
| | | +GtkVBox
| | | | +GtkColorSelection
| | | | `GtkGammaCurve
| | | `GtkHBox
| | | +GtkCombo
| | | `GtkStatusbar
| | +GtkCList
| | | `GtkCTree
| | +GtkFixed
| | +GtkNotebook
| | | `GtkFontSelection
| | +GtkPaned
| | | +GtkHPaned
| | | `GtkVPaned
| | +GtkLayout
| | +GtkList
| | +GtkMenuShell
| | | +GtkMenuBar
| | | `GtkMenu
| | +GtkPacker
| | +GtkSocket
| | +GtkTable
| | +GtkToolbar
| | `GtkTree
| +GtkCalendar
| +GtkDrawingArea
| | `GtkCurve
| +GtkEditable
| | +GtkEntry
| | | `GtkSpinButton
| | `GtkText
| +GtkRuler
| | +GtkHRuler
| | `GtkVRuler
| +GtkRange
| | +GtkScale
| | | +GtkHScale
| | | `GtkVScale
| | `GtkScrollbar
| | +GtkHScrollbar
| | `GtkVScrollbar
| +GtkSeparator
| | +GtkHSeparator
| | `GtkVSeparator
| +GtkPreview
| `GtkProgress
| `GtkProgressBar
+GtkData
| +GtkAdjustment
| `GtkTooltips
`GtkItemFactory
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Widgets Without Windows
<p>
The following widgets do not have an associated window. If you want to
capture events, you'll have to use the GtkEventBox. See the section on
<ref id="sec_The_EventBox_Widget" name="The EventBox Widget">
<tscreen><verb>
GtkAlignment
GtkArrow
GtkBin
GtkBox
GtkImage
GtkItem
GtkLabel
GtkPixmap
GtkScrolledWindow
GtkSeparator
GtkTable
GtkAspectFrame
GtkFrame
GtkVBox
GtkHBox
GtkVSeparator
GtkHSeparator
</verb></tscreen>
We'll further our exploration of GTK by examining each widget in turn,
creating a few simple functions to display them. Another good source
is the testgtk.c program that comes with GTK. It can be found in
gtk/testgtk.c.
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>The Button Widget
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Normal Buttons
<p>
We've almost seen all there is to see of the button widget. It's
pretty simple. There are however two ways to create a button. You can
use the gtk_button_new_with_label() to create a button with a label,
or use gtk_button_new() to create a blank button. It's then up to you
to pack a label or pixmap into this new button. To do this, create a
new box, and then pack your objects into this box using the usual
gtk_box_pack_start, and then use gtk_container_add to pack the box
into the button.
Here's an example of using gtk_button_new to create a button with a
picture and a label in it. I've broken up the code to create a box
from the rest so you can use it in your programs. There are further
examples of using pixmaps later in the tutorial.
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start buttons buttons.c */
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
/* Create a new hbox with an image and a label packed into it
* and return the box. */
GtkWidget *xpm_label_box( GtkWidget *parent,
gchar *xpm_filename,
gchar *label_text )
{
GtkWidget *box1;
GtkWidget *label;
GtkWidget *pixmapwid;
GdkPixmap *pixmap;
GdkBitmap *mask;
GtkStyle *style;
/* Create box for xpm and label */
box1 = gtk_hbox_new (FALSE, 0);
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (box1), 2);
/* Get the style of the button to get the
* background color. */
style = gtk_widget_get_style(parent);
/* Now on to the xpm stuff */
pixmap = gdk_pixmap_create_from_xpm (parent->window, &amp;mask,
&amp;style->bg[GTK_STATE_NORMAL],
xpm_filename);
pixmapwid = gtk_pixmap_new (pixmap, mask);
/* Create a label for the button */
label = gtk_label_new (label_text);
/* Pack the pixmap and label into the box */
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1),
pixmapwid, FALSE, FALSE, 3);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), label, FALSE, FALSE, 3);
gtk_widget_show(pixmapwid);
gtk_widget_show(label);
return(box1);
}
/* Our usual callback function */
void callback( GtkWidget *widget,
gpointer data )
{
g_print ("Hello again - %s was pressed\n", (char *) data);
}
int main( int argc,
char *argv[] )
{
/* GtkWidget is the storage type for widgets */
GtkWidget *window;
GtkWidget *button;
GtkWidget *box1;
gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
/* Create a new window */
window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
gtk_window_set_title (GTK_WINDOW (window), "Pixmap'd Buttons!");
/* It's a good idea to do this for all windows. */
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "destroy",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (gtk_exit), NULL);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "delete_event",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (gtk_exit), NULL);
/* Sets the border width of the window. */
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 10);
gtk_widget_realize(window);
/* Create a new button */
button = gtk_button_new ();
/* Connect the "clicked" signal of the button to our callback */
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (callback), (gpointer) "cool button");
/* This calls our box creating function */
box1 = xpm_label_box(window, "info.xpm", "cool button");
/* Pack and show all our widgets */
gtk_widget_show(box1);
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (button), box1);
gtk_widget_show(button);
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), button);
gtk_widget_show (window);
/* Rest in gtk_main and wait for the fun to begin! */
gtk_main ();
return(0);
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
The xpm_label_box function could be used to pack xpm's and labels into
any widget that can be a container.
The Button widget has the following signals:
<itemize>
<item> pressed
<item> released
<item> clicked
<item> enter
<item> leave
</itemize>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Toggle Buttons
<p>
Toggle buttons are derived from normal buttons and are very similar,
except they will always be in one of two states, alternated by a
click. They may be depressed, and when you click again, they will pop
back up. Click again, and they will pop back down.
Toggle buttons are the basis for check buttons and radio buttons, as
such, many of the calls used for toggle buttons are inherited by radio
and check buttons. I will point these out when we come to them.
Creating a new toggle button:
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_toggle_button_new( void );
GtkWidget *gtk_toggle_button_new_with_label( gchar *label );
</verb></tscreen>
As you can imagine, these work identically to the normal button widget
calls. The first creates a blank toggle button, and the second, a
button with a label widget already packed into it.
To retrieve the state of the toggle widget, including radio and check
buttons, we use a GTK macro as shown in our example below. This tests
the state of the toggle in a callback. The signal of interest emitted
to us by toggle buttons (the toggle button, check button, and radio
button widgets), is the "toggled" signal. To check the state of these
buttons, set up a signal handler to catch the toggled signal, and use
the macro to determine its state. The callback will look something
like:
<tscreen><verb>
void toggle_button_callback (GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data)
{
if (GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON (widget)->active)
{
/* If control reaches here, the toggle button is down */
} else {
/* If control reaches here, the toggle button is up */
}
}
</verb></tscreen>
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_toggle_button_set_state( GtkToggleButton *toggle_button,
gint state );
</verb></tscreen>
The above call can be used to set the state of the toggle button, and
its children the radio and check buttons. Passing in your created
button as the first argument, and a TRUE or FALSE for the second state
argument to specify whether it should be down (depressed) or up
(released). Default is up, or FALSE.
Note that when you use the gtk_toggle_button_set_state() function, and
the state is actually changed, it causes the "clicked" signal to be
emitted from the button.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_toggle_button_toggled (GtkToggleButton *toggle_button);
</verb></tscreen>
This simply toggles the button, and emits the "toggled" signal.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Check Buttons
<p>
Check buttons inherent many properties and functions from the the
toggle buttons above, but look a little different. Rather than being
buttons with text inside them, they are small squares with the text to
the right of them. These are often used for toggling options on and
off in applications.
The two creation functions are similar to those of the normal button.
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_check_button_new( void );
GtkWidget *gtk_check_button_new_with_label ( gchar *label );
</verb></tscreen>
The new_with_label function creates a check button with a label beside
it.
Checking the state of the check button is identical to that of the
toggle button.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Radio Buttons <label id="sec_Radio_Buttons">
<p>
Radio buttons are similar to check buttons except they are grouped so
that only one may be selected/depressed at a time. This is good for
places in your application where you need to select from a short list
of options.
Creating a new radio button is done with one of these calls:
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_radio_button_new( GSList *group );
GtkWidget *gtk_radio_button_new_with_label( GSList *group,
gchar *label );
</verb></tscreen>
You'll notice the extra argument to these calls. They require a group
to perform their duty properly. The first call to
gtk_radio_button_new_with_label or gtk_radio_button_new_with_label
should pass NULL as the first argument. Then create a group using:
<tscreen><verb>
GSList *gtk_radio_button_group( GtkRadioButton *radio_button );
</verb></tscreen>
The important thing to remember is that gtk_radio_button_group must be
called for each new button added to the group, with the previous
button passed in as an argument. The result is then passed into the
call to gtk_radio_button_new or gtk_radio_button_new_with_label. This
allows a chain of buttons to be established. The example below should
make this clear.
You can shorten this slightly by using the following syntax, which
removes the need for a variable to hold the list of buttons. This form
is used in the example to create the third button:
<tscreen><verb>
button2 = gtk_radio_button_new_with_label(
gtk_radio_button_group (GTK_RADIO_BUTTON (button1)),
"button2");
</verb></tscreen>
It is also a good idea to explicitly set which button should be the
default depressed button with:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_toggle_button_set_state( GtkToggleButton *toggle_button,
gint state );
</verb></tscreen>
This is described in the section on toggle buttons, and works in
exactly the same way.
The following example creates a radio button group with three buttons.
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start radiobuttons radiobuttons.c */
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
#include <glib.h>
void close_application( GtkWidget *widget,
GdkEvent *event,
gpointer data )
{
gtk_main_quit();
}
int main( int argc,
char *argv[] )
{
GtkWidget *window = NULL;
GtkWidget *box1;
GtkWidget *box2;
GtkWidget *button;
GtkWidget *separator;
GSList *group;
gtk_init(&amp;argc,&amp;argv);
window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "delete_event",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(close_application),
NULL);
gtk_window_set_title (GTK_WINDOW (window), "radio buttons");
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 0);
box1 = gtk_vbox_new (FALSE, 0);
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), box1);
gtk_widget_show (box1);
box2 = gtk_vbox_new (FALSE, 10);
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (box2), 10);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (box2);
button = gtk_radio_button_new_with_label (NULL, "button1");
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box2), button, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (button);
group = gtk_radio_button_group (GTK_RADIO_BUTTON (button));
button = gtk_radio_button_new_with_label(group, "button2");
gtk_toggle_button_set_state (GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON (button), TRUE);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box2), button, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (button);
button = gtk_radio_button_new_with_label(
gtk_radio_button_group (GTK_RADIO_BUTTON (button)),
"button3");
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box2), button, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (button);
separator = gtk_hseparator_new ();
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), separator, FALSE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (separator);
box2 = gtk_vbox_new (FALSE, 10);
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (box2), 10);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, FALSE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (box2);
button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("close");
gtk_signal_connect_object (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(close_application),
GTK_OBJECT (window));
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box2), button, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
GTK_WIDGET_SET_FLAGS (button, GTK_CAN_DEFAULT);
gtk_widget_grab_default (button);
gtk_widget_show (button);
gtk_widget_show (window);
gtk_main();
return(0);
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- TODO: check out gtk_radio_button_new_from_widget function - TRG -->
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect> Adjustments <label id="sec_Adjustment">
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<p>
GTK+ has various widgets that can be visually adjusted by the user
using the mouse or the keyboard, such as the range widgets, described
in the <ref id="sec_Range_Widgets" name="Range Widgets">
section. There are also a few widgets that display some adjustable
portion of a larger area of data, such as the text widget and the
viewport widget.
Obviously, an application needs to be able to react to changes the
user makes in range widgets. One way to do this would be to have each
widget emit its own type of signal when its adjustment changes, and
either pass the new value to the signal handler, or require it to look
inside the widget's data structure in order to ascertain the value.
But you may also want to connect the adjustments of several widgets
together, so that adjusting one adjusts the others. The most obvious
example of this is connecting a scrollbar to a panning viewport or a
scrolling text area. If each widget has its own way of setting or
getting the adjustment value, then the programmer may have to write
their own signal handlers to translate between the output of one
widget's signal and the "input" of another's adjustment setting
function.
GTK+ solves this problem using the GtkAdjustment object, which is a
way for widgets to store and pass adjustment information in an
abstract and flexible form. The most obvious use of GtkAdjustment is
to store the configuration parameters and values of range widgets,
such as scrollbars and scale controls. However, since GtkAdjustments
are derived from GtkObject, they have some special powers beyond those
of normal data structures. Most importantly, they can emit signals,
just like widgets, and these signals can be used not only to allow
your program to react to user input on adjustable widgets, but also to
propagate adjustment values transparently between adjustable widgets.
<sect1> Creating an Adjustment
<p>
You create an adjustment using:
<tscreen><verb>
GtkObject *gtk_adjustment_new( gfloat value,
gfloat lower,
gfloat upper,
gfloat step_increment,
gfloat page_increment,
gfloat page_size );
</verb></tscreen>
The <tt/value/ argument is the initial value you want to give to the
adjustment, usually corresponding to the topmost or leftmost position
of an adjustable widget. The <tt/lower/ argument specifies the lowest
value which the adjustment can hold. The <tt/step_increment/ argument
specifies the "smaller" of the two increments by which the user can
change the value, while the <tt/page_increment/ is the "larger" one.
The <tt/page_size/ argument usually corresponds somehow to the visible
area of a panning widget. The <tt/upper/ argument is used to represent
the bottom most or right most coordinate in a panning widget's
child. Therefore it is <em/not/ always the largest number that
<tt/value/ can take, since the <tt/page_size/ of such widgets is
usually non-zero.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Using Adjustments the Easy Way
<p>
The adjustable widgets can be roughly divided into those which use and
require specific units for these values and those which treat them as
arbitrary numbers. The group which treats the values as arbitrary
numbers includes the range widgets (scrollbars and scales, the
progress bar widget, and the spin button widget). These widgets are
all the widgets which are typically "adjusted" directly by the user
with the mouse or keyboard. They will treat the <tt/lower/ and
<tt/upper/ values of an adjustment as a range within which the user
can manipulate the adjustment's <tt/value/. By default, they will only
modify the <tt/value/ of an adjustment.
The other group includes the text widget, the viewport widget, the
compound list widget, and the scrolled window widget. All of these
widgets use pixel values for their adjustments. These are also all
widgets which are typically "adjusted" indirectly using scrollbars.
While all widgets which use adjustments can either create their own
adjustments or use ones you supply, you'll generally want to let this
particular category of widgets create its own adjustments. Usually,
they will eventually override all the values except the <tt/value/
itself in whatever adjustments you give them, but the results are, in
general, undefined (meaning, you'll have to read the source code to
find out, and it may be different from widget to widget).
Now, you're probably thinking, since text widgets and viewports insist
on setting everything except the <tt/value/ of their adjustments,
while scrollbars will <em/only/ touch the adjustment's <tt/value/, if
you <em/share/ an adjustment object between a scrollbar and a text
widget, manipulating the scrollbar will automagically adjust the text
widget? Of course it will! Just like this:
<tscreen><verb>
/* creates its own adjustments */
text = gtk_text_new (NULL, NULL);
/* uses the newly-created adjustment for the scrollbar as well */
vscrollbar = gtk_vscrollbar_new (GTK_TEXT(text)->vadj);
</verb></tscreen>
</sect1>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Adjustment Internals
<p>
Ok, you say, that's nice, but what if I want to create my own handlers
to respond when the user adjusts a range widget or a spin button, and
how do I get at the value of the adjustment in these handlers? To
answer these questions and more, let's start by taking a look at
<tt>struct _GtkAdjustment</tt> itself:
<tscreen><verb>
struct _GtkAdjustment
{
GtkData data;
gfloat lower;
gfloat upper;
gfloat value;
gfloat step_increment;
gfloat page_increment;
gfloat page_size;
};
</verb></tscreen>
The first thing you should know is that there aren't any handy-dandy
macros or accessor functions for getting the <tt/value/ out of a
GtkAdjustment, so you'll have to (horror of horrors) do it like a
<em/real/ C programmer. Don't worry - the <tt>GTK_ADJUSTMENT
(Object)</tt> macro does run-time type checking (as do all the GTK+
type-casting macros, actually).
Since, when you set the <tt/value/ of an adjustment, you generally
want the change to be reflected by every widget that uses this
adjustment, GTK+ provides this convenience function to do this:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_adjustment_set_value( GtkAdjustment *adjustment,
gfloat value );
</verb></tscreen>
As mentioned earlier, GtkAdjustment is a subclass of GtkObject just
like all the various widgets, and thus it is able to emit signals.
This is, of course, why updates happen automagically when you share an
adjustment object between a scrollbar and another adjustable widget;
all adjustable widgets connect signal handlers to their adjustment's
<tt/value_changed/ signal, as can your program. Here's the definition
of this signal in <tt/struct _GtkAdjustmentClass/:
<tscreen><verb>
void (* value_changed) (GtkAdjustment *adjustment);
</verb></tscreen>
The various widgets that use the GtkAdjustment object will emit this
signal on an adjustment whenever they change its value. This happens
both when user input causes the slider to move on a range widget, as
well as when the program explicitly changes the value with
<tt/gtk_adjustment_set_value()/. So, for example, if you have a scale
widget, and you want to change the rotation of a picture whenever its
value changes, you would create a callback like this:
<tscreen><verb>
void cb_rotate_picture (GtkAdjustment *adj, GtkWidget *picture)
{
set_picture_rotation (picture, adj->value);
...
</verb></tscreen>
and connect it to the scale widget's adjustment like this:
<tscreen><verb>
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (adj), "value_changed",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (cb_rotate_picture), picture);
</verb></tscreen>
What about when a widget reconfigures the <tt/upper/ or <tt/lower/
fields of its adjustment, such as when a user adds more text to a text
widget? In this case, it emits the <tt/changed/ signal, which looks
like this:
<tscreen><verb>
void (* changed) (GtkAdjustment *adjustment);
</verb></tscreen>
Range widgets typically connect a handler to this signal, which
changes their appearance to reflect the change - for example, the size
of the slider in a scrollbar will grow or shrink in inverse proportion
to the difference between the <tt/lower/ and <tt/upper/ values of its
adjustment.
You probably won't ever need to attach a handler to this signal,
unless you're writing a new type of range widget. However, if you
change any of the values in a GtkAdjustment directly, you should emit
this signal on it to reconfigure whatever widgets are using it, like
this:
<tscreen><verb>
gtk_signal_emit_by_name (GTK_OBJECT (adjustment), "changed");
</verb></tscreen>
Now go forth and adjust!
</sect1>
</sect>
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect> Range Widgets<label id="sec_Range_Widgets">
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<p>
The category of range widgets includes the ubiquitous scrollbar widget
and the less common "scale" widget. Though these two types of widgets
are generally used for different purposes, they are quite similar in
function and implementation. All range widgets share a set of common
graphic elements, each of which has its own X window and receives
events. They all contain a "trough" and a "slider" (what is sometimes
called a "thumbwheel" in other GUI environments). Dragging the slider
with the pointer moves it back and forth within the trough, while
clicking in the trough advances the slider towards the location of the
click, either completely, or by a designated amount, depending on
which mouse button is used.
As mentioned in <ref id="sec_Adjustment" name="Adjustments"> above,
all range widgets are associated with an adjustment object, from which
they calculate the length of the slider and it's position within the
trough. When the user manipulates the slider, the range widget will
change the value of the adjustment.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Scrollbar Widgets
<p>
These are your standard, run-of-the-mill scrollbars. These should be
used only for scrolling some other widget, such as a list, a text box,
or a viewport (and it's generally easier to use the scrolled window
widget in most cases). For other purposes, you should use scale
widgets, as they are friendlier and more featureful.
There are separate types for horizontal and vertical scrollbars.
There really isn't much to say about these. You create them with the
following functions, defined in <tt>&lt;gtk/gtkhscrollbar.h&gt;</tt>
and <tt>&lt;gtk/gtkvscrollbar.h&gt;</tt>:
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_hscrollbar_new( GtkAdjustment *adjustment );
GtkWidget *gtk_vscrollbar_new( GtkAdjustment *adjustment );
</verb></tscreen>
and that's about it (if you don't believe me, look in the header
files!). The <tt/adjustment/ argument can either be a pointer to an
existing GtkAdjustment, or NULL, in which case one will be created for
you. Specifying NULL might actually be useful in this case, if you
wish to pass the newly-created adjustment to the constructor function
of some other widget which will configure it for you, such as a text
widget.
</sect1>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Scale Widgets
<p>
Scale widgets are used to allow the user to visually select and
manipulate a value within a specific range. You might want to use a
scale widget, for example, to adjust the magnification level on a
zoomed preview of a picture, or to control the brightness of a colour,
or to specify the number of minutes of inactivity before a screensaver
takes over the screen.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2>Creating a Scale Widget
<p>
As with scrollbars, there are separate widget types for horizontal and
vertical scale widgets. (Most programmers seem to favour horizontal
scale widgets). Since they work essentially the same way, there's no
need to treat them separately here. The following functions, defined
in <tt>&lt;gtk/gtkvscale.h&gt;</tt> and
<tt>&lt;gtk/gtkhscale.h&gt;</tt>, create vertical and horizontal scale
widgets, respectively:
<tscreen>
<verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_vscale_new( GtkAdjustment *adjustment );
GtkWidget *gtk_hscale_new( GtkAdjustment *adjustment );
</verb>
</tscreen>
The <tt/adjustment/ argument can either be an adjustment which has
already been created with <tt/gtk_adjustment_new()/, or <tt/NULL/, in
which case, an anonymous GtkAdjustment is created with all of its
values set to <tt/0.0/ (which isn't very useful in this case). In
order to avoid confusing yourself, you probably want to create your
adjustment with a <tt/page_size/ of <tt/0.0/ so that its <tt/upper/
value actually corresponds to the highest value the user can select.
(If you're <em/already/ thoroughly confused, read the section on <ref
id="sec_Adjustment" name="Adjustments"> again for an explanation of
what exactly adjustments do and how to create and manipulate them).
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> Functions and Signals (well, functions, at least)
<p>
Scale widgets can display their current value as a number beside the
trough. The default behaviour is to show the value, but you can change
this with this function:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_scale_set_draw_value( GtkScale *scale,
gint draw_value );
</verb></tscreen>
As you might have guessed, <tt/draw_value/ is either <tt/TRUE/ or
<tt/FALSE/, with predictable consequences for either one.
The value displayed by a scale widget is rounded to one decimal point
by default, as is the <tt/value/ field in its GtkAdjustment. You can
change this with:
<tscreen>
<verb>
void gtk_scale_set_digits( GtkScale *scale,
gint digits );
</verb>
</tscreen>
where <tt/digits/ is the number of decimal places you want. You can
set <tt/digits/ to anything you like, but no more than 13 decimal
places will actually be drawn on screen.
Finally, the value can be drawn in different positions
relative to the trough:
<tscreen>
<verb>
void gtk_scale_set_value_pos( GtkScale *scale,
GtkPositionType pos );
</verb>
</tscreen>
The argument <tt/pos/ is of type <tt>GtkPositionType</tt>, which is
defined in <tt>&lt;gtk/gtkenums.h&gt;</tt>, and can take one of the
following values:
<itemize>
<item> GTK_POS_LEFT
<item> GTK_POS_RIGHT
<item> GTK_POS_TOP
<item> GTK_POS_BOTTOM
</itemize>
If you position the value on the "side" of the trough (e.g. on the top
or bottom of a horizontal scale widget), then it will follow the
slider up and down the trough.
All the preceding functions are defined in
<tt>&lt;gtk/gtkscale.h&gt;</tt>.
</sect2>
</sect1>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Common Functions <label id="sec_Range_Functions">
<p>
The GtkRange widget class is fairly complicated internally, but, like
all the "base class" widgets, most of its complexity is only
interesting if you want to hack on it. Also, almost all of the
functions and signals it defines are only really used in writing
derived widgets. There are, however, a few useful functions that are
defined in <tt>&lt;gtk/gtkrange.h&gt;</tt> and will work on all range
widgets.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> Setting the Update Policy
<p>
The "update policy" of a range widget defines at what points during
user interaction it will change the <tt/value/ field of its
GtkAdjustment and emit the "value_changed" signal on this
GtkAdjustment. The update policies, defined in
<tt>&lt;gtk/gtkenums.h&gt;</tt> as type <tt>enum GtkUpdateType</tt>,
are:
<itemize>
<item>GTK_UPDATE_POLICY_CONTINUOUS - This is the default. The
"value_changed" signal is emitted continuously, i.e. whenever the
slider is moved by even the tiniest amount.
</item>
<item>GTK_UPDATE_POLICY_DISCONTINUOUS - The "value_changed" signal is
only emitted once the slider has stopped moving and the user has
released the mouse button.
</item>
<item>GTK_UPDATE_POLICY_DELAYED - The "value_change" signal is emitted
when the user releases the mouse button, or if the slider stops moving
for a short period of time.
</item>
</itemize>
The update policy of a range widget can be set by casting it using the
<tt>GTK_RANGE (Widget)</tt> macro and passing it to this function:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_range_set_update_policy( GtkRange *range,
GtkUpdateType policy) ;
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2>Getting and Setting Adjustments
<p>
Getting and setting the adjustment for a range widget "on the fly" is
done, predictably, with:
<tscreen><verb>
GtkAdjustment* gtk_range_get_adjustment( GtkRange *range );
void gtk_range_set_adjustment( GtkRange *range,
GtkAdjustment *adjustment );
</verb></tscreen>
<tt/gtk_range_get_adjustment()/ returns a pointer to the adjustment to
which <tt/range/ is connected.
<tt/gtk_range_set_adjustment()/ does absolutely nothing if you pass it
the adjustment that <tt/range/ is already using, regardless of whether
you changed any of its fields or not. If you pass it a new
GtkAdjustment, it will unreference the old one if it exists (possibly
destroying it), connect the appropriate signals to the new one, and
call the private function <tt/gtk_range_adjustment_changed()/, which
will (or at least, is supposed to...) recalculate the size and/or
position of the slider and redraw if necessary. As mentioned in the
section on adjustments, if you wish to reuse the same GtkAdjustment,
when you modify its values directly, you should emit the "changed"
signal on it, like this:
<tscreen><verb>
gtk_signal_emit_by_name (GTK_OBJECT (adjustment), "changed");
</verb></tscreen>
</sect2>
</sect1>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Key and Mouse bindings
<p>
All of the GTK+ range widgets react to mouse clicks in more or less
the same way. Clicking button-1 in the trough will cause its
adjustment's <tt/page_increment/ to be added or subtracted from its
<tt/value/, and the slider to be moved accordingly. Clicking mouse
button-2 in the trough will jump the slider to the point at which the
button was clicked. Clicking any button on a scrollbar's arrows will
cause its adjustment's value to change <tt/step_increment/ at a time.
It may take a little while to get used to, but by default, scrollbars
as well as scale widgets can take the keyboard focus in GTK+. If you
think your users will find this too confusing, you can always disable
this by unsetting the GTK_CAN_FOCUS flag on the scrollbar, like this:
<tscreen><verb>
GTK_WIDGET_UNSET_FLAGS (scrollbar, GTK_CAN_FOCUS);
</verb></tscreen>
The key bindings (which are, of course, only active when the widget
has focus) are slightly different between horizontal and vertical
range widgets, for obvious reasons. They are also not quite the same
for scale widgets as they are for scrollbars, for somewhat less
obvious reasons (possibly to avoid confusion between the keys for
horizontal and vertical scrollbars in scrolled windows, where both
operate on the same area).
<sect2> Vertical Range Widgets
<p>
All vertical range widgets can be operated with the up and down arrow
keys, as well as with the <tt/Page Up/ and <tt/Page Down/ keys. The
arrows move the slider up and down by <tt/step_increment/, while
<tt/Page Up/ and <tt/Page Down/ move it by <tt/page_increment/.
The user can also move the slider all the way to one end or the other
of the trough using the keyboard. With the GtkVScale widget, this is
done with the <tt/Home/ and <tt/End/ keys, whereas with the
GtkVScrollbar widget, this is done by typing <tt>Control-Page Up</tt>
and <tt>Control-Page Down</tt>.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> Horizontal Range Widgets
<p>
The left and right arrow keys work as you might expect in these
widgets, moving the slider back and forth by <tt/step_increment/. The
<tt/Home/ and <tt/End/ keys move the slider to the ends of the trough.
For the GtkHScale widget, moving the slider by <tt/page_increment/ is
accomplished with <tt>Control-Left</tt> and <tt>Control-Right</tt>,
while for GtkHScrollbar, it's done with <tt>Control-Home</tt> and
<tt>Control-End</tt>.
</sect2>
</sect1>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Example<label id="sec_Range_Example">
<p>
This example is a somewhat modified version of the "range controls"
test from <tt/testgtk.c/. It basically puts up a window with three
range widgets all connected to the same adjustment, and a couple of
controls for adjusting some of the parameters mentioned above and in
the seciton on adjustments, so you can see how they affect the way
these widgets work for the user.
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start rangewidgets rangewidgets.c */
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
GtkWidget *hscale, *vscale;
void cb_pos_menu_select( GtkWidget *item,
GtkPositionType pos )
{
/* Set the value position on both scale widgets */
gtk_scale_set_value_pos (GTK_SCALE (hscale), pos);
gtk_scale_set_value_pos (GTK_SCALE (vscale), pos);
}
void cb_update_menu_select( GtkWidget *item,
GtkUpdateType policy )
{
/* Set the update policy for both scale widgets */
gtk_range_set_update_policy (GTK_RANGE (hscale), policy);
gtk_range_set_update_policy (GTK_RANGE (vscale), policy);
}
void cb_digits_scale( GtkAdjustment *adj )
{
/* Set the number of decimal places to which adj->value is rounded */
gtk_scale_set_digits (GTK_SCALE (hscale), (gint) adj->value);
gtk_scale_set_digits (GTK_SCALE (vscale), (gint) adj->value);
}
void cb_page_size( GtkAdjustment *get,
GtkAdjustment *set )
{
/* Set the page size and page increment size of the sample
* adjustment to the value specified by the "Page Size" scale */
set->page_size = get->value;
set->page_increment = get->value;
/* Now emit the "changed" signal to reconfigure all the widgets that
* are attached to this adjustment */
gtk_signal_emit_by_name (GTK_OBJECT (set), "changed");
}
void cb_draw_value( GtkToggleButton *button )
{
/* Turn the value display on the scale widgets off or on depending
* on the state of the checkbutton */
gtk_scale_set_draw_value (GTK_SCALE (hscale), button->active);
gtk_scale_set_draw_value (GTK_SCALE (vscale), button->active);
}
/* Convenience functions */
GtkWidget *make_menu_item( gchar *name,
GtkSignalFunc callback,
gpointer data )
{
GtkWidget *item;
item = gtk_menu_item_new_with_label (name);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (item), "activate",
callback, data);
gtk_widget_show (item);
return(item);
}
void scale_set_default_values( GtkScale *scale )
{
gtk_range_set_update_policy (GTK_RANGE (scale),
GTK_UPDATE_CONTINUOUS);
gtk_scale_set_digits (scale, 1);
gtk_scale_set_value_pos (scale, GTK_POS_TOP);
gtk_scale_set_draw_value (scale, TRUE);
}
/* makes the sample window */
void create_range_controls( void )
{
GtkWidget *window;
GtkWidget *box1, *box2, *box3;
GtkWidget *button;
GtkWidget *scrollbar;
GtkWidget *separator;
GtkWidget *opt, *menu, *item;
GtkWidget *label;
GtkWidget *scale;
GtkObject *adj1, *adj2;
/* Standard window-creating stuff */
window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "destroy",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(gtk_main_quit),
NULL);
gtk_window_set_title (GTK_WINDOW (window), "range controls");
box1 = gtk_vbox_new (FALSE, 0);
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), box1);
gtk_widget_show (box1);
box2 = gtk_hbox_new (FALSE, 10);
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (box2), 10);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (box2);
/* calue, lower, upper, step_increment, page_increment, page_size */
/* Note that the page_size value only makes a difference for
* scrollbar widgets, and the highest value you'll get is actually
* (upper - page_size). */
adj1 = gtk_adjustment_new (0.0, 0.0, 101.0, 0.1, 1.0, 1.0);
vscale = gtk_vscale_new (GTK_ADJUSTMENT (adj1));
scale_set_default_values (GTK_SCALE (vscale));
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box2), vscale, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (vscale);
box3 = gtk_vbox_new (FALSE, 10);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box2), box3, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (box3);
/* Reuse the same adjustment */
hscale = gtk_hscale_new (GTK_ADJUSTMENT (adj1));
gtk_widget_set_usize (GTK_WIDGET (hscale), 200, 30);
scale_set_default_values (GTK_SCALE (hscale));
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box3), hscale, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (hscale);
/* Reuse the same adjustment again */
scrollbar = gtk_hscrollbar_new (GTK_ADJUSTMENT (adj1));
/* Notice how this causes the scales to always be updated
* continuously when the scrollbar is moved */
gtk_range_set_update_policy (GTK_RANGE (scrollbar),
GTK_UPDATE_CONTINUOUS);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box3), scrollbar, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (scrollbar);
box2 = gtk_hbox_new (FALSE, 10);
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (box2), 10);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (box2);
/* A checkbutton to control whether the value is displayed or not */
button = gtk_check_button_new_with_label("Display value on scale widgets");
gtk_toggle_button_set_state (GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON (button), TRUE);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (button), "toggled",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(cb_draw_value), NULL);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box2), button, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (button);
box2 = gtk_hbox_new (FALSE, 10);
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (box2), 10);
/* An option menu to change the position of the value */
label = gtk_label_new ("Scale Value Position:");
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box2), label, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (label);
opt = gtk_option_menu_new();
menu = gtk_menu_new();
item = make_menu_item ("Top",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(cb_pos_menu_select),
GINT_TO_POINTER (GTK_POS_TOP));
gtk_menu_append (GTK_MENU (menu), item);
item = make_menu_item ("Bottom", GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (cb_pos_menu_select),
GINT_TO_POINTER (GTK_POS_BOTTOM));
gtk_menu_append (GTK_MENU (menu), item);
item = make_menu_item ("Left", GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (cb_pos_menu_select),
GINT_TO_POINTER (GTK_POS_LEFT));
gtk_menu_append (GTK_MENU (menu), item);
item = make_menu_item ("Right", GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (cb_pos_menu_select),
GINT_TO_POINTER (GTK_POS_RIGHT));
gtk_menu_append (GTK_MENU (menu), item);
gtk_option_menu_set_menu (GTK_OPTION_MENU (opt), menu);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box2), opt, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (opt);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (box2);
box2 = gtk_hbox_new (FALSE, 10);
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (box2), 10);
/* Yet another option menu, this time for the update policy of the
* scale widgets */
label = gtk_label_new ("Scale Update Policy:");
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box2), label, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (label);
opt = gtk_option_menu_new();
menu = gtk_menu_new();
item = make_menu_item ("Continuous",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (cb_update_menu_select),
GINT_TO_POINTER (GTK_UPDATE_CONTINUOUS));
gtk_menu_append (GTK_MENU (menu), item);
item = make_menu_item ("Discontinuous",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (cb_update_menu_select),
GINT_TO_POINTER (GTK_UPDATE_DISCONTINUOUS));
gtk_menu_append (GTK_MENU (menu), item);
item = make_menu_item ("Delayed",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (cb_update_menu_select),
GINT_TO_POINTER (GTK_UPDATE_DELAYED));
gtk_menu_append (GTK_MENU (menu), item);
gtk_option_menu_set_menu (GTK_OPTION_MENU (opt), menu);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box2), opt, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (opt);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (box2);
box2 = gtk_hbox_new (FALSE, 10);
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (box2), 10);
/* A GtkHScale widget for adjusting the number of digits on the
* sample scales. */
label = gtk_label_new ("Scale Digits:");
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box2), label, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (label);
adj2 = gtk_adjustment_new (1.0, 0.0, 5.0, 1.0, 1.0, 0.0);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (adj2), "value_changed",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (cb_digits_scale), NULL);
scale = gtk_hscale_new (GTK_ADJUSTMENT (adj2));
gtk_scale_set_digits (GTK_SCALE (scale), 0);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box2), scale, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (scale);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (box2);
box2 = gtk_hbox_new (FALSE, 10);
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (box2), 10);
/* And, one last GtkHScale widget for adjusting the page size of the
* scrollbar. */
label = gtk_label_new ("Scrollbar Page Size:");
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box2), label, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (label);
adj2 = gtk_adjustment_new (1.0, 1.0, 101.0, 1.0, 1.0, 0.0);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (adj2), "value_changed",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (cb_page_size), adj1);
scale = gtk_hscale_new (GTK_ADJUSTMENT (adj2));
gtk_scale_set_digits (GTK_SCALE (scale), 0);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box2), scale, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (scale);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (box2);
separator = gtk_hseparator_new ();
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), separator, FALSE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (separator);
box2 = gtk_vbox_new (FALSE, 10);
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (box2), 10);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, FALSE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (box2);
button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("Quit");
gtk_signal_connect_object (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(gtk_main_quit),
NULL);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box2), button, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
GTK_WIDGET_SET_FLAGS (button, GTK_CAN_DEFAULT);
gtk_widget_grab_default (button);
gtk_widget_show (button);
gtk_widget_show (window);
}
int main( int argc,
char *argv[] )
{
gtk_init(&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
create_range_controls();
gtk_main();
return(0);
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
</sect1>
</sect>
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect> Miscellaneous Widgets
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Labels
<p>
Labels are used a lot in GTK, and are relatively simple. Labels emit
no signals as they do not have an associated X window. If you need to
catch signals, or do clipping, use the EventBox widget.
To create a new label, use:
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_label_new( char *str );
</verb></tscreen>
Where the sole argument is the string you wish the label to display.
To change the label's text after creation, use the function:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_label_set( GtkLabel *label,
char *str );
</verb></tscreen>
Where the first argument is the label you created previously (cast using
the GTK_LABEL() macro), and the second is the new string.
The space needed for the new string will be automatically adjusted if needed.
To retrieve the current string, use:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_label_get( GtkLabel *label,
char **str );
</verb></tscreen>
Where the first argument is the label you've created, and the second, the
return for the string.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>The Tooltips Widget
<p>
These are the little text strings that pop up when you leave your pointer
over a button or other widget for a few seconds. They are easy to use, so I
will just explain them without giving an example. If you want to see some
code, take a look at the testgtk.c program distributed with GDK.
Some widgets (such as the label) will not work with tooltips.
The first call you will use to create a new tooltip. You only need to do
this once in a given function. The <tt/GtkTooltip/ object this function
returns can be used to create multiple tooltips.
<tscreen><verb>
GtkTooltips *gtk_tooltips_new( void );
</verb></tscreen>
Once you have created a new tooltip, and the widget you wish to use it on,
simply use this call to set it:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_tooltips_set_tip( GtkTooltips *tooltips,
GtkWidget *widget,
const gchar *tip_text,
const gchar *tip_private );
</verb></tscreen>
The first argument is the tooltip you've already created, followed by the
widget you wish to have this tooltip pop up for, and the text you wish it to
say. The last argument is a text string that can be used as an identifier when using
GtkTipsQuery to implement context sensitive help. For now, you can set
it to NULL.
<!-- TODO: sort out what how to do the context sensitive help -->
Here's a short example:
<tscreen><verb>
GtkTooltips *tooltips;
GtkWidget *button;
...
tooltips = gtk_tooltips_new ();
button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("button 1");
...
gtk_tooltips_set_tip (tooltips, button, "This is button 1", NULL);
</verb></tscreen>
There are other calls that can be used with tooltips. I will just
list them with a brief description of what they do.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_tooltips_enable( GtkTooltips *tooltips );
</verb></tscreen>
Enable a disabled set of tooltips.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_tooltips_disable( GtkTooltips *tooltips );
</verb></tscreen>
Disable an enabled set of tooltips.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_tooltips_set_delay( GtkTooltips *tooltips,
gint delay );
</verb></tscreen>
Sets how many milliseconds you have to hold your pointer over the
widget before the tooltip will pop up. The default is 1000 milliseconds
or 1 second.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_tooltips_set_colors( GtkTooltips *tooltips,
GdkColor *background,
GdkColor *foreground );
</verb></tscreen>
Set the foreground and background color of the tooltips. Again, I have no
idea how to specify the colors.
And that's all the functions associated with tooltips. More than you'll
ever want to know :)
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Progress Bars
<p>
Progress bars are used to show the status of an operation. They are pretty
easy to use, as you will see with the code below. But first lets start out
with the call to create a new progress bar.
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_progress_bar_new( void );
</verb></tscreen>
Now that the progress bar has been created we can use it.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_progress_bar_update( GtkProgressBar *pbar,
gfloat percentage );
</verb></tscreen>
The first argument is the progress bar you wish to operate on, and the second
argument is the amount 'completed', meaning the amount the progress bar has
been filled from 0-100%. This is passed to the function as a real number
ranging from 0 to 1.
Progress Bars are usually used with timeouts or other such functions (see
section on <ref id="sec_timeouts" name="Timeouts, I/O and Idle Functions">)
to give the illusion of multitasking. All will employ
the gtk_progress_bar_update function in the same manner.
Here is an example of the progress bar, updated using timeouts. This
code also shows you how to reset the Progress Bar.
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start progressbar progressbar.c */
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
static int ptimer = 0;
int pstat = TRUE;
/* This function increments and updates the progress bar, it also resets
the progress bar if pstat is FALSE */
gint progress (gpointer data)
{
gfloat pvalue;
/* get the current value of the progress bar */
pvalue = GTK_PROGRESS_BAR (data)->percentage;
if ((pvalue >= 1.0) || (pstat == FALSE)) {
pvalue = 0.0;
pstat = TRUE;
}
pvalue += 0.01;
gtk_progress_bar_update (GTK_PROGRESS_BAR (data), pvalue);
return TRUE;
}
/* This function signals a reset of the progress bar */
void progress_r (void)
{
pstat = FALSE;
}
void destroy (GtkWidget *widget, GdkEvent *event, gpointer data)
{
gtk_main_quit ();
}
int main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
GtkWidget *window;
GtkWidget *button;
GtkWidget *label;
GtkWidget *table;
GtkWidget *pbar;
gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "delete_event",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (destroy), NULL);
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 10);
table = gtk_table_new(3,2,TRUE);
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), table);
label = gtk_label_new ("Progress Bar Example");
gtk_table_attach_defaults(GTK_TABLE(table), label, 0,2,0,1);
gtk_widget_show(label);
/* Create a new progress bar, pack it into the table, and show it */
pbar = gtk_progress_bar_new ();
gtk_table_attach_defaults(GTK_TABLE(table), pbar, 0,2,1,2);
gtk_widget_show (pbar);
/* Set the timeout to handle automatic updating of the progress bar */
ptimer = gtk_timeout_add (100, progress, pbar);
/* This button signals the progress bar to be reset */
button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("Reset");
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (progress_r), NULL);
gtk_table_attach_defaults(GTK_TABLE(table), button, 0,1,2,3);
gtk_widget_show(button);
button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("Cancel");
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (destroy), NULL);
gtk_table_attach_defaults(GTK_TABLE(table), button, 1,2,2,3);
gtk_widget_show (button);
gtk_widget_show(table);
gtk_widget_show(window);
gtk_main ();
return 0;
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
In this small program there are four areas that concern the general operation
of Progress Bars, we will look at them in the order they are called.
<tscreen><verb>
pbar = gtk_progress_bar_new ();
</verb></tscreen>
This code creates a new progress bar, called pbar.
<tscreen><verb>
ptimer = gtk_timeout_add (100, progress, pbar);
</verb></tscreen>
This code uses timeouts to enable a constant time interval, timeouts are
not necessary in the use of Progress Bars.
<tscreen><verb>
pvalue = GTK_PROGRESS_BAR (data)->percentage;
</verb></tscreen>
This code assigns the current value of the percentage bar to pvalue.
<tscreen><verb>
gtk_progress_bar_update (GTK_PROGRESS_BAR (data), pvalue);
</verb></tscreen>
Finally, this code updates the progress bar with the value of pvalue
And that is all there is to know about Progress Bars, enjoy.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Dialogs
<p>
The Dialog widget is very simple, and is actually just a window with a few
things pre-packed into it for you. The structure for a Dialog is:
<tscreen><verb>
struct GtkDialog
{
GtkWindow window;
GtkWidget *vbox;
GtkWidget *action_area;
};
</verb></tscreen>
So you see, it simply creates a window, and then packs a vbox into the top,
then a separator, and then an hbox for the "action_area".
The Dialog widget can be used for pop-up messages to the user, and
other similar tasks. It is really basic, and there is only one
function for the dialog box, which is:
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_dialog_new( void );
</verb></tscreen>
So to create a new dialog box, use,
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *window;
window = gtk_dialog_new ();
</verb></tscreen>
This will create the dialog box, and it is now up to you to use it.
you could pack a button in the action_area by doing something like this:
<tscreen><verb>
button = ...
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (GTK_DIALOG (window)->action_area), button,
TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (button);
</verb></tscreen>
And you could add to the vbox area by packing, for instance, a label
in it, try something like this:
<tscreen><verb>
label = gtk_label_new ("Dialogs are groovy");
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (GTK_DIALOG (window)->vbox), label, TRUE,
TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (label);
</verb></tscreen>
As an example in using the dialog box, you could put two buttons in
the action_area, a Cancel button and an Ok button, and a label in the vbox
area, asking the user a question or giving an error etc. Then you could
attach a different signal to each of the buttons and perform the
operation the user selects.
If the simple functionality provided by the default vertical and
horizontal boxes in the two areas don't give you enough control for your
application, then you can simply pack another layout widget into the boxes
provided. For example, you could pack a table into the vertical box.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Pixmaps <label id="sec_Pixmaps">
<p>
Pixmaps are data structures that contain pictures. These pictures can be
used in various places, but most visibly as icons on the X-Windows desktop,
or as cursors. A bitmap is a 2-color pixmap.
To use pixmaps in GTK, we must first build a GdkPixmap structure using
routines from the GDK layer. Pixmaps can either be created from in-memory
data, or from data read from a file. We'll go through each of the calls
to create a pixmap.
<tscreen><verb>
GdkPixmap *gdk_bitmap_create_from_data( GdkWindow *window,
gchar *data,
gint width,
gint height );
</verb></tscreen>
This routine is used to create a single-plane pixmap (2 colors) from data in
memory. Each bit of the data represents whether that pixel is off or on.
Width and height are in pixels. The GdkWindow pointer is to the current
window, since a pixmap resources are meaningful only in the context of the
screen where it is to be displayed.
<tscreen><verb>
GdkPixmap *gdk_pixmap_create_from_data( GdkWindow *window,
gchar *data,
gint width,
gint height,
gint depth,
GdkColor *fg,
GdkColor *bg );
</verb></tscreen>
This is used to create a pixmap of the given depth (number of colors) from
the bitmap data specified. <tt/fg/ and <tt/bg/ are the foreground and
background color to use.
<tscreen><verb>
GdkPixmap *gdk_pixmap_create_from_xpm( GdkWindow *window,
GdkBitmap **mask,
GdkColor *transparent_color,
const gchar *filename );
</verb></tscreen>
XPM format is a readable pixmap representation for the X Window System. It
is widely used and many different utilities are available for creating image
files in this format. The file specified by filename must contain an image
in that format and it is loaded into the pixmap structure. The mask specifies
which bits of the pixmap are opaque. All other bits are colored using the
color specified by transparent_color. An example using this follows below.
<tscreen><verb>
GdkPixmap *gdk_pixmap_create_from_xpm_d( GdkWindow *window,
GdkBitmap **mask,
GdkColor *transparent_color,
gchar **data );
</verb></tscreen>
Small images can be incorporated into a program as data in the XPM format.
A pixmap is created using this data, instead of reading it from a file.
An example of such data is
<tscreen><verb>
/* XPM */
static const char * xpm_data[] = {
"16 16 3 1",
" c None",
". c #000000000000",
"X c #FFFFFFFFFFFF",
" ",
" ...... ",
" .XXX.X. ",
" .XXX.XX. ",
" .XXX.XXX. ",
" .XXX..... ",
" .XXXXXXX. ",
" .XXXXXXX. ",
" .XXXXXXX. ",
" .XXXXXXX. ",
" .XXXXXXX. ",
" .XXXXXXX. ",
" .XXXXXXX. ",
" ......... ",
" ",
" "};
</verb></tscreen>
When we're done using a pixmap and not likely to reuse it again soon,
it is a good idea to release the resource using gdk_pixmap_unref(). Pixmaps
should be considered a precious resource.
Once we've created a pixmap, we can display it as a GTK widget. We must
create a pixmap widget to contain the GDK pixmap. This is done using
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_pixmap_new( GdkPixmap *pixmap,
GdkBitmap *mask );
</verb></tscreen>
The other pixmap widget calls are
<tscreen><verb>
guint gtk_pixmap_get_type( void );
void gtk_pixmap_set( GtkPixmap *pixmap,
GdkPixmap *val,
GdkBitmap *mask );
void gtk_pixmap_get( GtkPixmap *pixmap,
GdkPixmap **val,
GdkBitmap **mask);
</verb></tscreen>
gtk_pixmap_set is used to change the pixmap that the widget is currently
managing. Val is the pixmap created using GDK.
The following is an example of using a pixmap in a button.
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start pixmap pixmap.c */
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
/* XPM data of Open-File icon */
static const char * xpm_data[] = {
"16 16 3 1",
" c None",
". c #000000000000",
"X c #FFFFFFFFFFFF",
" ",
" ...... ",
" .XXX.X. ",
" .XXX.XX. ",
" .XXX.XXX. ",
" .XXX..... ",
" .XXXXXXX. ",
" .XXXXXXX. ",
" .XXXXXXX. ",
" .XXXXXXX. ",
" .XXXXXXX. ",
" .XXXXXXX. ",
" .XXXXXXX. ",
" ......... ",
" ",
" "};
/* when invoked (via signal delete_event), terminates the application.
*/
void close_application( GtkWidget *widget, GdkEvent *event, gpointer data ) {
gtk_main_quit();
}
/* is invoked when the button is clicked. It just prints a message.
*/
void button_clicked( GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data ) {
printf( "button clicked\n" );
}
int main( int argc, char *argv[] )
{
/* GtkWidget is the storage type for widgets */
GtkWidget *window, *pixmapwid, *button;
GdkPixmap *pixmap;
GdkBitmap *mask;
GtkStyle *style;
/* create the main window, and attach delete_event signal to terminating
the application */
gtk_init( &amp;argc, &amp;argv );
window = gtk_window_new( GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL );
gtk_signal_connect( GTK_OBJECT (window), "delete_event",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (close_application), NULL );
gtk_container_border_width( GTK_CONTAINER (window), 10 );
gtk_widget_show( window );
/* now for the pixmap from gdk */
style = gtk_widget_get_style( window );
pixmap = gdk_pixmap_create_from_xpm_d( window->window, &amp;mask,
&amp;style->bg[GTK_STATE_NORMAL],
(gchar **)xpm_data );
/* a pixmap widget to contain the pixmap */
pixmapwid = gtk_pixmap_new( pixmap, mask );
gtk_widget_show( pixmapwid );
/* a button to contain the pixmap widget */
button = gtk_button_new();
gtk_container_add( GTK_CONTAINER(button), pixmapwid );
gtk_container_add( GTK_CONTAINER(window), button );
gtk_widget_show( button );
gtk_signal_connect( GTK_OBJECT(button), "clicked",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(button_clicked), NULL );
/* show the window */
gtk_main ();
return 0;
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
To load a file from an XPM data file called icon0.xpm in the current
directory, we would have created the pixmap thus
<tscreen><verb>
/* load a pixmap from a file */
pixmap = gdk_pixmap_create_from_xpm( window->window, &amp;mask,
&amp;style->bg[GTK_STATE_NORMAL],
"./icon0.xpm" );
pixmapwid = gtk_pixmap_new( pixmap, mask );
gtk_widget_show( pixmapwid );
gtk_container_add( GTK_CONTAINER(window), pixmapwid );
</verb></tscreen>
A disadvantage of using pixmaps is that the displayed object is always
rectangular, regardless of the image. We would like to create desktops
and applications with icons that have more natural shapes. For example,
for a game interface, we would like to have round buttons to push. The
way to do this is using shaped windows.
A shaped window is simply a pixmap where the background pixels are
transparent. This way, when the background image is multi-colored, we
don't overwrite it with a rectangular, non-matching border around our
icon. The following example displays a full wheelbarrow image on the
desktop.
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start wheelbarrow wheelbarrow.c */
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
/* XPM */
static char * WheelbarrowFull_xpm[] = {
"48 48 64 1",
" c None",
". c #DF7DCF3CC71B",
"X c #965875D669A6",
"o c #71C671C671C6",
"O c #A699A289A699",
"+ c #965892489658",
"@ c #8E38410330C2",
"# c #D75C7DF769A6",
"$ c #F7DECF3CC71B",
"% c #96588A288E38",
"&amp; c #A69992489E79",
"* c #8E3886178E38",
"= c #104008200820",
"- c #596510401040",
"; c #C71B30C230C2",
": c #C71B9A699658",
"> c #618561856185",
", c #20811C712081",
"< c #104000000000",
"1 c #861720812081",
"2 c #DF7D4D344103",
"3 c #79E769A671C6",
"4 c #861782078617",
"5 c #41033CF34103",
"6 c #000000000000",
"7 c #49241C711040",
"8 c #492445144924",
"9 c #082008200820",
"0 c #69A618611861",
"q c #B6DA71C65144",
"w c #410330C238E3",
"e c #CF3CBAEAB6DA",
"r c #71C6451430C2",
"t c #EFBEDB6CD75C",
"y c #28A208200820",
"u c #186110401040",
"i c #596528A21861",
"p c #71C661855965",
"a c #A69996589658",
"s c #30C228A230C2",
"d c #BEFBA289AEBA",
"f c #596545145144",
"g c #30C230C230C2",
"h c #8E3882078617",
"j c #208118612081",
"k c #38E30C300820",
"l c #30C2208128A2",
"z c #38E328A238E3",
"x c #514438E34924",
"c c #618555555965",
"v c #30C2208130C2",
"b c #38E328A230C2",
"n c #28A228A228A2",
"m c #41032CB228A2",
"M c #104010401040",
"N c #492438E34103",
"B c #28A2208128A2",
"V c #A699596538E3",
"C c #30C21C711040",
"Z c #30C218611040",
"A c #965865955965",
"S c #618534D32081",
"D c #38E31C711040",
"F c #082000000820",
" ",
" .XoO ",
" +@#$%o&amp; ",
" *=-;#::o+ ",
" >,<12#:34 ",
" 45671#:X3 ",
" +89<02qwo ",
"e* >,67;ro ",
"ty> 459@>+&amp;&amp; ",
"$2u+ ><ipas8* ",
"%$;=* *3:.Xa.dfg> ",
"Oh$;ya *3d.a8j,Xe.d3g8+ ",
" Oh$;ka *3d$a8lz,,xxc:.e3g54 ",
" Oh$;kO *pd$%svbzz,sxxxxfX..&amp;wn> ",
" Oh$@mO *3dthwlsslszjzxxxxxxx3:td8M4 ",
" Oh$@g&amp; *3d$XNlvvvlllm,mNwxxxxxxxfa.:,B* ",
" Oh$@,Od.czlllllzlmmqV@V#V@fxxxxxxxf:%j5&amp; ",
" Oh$1hd5lllslllCCZrV#r#:#2AxxxxxxxxxcdwM* ",
" OXq6c.%8vvvllZZiqqApA:mq:Xxcpcxxxxxfdc9* ",
" 2r<6gde3bllZZrVi7S@SV77A::qApxxxxxxfdcM ",
" :,q-6MN.dfmZZrrSS:#riirDSAX@Af5xxxxxfevo",
" +A26jguXtAZZZC7iDiCCrVVii7Cmmmxxxxxx%3g",
" *#16jszN..3DZZZZrCVSA2rZrV7Dmmwxxxx&amp;en",
" p2yFvzssXe:fCZZCiiD7iiZDiDSSZwwxx8e*>",
" OA1<jzxwwc:$d%NDZZZZCCCZCCZZCmxxfd.B ",
" 3206Bwxxszx%et.eaAp77m77mmmf3&amp;eeeg* ",
" @26MvzxNzvlbwfpdettttttttttt.c,n&amp; ",
" *;16=lsNwwNwgsvslbwwvccc3pcfu<o ",
" p;<69BvwwsszslllbBlllllllu<5+ ",
" OS0y6FBlvvvzvzss,u=Blllj=54 ",
" c1-699Blvlllllu7k96MMMg4 ",
" *10y8n6FjvllllB<166668 ",
" S-kg+>666<M<996-y6n<8* ",
" p71=4 m69996kD8Z-66698&amp;&amp; ",
" &amp;i0ycm6n4 ogk17,0<6666g ",
" N-k-<> >=01-kuu666> ",
" ,6ky&amp; &amp;46-10ul,66, ",
" Ou0<> o66y<ulw<66&amp; ",
" *kk5 >66By7=xu664 ",
" <<M4 466lj<Mxu66o ",
" *>> +66uv,zN666* ",
" 566,xxj669 ",
" 4666FF666> ",
" >966666M ",
" oM6668+ ",
" *4 ",
" ",
" "};
/* when invoked (via signal delete_event), terminates the application.
*/
void close_application( GtkWidget *widget, GdkEvent *event, gpointer data ) {
gtk_main_quit();
}
int main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
/* GtkWidget is the storage type for widgets */
GtkWidget *window, *pixmap, *fixed;
GdkPixmap *gdk_pixmap;
GdkBitmap *mask;
GtkStyle *style;
GdkGC *gc;
/* create the main window, and attach delete_event signal to terminate
the application. Note that the main window will not have a titlebar
since we're making it a popup. */
gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
window = gtk_window_new( GTK_WINDOW_POPUP );
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "delete_event",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (close_application), NULL);
gtk_widget_show (window);
/* now for the pixmap and the pixmap widget */
style = gtk_widget_get_default_style();
gc = style->black_gc;
gdk_pixmap = gdk_pixmap_create_from_xpm_d( window->window, &amp;mask,
&amp;style->bg[GTK_STATE_NORMAL],
WheelbarrowFull_xpm );
pixmap = gtk_pixmap_new( gdk_pixmap, mask );
gtk_widget_show( pixmap );
/* To display the pixmap, we use a fixed widget to place the pixmap */
fixed = gtk_fixed_new();
gtk_widget_set_usize( fixed, 200, 200 );
gtk_fixed_put( GTK_FIXED(fixed), pixmap, 0, 0 );
gtk_container_add( GTK_CONTAINER(window), fixed );
gtk_widget_show( fixed );
/* This masks out everything except for the image itself */
gtk_widget_shape_combine_mask( window, mask, 0, 0 );
/* show the window */
gtk_widget_set_uposition( window, 20, 400 );
gtk_widget_show( window );
gtk_main ();
return 0;
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
To make the wheelbarrow image sensitive, we could attach the button press
event signal to make it do something. The following few lines would make
the picture sensitive to a mouse button being pressed which makes the
application terminate.
<tscreen><verb>
gtk_widget_set_events( window,
gtk_widget_get_events( window ) |
GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK );
gtk_signal_connect( GTK_OBJECT(window), "button_press_event",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(close_application), NULL );
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Rulers
<p>
Ruler widgets are used to indicate the location of the mouse pointer
in a given window. A window can have a vertical ruler spanning across
the width and a horizontal ruler spanning down the height. A small
triangular indicator on the ruler shows the exact location of the
pointer relative to the ruler.
A ruler must first be created. Horizontal and vertical rulers are
created using
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_hruler_new( void ); /* horizontal ruler */
GtkWidget *gtk_vruler_new( void ); /* vertical ruler */
</verb></tscreen>
Once a ruler is created, we can define the unit of measurement. Units
of measure for rulers can be GTK_PIXELS, GTK_INCHES or
GTK_CENTIMETERS. This is set using
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_ruler_set_metric( GtkRuler *ruler,
GtkMetricType metric );
</verb></tscreen>
The default measure is GTK_PIXELS.
<tscreen><verb>
gtk_ruler_set_metric( GTK_RULER(ruler), GTK_PIXELS );
</verb></tscreen>
Other important characteristics of a ruler are how to mark the units
of scale and where the position indicator is initially placed. These
are set for a ruler using
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_ruler_set_range( GtkRuler *ruler,
gfloat lower,
gfloat upper,
gfloat position,
gfloat max_size );
</verb></tscreen>
The lower and upper arguments define the extent of the ruler, and
max_size is the largest possible number that will be displayed.
Position defines the initial position of the pointer indicator within
the ruler.
A vertical ruler can span an 800 pixel wide window thus
<tscreen><verb>
gtk_ruler_set_range( GTK_RULER(vruler), 0, 800, 0, 800);
</verb></tscreen>
The markings displayed on the ruler will be from 0 to 800, with
a number for every 100 pixels. If instead we wanted the ruler to
range from 7 to 16, we would code
<tscreen><verb>
gtk_ruler_set_range( GTK_RULER(vruler), 7, 16, 0, 20);
</verb></tscreen>
The indicator on the ruler is a small triangular mark that indicates
the position of the pointer relative to the ruler. If the ruler is
used to follow the mouse pointer, the motion_notify_event signal
should be connected to the motion_notify_event method of the ruler.
To follow all mouse movements within a window area, we would use
<tscreen><verb>
#define EVENT_METHOD(i, x) GTK_WIDGET_CLASS(GTK_OBJECT(i)->klass)->x
gtk_signal_connect_object( GTK_OBJECT(area), "motion_notify_event",
(GtkSignalFunc)EVENT_METHOD(ruler, motion_notify_event),
GTK_OBJECT(ruler) );
</verb></tscreen>
The following example creates a drawing area with a horizontal ruler
above it and a vertical ruler to the left of it. The size of the
drawing area is 600 pixels wide by 400 pixels high. The horizontal
ruler spans from 7 to 13 with a mark every 100 pixels, while the
vertical ruler spans from 0 to 400 with a mark every 100 pixels.
Placement of the drawing area and the rulers are done using a table.
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start rulers rulers.c */
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
#define EVENT_METHOD(i, x) GTK_WIDGET_CLASS(GTK_OBJECT(i)->klass)->x
#define XSIZE 600
#define YSIZE 400
/* this routine gets control when the close button is clicked
*/
void close_application( GtkWidget *widget, GdkEvent *event, gpointer data ) {
gtk_main_quit();
}
/* the main routine
*/
int main( int argc, char *argv[] ) {
GtkWidget *window, *table, *area, *hrule, *vrule;
/* initialize gtk and create the main window */
gtk_init( &amp;argc, &amp;argv );
window = gtk_window_new( GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL );
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "delete_event",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC( close_application ), NULL);
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 10);
/* create a table for placing the ruler and the drawing area */
table = gtk_table_new( 3, 2, FALSE );
gtk_container_add( GTK_CONTAINER(window), table );
area = gtk_drawing_area_new();
gtk_drawing_area_size( (GtkDrawingArea *)area, XSIZE, YSIZE );
gtk_table_attach( GTK_TABLE(table), area, 1, 2, 1, 2,
GTK_EXPAND|GTK_FILL, GTK_FILL, 0, 0 );
gtk_widget_set_events( area, GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK );
/* The horizontal ruler goes on top. As the mouse moves across the drawing area,
a motion_notify_event is passed to the appropriate event handler for the ruler. */
hrule = gtk_hruler_new();
gtk_ruler_set_metric( GTK_RULER(hrule), GTK_PIXELS );
gtk_ruler_set_range( GTK_RULER(hrule), 7, 13, 0, 20 );
gtk_signal_connect_object( GTK_OBJECT(area), "motion_notify_event",
(GtkSignalFunc)EVENT_METHOD(hrule, motion_notify_event),
GTK_OBJECT(hrule) );
/* GTK_WIDGET_CLASS(GTK_OBJECT(hrule)->klass)->motion_notify_event, */
gtk_table_attach( GTK_TABLE(table), hrule, 1, 2, 0, 1,
GTK_EXPAND|GTK_SHRINK|GTK_FILL, GTK_FILL, 0, 0 );
/* The vertical ruler goes on the left. As the mouse moves across the drawing area,
a motion_notify_event is passed to the appropriate event handler for the ruler. */
vrule = gtk_vruler_new();
gtk_ruler_set_metric( GTK_RULER(vrule), GTK_PIXELS );
gtk_ruler_set_range( GTK_RULER(vrule), 0, YSIZE, 10, YSIZE );
gtk_signal_connect_object( GTK_OBJECT(area), "motion_notify_event",
(GtkSignalFunc)
GTK_WIDGET_CLASS(GTK_OBJECT(vrule)->klass)->motion_notify_event,
GTK_OBJECT(vrule) );
gtk_table_attach( GTK_TABLE(table), vrule, 0, 1, 1, 2,
GTK_FILL, GTK_EXPAND|GTK_SHRINK|GTK_FILL, 0, 0 );
/* now show everything */
gtk_widget_show( area );
gtk_widget_show( hrule );
gtk_widget_show( vrule );
gtk_widget_show( table );
gtk_widget_show( window );
gtk_main();
return 0;
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Statusbars
<p>
Statusbars are simple widgets used to display a text message. They keep
a stack of the messages pushed onto them, so that popping the current
message will re-display the previous text message.
In order to allow different parts of an application to use the same
statusbar to display messages, the statusbar widget issues Context
Identifiers which are used to identify different 'users'. The message on
top of the stack is the one displayed, no matter what context it is in.
Messages are stacked in last-in-first-out order, not context identifier order.
A statusbar is created with a call to:
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_statusbar_new( void );
</verb></tscreen>
A new Context Identifier is requested using a call to the following
function with a short textual description of the context:
<tscreen><verb>
guint gtk_statusbar_get_context_id( GtkStatusbar *statusbar,
const gchar *context_description );
</verb></tscreen>
There are three functions that can operate on statusbars:
<tscreen><verb>
guint gtk_statusbar_push( GtkStatusbar *statusbar,
guint context_id,
gchar *text );
void gtk_statusbar_pop( GtkStatusbar *statusbar)
guint context_id );
void gtk_statusbar_remove( GtkStatusbar *statusbar,
guint context_id,
guint message_id );
</verb></tscreen>
The first, gtk_statusbar_push, is used to add a new message to the statusbar.
It returns a Message Identifier, which can be passed later to the function
gtk_statusbar_remove to remove the message with the given Message and Context
Identifiers from the statusbar's stack.
The function gtk_statusbar_pop removes the message highest in the stack with
the given Context Identifier.
The following example creates a statusbar and two buttons, one for pushing items
onto the statusbar, and one for popping the last item back off.
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start statusbar statusbar.c */
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
#include <glib.h>
GtkWidget *status_bar;
void push_item (GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data)
{
static int count = 1;
char buff[20];
g_snprintf(buff, 20, "Item %d", count++);
gtk_statusbar_push( GTK_STATUSBAR(status_bar), (guint) &amp;data, buff);
return;
}
void pop_item (GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data)
{
gtk_statusbar_pop( GTK_STATUSBAR(status_bar), (guint) &amp;data );
return;
}
int main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
GtkWidget *window;
GtkWidget *vbox;
GtkWidget *button;
int context_id;
gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
/* create a new window */
window = gtk_window_new(GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
gtk_widget_set_usize( GTK_WIDGET (window), 200, 100);
gtk_window_set_title(GTK_WINDOW (window), "GTK Statusbar Example");
gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT (window), "delete_event",
(GtkSignalFunc) gtk_exit, NULL);
vbox = gtk_vbox_new(FALSE, 1);
gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(window), vbox);
gtk_widget_show(vbox);
status_bar = gtk_statusbar_new();
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (vbox), status_bar, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (status_bar);
context_id = gtk_statusbar_get_context_id( GTK_STATUSBAR(status_bar), "Statusbar example");
button = gtk_button_new_with_label("push item");
gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(button), "clicked",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (push_item), &amp;context_id);
gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), button, TRUE, TRUE, 2);
gtk_widget_show(button);
button = gtk_button_new_with_label("pop last item");
gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(button), "clicked",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (pop_item), &amp;context_id);
gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), button, TRUE, TRUE, 2);
gtk_widget_show(button);
/* always display the window as the last step so it all splashes on
* the screen at once. */
gtk_widget_show(window);
gtk_main ();
return 0;
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Text Entries
<p>
The Entry widget allows text to be typed and displayed in a single line
text box. The text may be set with function calls that allow new text
to replace, prepend or append the current contents of the Entry widget.
There are two functions for creating Entry widgets:
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_entry_new( void );
GtkWidget *gtk_entry_new_with_max_length( guint16 max );
</verb></tscreen>
The first just creates a new Entry widget, whilst the second creates a
new Entry and sets a limit on the length of the text within the Entry.
There are several functions for altering the text which is currently
within the Entry widget.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_entry_set_text( GtkEntry *entry,
const gchar *text );
void gtk_entry_append_text( GtkEntry *entry,
const gchar *text );
void gtk_entry_prepend_text( GtkEntry *entry,
const gchar *text );
</verb></tscreen>
The function gtk_entry_set_text sets the contents of the Entry widget,
replacing the current contents. The functions gtk_entry_append_text and
gtk_entry_prepend_text allow the current contents to be appended and
prepended to.
The next function allows the current insertion point to be set.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_entry_set_position( GtkEntry *entry,
gint position );
</verb></tscreen>
The contents of the Entry can be retrieved by using a call to the
following function. This is useful in the callback functions described below.
<tscreen><verb>
gchar *gtk_entry_get_text( GtkEntry *entry );
</verb></tscreen>
If we don't want the contents of the Entry to be changed by someone typing
into it, we can change its editable state.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_entry_set_editable( GtkEntry *entry,
gboolean editable );
</verb></tscreen>
This function allows us to toggle the editable state of the Entry widget
by passing in a TRUE or FALSE value for the <tt/editable/ argument.
If we are using the Entry where we don't want the text entered to be visible,
for example when a password is being entered, we can use the following
function, which also takes a boolean flag.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_entry_set_visibility( GtkEntry *entry,
gboolean visible );
</verb></tscreen>
A region of the text may be set as selected by using the following
function. This would most often be used after setting some default text
in an Entry, making it easy for the user to remove it.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_entry_select_region( GtkEntry *entry,
gint start,
gint end );
</verb></tscreen>
If we want to catch when the user has entered text, we can connect to the
<tt/activate/ or <tt/changed/ signal. Activate is raised when the user hits
the enter key within the Entry widget. Changed is raised when the text
changes at all, e.g. for every character entered or removed.
The following code is an example of using an Entry widget.
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start entry entry.c */
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
void enter_callback(GtkWidget *widget, GtkWidget *entry)
{
gchar *entry_text;
entry_text = gtk_entry_get_text(GTK_ENTRY(entry));
printf("Entry contents: %s\n", entry_text);
}
void entry_toggle_editable (GtkWidget *checkbutton,
GtkWidget *entry)
{
gtk_entry_set_editable(GTK_ENTRY(entry),
GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON(checkbutton)->active);
}
void entry_toggle_visibility (GtkWidget *checkbutton,
GtkWidget *entry)
{
gtk_entry_set_visibility(GTK_ENTRY(entry),
GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON(checkbutton)->active);
}
int main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
GtkWidget *window;
GtkWidget *vbox, *hbox;
GtkWidget *entry;
GtkWidget *button;
GtkWidget *check;
gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
/* create a new window */
window = gtk_window_new(GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
gtk_widget_set_usize( GTK_WIDGET (window), 200, 100);
gtk_window_set_title(GTK_WINDOW (window), "GTK Entry");
gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT (window), "delete_event",
(GtkSignalFunc) gtk_exit, NULL);
vbox = gtk_vbox_new (FALSE, 0);
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), vbox);
gtk_widget_show (vbox);
entry = gtk_entry_new_with_max_length (50);
gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(entry), "activate",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(enter_callback),
entry);
gtk_entry_set_text (GTK_ENTRY (entry), "hello");
gtk_entry_append_text (GTK_ENTRY (entry), " world");
gtk_entry_select_region (GTK_ENTRY (entry),
0, GTK_ENTRY(entry)->text_length);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (vbox), entry, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (entry);
hbox = gtk_hbox_new (FALSE, 0);
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (vbox), hbox);
gtk_widget_show (hbox);
check = gtk_check_button_new_with_label("Editable");
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (hbox), check, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(check), "toggled",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(entry_toggle_editable), entry);
gtk_toggle_button_set_state(GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON(check), TRUE);
gtk_widget_show (check);
check = gtk_check_button_new_with_label("Visible");
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (hbox), check, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(check), "toggled",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(entry_toggle_visibility), entry);
gtk_toggle_button_set_state(GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON(check), TRUE);
gtk_widget_show (check);
button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("Close");
gtk_signal_connect_object (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(gtk_exit),
GTK_OBJECT (window));
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (vbox), button, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
GTK_WIDGET_SET_FLAGS (button, GTK_CAN_DEFAULT);
gtk_widget_grab_default (button);
gtk_widget_show (button);
gtk_widget_show(window);
gtk_main();
return(0);
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Color Selection
<p>
The color selection widget is, not surprisingly, a widget for interactive
selection of colors. This composite widget lets the user select a color by
manipulating RGB (Red, Green, Blue) and HSV (Hue, Saturation, Value) triples.
This is done either by adjusting single values with sliders or entries, or
by picking the desired color from a hue-saturation wheel/value bar.
Optionally, the opacity of the color can also be set.
The color selection widget currently emits only one signal,
"color_changed", which is emitted whenever the current color in the widget
changes, either when the user changes it or if it's set explicitly through
gtk_color_selection_set_color().
Lets have a look at what the color selection widget has to offer us. The
widget comes in two flavours; gtk_color_selection and
gtk_color_selection_dialog:
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_color_selection_new( void );
</verb></tscreen>
You'll probably not be using this constructor directly. It creates an orphan
GtkColorSelection widget which you'll have to parent yourself. The
GtkColorSelection widget inherits from the GtkVBox widget.
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_color_selection_dialog_new( const gchar *title );
</verb></tscreen>
This is the most common color selection constructor. It creates a
GtkColorSelectionDialog, which inherits from a GtkDialog. It consists
of a GtkFrame containing a GtkColorSelection widget, a GtkHSeparator and a
GtkHBox with three buttons, "Ok", "Cancel" and "Help". You can reach these
buttons by accessing the "ok_button", "cancel_button" and "help_button"
widgets in the GtkColorSelectionDialog structure,
(i.e. GTK_COLOR_SELECTION_DIALOG(colorseldialog)->ok_button).
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_color_selection_set_update_policy( GtkColorSelection *colorsel,
GtkUpdateType policy );
</verb></tscreen>
This function sets the update policy. The default policy is
GTK_UPDATE_CONTINUOUS which means that the current color is updated
continuously when the user drags the sliders or presses the mouse and drags
in the hue-saturation wheel or value bar. If you experience performance
problems, you may want to set the policy to GTK_UPDATE_DISCONTINUOUS or
GTK_UPDATE_DELAYED.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_color_selection_set_opacity( GtkColorSelection *colorsel,
gint use_opacity );
</verb></tscreen>
The color selection widget supports adjusting the opacity of a color
(also known as the alpha channel). This is disabled by default. Calling
this function with use_opacity set to TRUE enables opacity. Likewise,
use_opacity set to FALSE will disable opacity.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_color_selection_set_color( GtkColorSelection *colorsel,
gdouble *color );
</verb></tscreen>
You can set the current color explicitly by calling this function with
a pointer to an array of colors (gdouble). The length of the array depends
on whether opacity is enabled or not. Position 0 contains the red component,
1 is green, 2 is blue and opacity is at position 3 (only if opacity is enabled,
see gtk_color_selection_set_opacity()). All values are between 0.0 and 1.0.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_color_selection_get_color( GtkColorSelection *colorsel,
gdouble *color );
</verb></tscreen>
When you need to query the current color, typically when you've received a
"color_changed" signal, you use this function. Color is a pointer to the
array of colors to fill in. See the gtk_color_selection_set_color() function
for the description of this array.
<!-- Need to do a whole section on DnD - TRG
Drag and drop
-------------
The color sample areas (right under the hue-saturation wheel) supports drag and drop. The type of
drag and drop is "application/x-color". The message data consists of an array of 4
(or 5 if opacity is enabled) gdouble values, where the value at position 0 is 0.0 (opacity
on) or 1.0 (opacity off) followed by the red, green and blue values at positions 1,2 and 3 respectively.
If opacity is enabled, the opacity is passed in the value at position 4.
-->
Here's a simple example demonstrating the use of the GtkColorSelectionDialog.
The program displays a window containing a drawing area. Clicking on it opens
a color selection dialog, and changing the color in the color selection dialog
changes the background color.
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start colorsel colorsel.c */
#include <glib.h>
#include <gdk/gdk.h>
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
GtkWidget *colorseldlg = NULL;
GtkWidget *drawingarea = NULL;
/* Color changed handler */
void color_changed_cb (GtkWidget *widget, GtkColorSelection *colorsel)
{
gdouble color[3];
GdkColor gdk_color;
GdkColormap *colormap;
/* Get drawingarea colormap */
colormap = gdk_window_get_colormap (drawingarea->window);
/* Get current color */
gtk_color_selection_get_color (colorsel,color);
/* Fit to a unsigned 16 bit integer (0..65535) and insert into the GdkColor structure */
gdk_color.red = (guint16)(color[0]*65535.0);
gdk_color.green = (guint16)(color[1]*65535.0);
gdk_color.blue = (guint16)(color[2]*65535.0);
/* Allocate color */
gdk_color_alloc (colormap, &amp;gdk_color);
/* Set window background color */
gdk_window_set_background (drawingarea->window, &amp;gdk_color);
/* Clear window */
gdk_window_clear (drawingarea->window);
}
/* Drawingarea event handler */
gint area_event (GtkWidget *widget, GdkEvent *event, gpointer client_data)
{
gint handled = FALSE;
GtkWidget *colorsel;
/* Check if we've received a button pressed event */
if (event->type == GDK_BUTTON_PRESS &amp;&amp; colorseldlg == NULL)
{
/* Yes, we have an event and there's no colorseldlg yet! */
handled = TRUE;
/* Create color selection dialog */
colorseldlg = gtk_color_selection_dialog_new("Select background color");
/* Get the GtkColorSelection widget */
colorsel = GTK_COLOR_SELECTION_DIALOG(colorseldlg)->colorsel;
/* Connect to the "color_changed" signal, set the client-data to the colorsel widget */
gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(colorsel), "color_changed",
(GtkSignalFunc)color_changed_cb, (gpointer)colorsel);
/* Show the dialog */
gtk_widget_show(colorseldlg);
}
return handled;
}
/* Close down and exit handler */
void destroy_window (GtkWidget *widget, gpointer client_data)
{
gtk_main_quit ();
}
/* Main */
gint main (gint argc, gchar *argv[])
{
GtkWidget *window;
/* Initialize the toolkit, remove gtk-related commandline stuff */
gtk_init (&amp;argc,&amp;argv);
/* Create toplevel window, set title and policies */
window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
gtk_window_set_title (GTK_WINDOW(window), "Color selection test");
gtk_window_set_policy (GTK_WINDOW(window), TRUE, TRUE, TRUE);
/* Attach to the "delete" and "destroy" events so we can exit */
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(window), "delete_event",
(GtkSignalFunc)destroy_window, (gpointer)window);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(window), "destroy",
(GtkSignalFunc)destroy_window, (gpointer)window);
/* Create drawingarea, set size and catch button events */
drawingarea = gtk_drawing_area_new ();
gtk_drawing_area_size (GTK_DRAWING_AREA(drawingarea), 200, 200);
gtk_widget_set_events (drawingarea, GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(drawingarea), "event",
(GtkSignalFunc)area_event, (gpointer)drawingarea);
/* Add drawingarea to window, then show them both */
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER(window), drawingarea);
gtk_widget_show (drawingarea);
gtk_widget_show (window);
/* Enter the gtk main loop (this never returns) */
gtk_main ();
/* Satisfy grumpy compilers */
return 0;
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> File Selections
<p>
The file selection widget is a quick and simple way to display a File
dialog box. It comes complete with Ok, Cancel, and Help buttons, a great way
to cut down on programming time.
To create a new file selection box use:
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_file_selection_new( gchar *title );
</verb></tscreen>
To set the filename, for example to bring up a specific directory, or
give a default filename, use this function:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_file_selection_set_filename( GtkFileSelection *filesel,
gchar *filename );
</verb></tscreen>
To grab the text that the user has entered or clicked on, use this
function:
<tscreen><verb>
gchar *gtk_file_selection_get_filename( GtkFileSelection *filesel );
</verb></tscreen>
There are also pointers to the widgets contained within the file
selection widget. These are:
<itemize>
<item>dir_list
<item>file_list
<item>selection_entry
<item>selection_text
<item>main_vbox
<item>ok_button
<item>cancel_button
<item>help_button
</itemize>
Most likely you will want to use the ok_button, cancel_button, and
help_button pointers in signaling their use.
Included here is an example stolen from testgtk.c, modified to run
on its own. As you will see, there is nothing much to creating a file
selection widget. While in this example the Help button appears on the
screen, it does nothing as there is not a signal attached to it.
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start filesel filesel.c */
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
/* Get the selected filename and print it to the console */
void file_ok_sel (GtkWidget *w, GtkFileSelection *fs)
{
g_print ("%s\n", gtk_file_selection_get_filename (GTK_FILE_SELECTION (fs)));
}
void destroy (GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data)
{
gtk_main_quit ();
}
int main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
GtkWidget *filew;
gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
/* Create a new file selection widget */
filew = gtk_file_selection_new ("File selection");
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (filew), "destroy",
(GtkSignalFunc) destroy, &amp;filew);
/* Connect the ok_button to file_ok_sel function */
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (GTK_FILE_SELECTION (filew)->ok_button),
"clicked", (GtkSignalFunc) file_ok_sel, filew );
/* Connect the cancel_button to destroy the widget */
gtk_signal_connect_object (GTK_OBJECT (GTK_FILE_SELECTION (filew)->cancel_button),
"clicked", (GtkSignalFunc) gtk_widget_destroy,
GTK_OBJECT (filew));
/* Lets set the filename, as if this were a save dialog, and we are giving
a default filename */
gtk_file_selection_set_filename (GTK_FILE_SELECTION(filew),
"penguin.png");
gtk_widget_show(filew);
gtk_main ();
return 0;
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect> Container Widgets
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Notebooks
<p>
The NoteBook Widget is a collection of 'pages' that overlap each other,
each page contains different information. This widget has become more common
lately in GUI programming, and it is a good way to show blocks of similar
information that warrant separation in their display.
The first function call you will need to know, as you can probably
guess by now, is used to create a new notebook widget.
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_notebook_new( void );
</verb></tscreen>
Once the notebook has been created, there are 12 functions that
operate on the notebook widget. Let's look at them individually.
The first one we will look at is how to position the page indicators.
These page indicators or 'tabs' as they are referred to, can be positioned
in four ways: top, bottom, left, or right.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_notebook_set_tab_pos( GtkNotebook *notebook,
GtkPositionType pos );
</verb></tscreen>
GtkPostionType will be one of the following, and they are pretty self explanatory:
<itemize>
<item> GTK_POS_LEFT
<item> GTK_POS_RIGHT
<item> GTK_POS_TOP
<item> GTK_POS_BOTTOM
</itemize>
GTK_POS_TOP is the default.
Next we will look at how to add pages to the notebook. There are three
ways to add pages to the NoteBook. Let's look at the first two together as
they are quite similar.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_notebook_append_page( GtkNotebook *notebook,
GtkWidget *child,
GtkWidget *tab_label );
void gtk_notebook_prepend_page( GtkNotebook *notebook,
GtkWidget *child,
GtkWidget *tab_label );
</verb></tscreen>
These functions add pages to the notebook by inserting them from the
back of the notebook (append), or the front of the notebook (prepend).
<tt/child/ is the widget that is placed within the notebook page, and
<tt/tab_label/ is the label for the page being added.
The final function for adding a page to the notebook contains all of
the properties of the previous two, but it allows you to specify what position
you want the page to be in the notebook.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_notebook_insert_page( GtkNotebook *notebook,
GtkWidget *child,
GtkWidget *tab_label,
gint position );
</verb></tscreen>
The parameters are the same as _append_ and _prepend_ except it
contains an extra parameter, <tt/position/. This parameter is used to
specify what place this page will be inserted into.
Now that we know how to add a page, lets see how we can remove a page
from the notebook.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_notebook_remove_page( GtkNotebook *notebook,
gint page_num );
</verb></tscreen>
This function takes the page specified by page_num and removes it from
the widget pointed to by <tt/notebook/.
To find out what the current page is in a notebook use the function:
<tscreen><verb>
gint gtk_notebook_current_page( GtkNotebook *notebook );
</verb></tscreen>
These next two functions are simple calls to move the notebook page
forward or backward. Simply provide the respective function call with the
notebook widget you wish to operate on. Note: when the NoteBook is currently
on the last page, and gtk_notebook_next_page is called, the notebook will
wrap back to the first page. Likewise, if the NoteBook is on the first page,
and gtk_notebook_prev_page is called, the notebook will wrap to the last page.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_notebook_next_page( GtkNoteBook *notebook );
void gtk_notebook_prev_page( GtkNoteBook *notebook );
</verb></tscreen>
This next function sets the 'active' page. If you wish the
notebook to be opened to page 5 for example, you would use this function.
Without using this function, the notebook defaults to the first page.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_notebook_set_page( GtkNotebook *notebook,
gint page_num );
</verb></tscreen>
The next two functions add or remove the notebook page tabs and the
notebook border respectively.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_notebook_set_show_tabs( GtkNotebook *notebook,
gint show_tabs);
void gtk_notebook_set_show_border( GtkNotebook *notebook,
gint show_border );
</verb></tscreen>
show_tabs and show_border can be either TRUE or FALSE.
Now lets look at an example, it is expanded from the testgtk.c code
that comes with the GTK distribution, and it shows all 13 functions. This
small program creates a window with a notebook and six buttons. The notebook
contains 11 pages, added in three different ways, appended, inserted, and
prepended. The buttons allow you rotate the tab positions, add/remove the tabs
and border, remove a page, change pages in both a forward and backward manner,
and exit the program.
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start notebook notebook.c */
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
/* This function rotates the position of the tabs */
void rotate_book (GtkButton *button, GtkNotebook *notebook)
{
gtk_notebook_set_tab_pos (notebook, (notebook->tab_pos +1) %4);
}
/* Add/Remove the page tabs and the borders */
void tabsborder_book (GtkButton *button, GtkNotebook *notebook)
{
gint tval = FALSE;
gint bval = FALSE;
if (notebook->show_tabs == 0)
tval = TRUE;
if (notebook->show_border == 0)
bval = TRUE;
gtk_notebook_set_show_tabs (notebook, tval);
gtk_notebook_set_show_border (notebook, bval);
}
/* Remove a page from the notebook */
void remove_book (GtkButton *button, GtkNotebook *notebook)
{
gint page;
page = gtk_notebook_current_page(notebook);
gtk_notebook_remove_page (notebook, page);
/* Need to refresh the widget --
This forces the widget to redraw itself. */
gtk_widget_draw(GTK_WIDGET(notebook), NULL);
}
void delete (GtkWidget *widget, GtkWidget *event, gpointer data)
{
gtk_main_quit ();
}
int main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
GtkWidget *window;
GtkWidget *button;
GtkWidget *table;
GtkWidget *notebook;
GtkWidget *frame;
GtkWidget *label;
GtkWidget *checkbutton;
int i;
char bufferf[32];
char bufferl[32];
gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "delete_event",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (delete), NULL);
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 10);
table = gtk_table_new(2,6,TRUE);
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), table);
/* Create a new notebook, place the position of the tabs */
notebook = gtk_notebook_new ();
gtk_notebook_set_tab_pos (GTK_NOTEBOOK (notebook), GTK_POS_TOP);
gtk_table_attach_defaults(GTK_TABLE(table), notebook, 0,6,0,1);
gtk_widget_show(notebook);
/* lets append a bunch of pages to the notebook */
for (i=0; i < 5; i++) {
sprintf(bufferf, "Append Frame %d", i+1);
sprintf(bufferl, "Page %d", i+1);
frame = gtk_frame_new (bufferf);
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (frame), 10);
gtk_widget_set_usize (frame, 100, 75);
gtk_widget_show (frame);
label = gtk_label_new (bufferf);
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (frame), label);
gtk_widget_show (label);
label = gtk_label_new (bufferl);
gtk_notebook_append_page (GTK_NOTEBOOK (notebook), frame, label);
}
/* now lets add a page to a specific spot */
checkbutton = gtk_check_button_new_with_label ("Check me please!");
gtk_widget_set_usize(checkbutton, 100, 75);
gtk_widget_show (checkbutton);
label = gtk_label_new ("Add spot");
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (checkbutton), label);
gtk_widget_show (label);
label = gtk_label_new ("Add page");
gtk_notebook_insert_page (GTK_NOTEBOOK (notebook), checkbutton, label, 2);
/* Now finally lets prepend pages to the notebook */
for (i=0; i < 5; i++) {
sprintf(bufferf, "Prepend Frame %d", i+1);
sprintf(bufferl, "PPage %d", i+1);
frame = gtk_frame_new (bufferf);
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (frame), 10);
gtk_widget_set_usize (frame, 100, 75);
gtk_widget_show (frame);
label = gtk_label_new (bufferf);
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (frame), label);
gtk_widget_show (label);
label = gtk_label_new (bufferl);
gtk_notebook_prepend_page (GTK_NOTEBOOK(notebook), frame, label);
}
/* Set what page to start at (page 4) */
gtk_notebook_set_page (GTK_NOTEBOOK(notebook), 3);
/* create a bunch of buttons */
button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("close");
gtk_signal_connect_object (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (delete), NULL);
gtk_table_attach_defaults(GTK_TABLE(table), button, 0,1,1,2);
gtk_widget_show(button);
button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("next page");
gtk_signal_connect_object (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
(GtkSignalFunc) gtk_notebook_next_page,
GTK_OBJECT (notebook));
gtk_table_attach_defaults(GTK_TABLE(table), button, 1,2,1,2);
gtk_widget_show(button);
button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("prev page");
gtk_signal_connect_object (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
(GtkSignalFunc) gtk_notebook_prev_page,
GTK_OBJECT (notebook));
gtk_table_attach_defaults(GTK_TABLE(table), button, 2,3,1,2);
gtk_widget_show(button);
button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("tab position");
gtk_signal_connect_object (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
(GtkSignalFunc) rotate_book, GTK_OBJECT(notebook));
gtk_table_attach_defaults(GTK_TABLE(table), button, 3,4,1,2);
gtk_widget_show(button);
button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("tabs/border on/off");
gtk_signal_connect_object (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
(GtkSignalFunc) tabsborder_book,
GTK_OBJECT (notebook));
gtk_table_attach_defaults(GTK_TABLE(table), button, 4,5,1,2);
gtk_widget_show(button);
button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("remove page");
gtk_signal_connect_object (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
(GtkSignalFunc) remove_book,
GTK_OBJECT(notebook));
gtk_table_attach_defaults(GTK_TABLE(table), button, 5,6,1,2);
gtk_widget_show(button);
gtk_widget_show(table);
gtk_widget_show(window);
gtk_main ();
return 0;
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
Hopefully this helps you on your way with creating notebooks for your
GTK applications.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Scrolled Windows
<p>
Scrolled windows are used to create a scrollable area inside a real window.
You may insert any type of widget into a scrolled window, and it will
be accessible regardless of the size by using the scrollbars.
The following function is used to create a new scrolled window.
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_scrolled_window_new( GtkAdjustment *hadjustment,
GtkAdjustment *vadjustment );
</verb></tscreen>
Where the first argument is the adjustment for the horizontal
direction, and the second, the adjustment for the vertical direction.
These are almost always set to NULL.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_scrolled_window_set_policy( GtkScrolledWindow *scrolled_window,
GtkPolicyType hscrollbar_policy,
GtkPolicyType vscrollbar_policy );
</verb></tscreen>
This sets the policy to be used with respect to the scrollbars.
The first argument is the scrolled window you wish to change. The second
sets the policy for the horizontal scrollbar, and the third the policy for
the vertical scrollbar.
The policy may be one of GTK_POLICY AUTOMATIC, or GTK_POLICY_ALWAYS.
GTK_POLICY_AUTOMATIC will automatically decide whether you need
scrollbars, whereas GTK_POLICY_ALWAYS will always leave the scrollbars
there.
Here is a simple example that packs 100 toggle buttons into a scrolled window.
I've only commented on the parts that may be new to you.
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start scrolledwin scrolledwin.c */
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
void destroy(GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data)
{
gtk_main_quit();
}
int main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
static GtkWidget *window;
GtkWidget *scrolled_window;
GtkWidget *table;
GtkWidget *button;
char buffer[32];
int i, j;
gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
/* Create a new dialog window for the scrolled window to be
* packed into. A dialog is just like a normal window except it has a
* vbox and a horizontal separator packed into it. It's just a shortcut
* for creating dialogs */
window = gtk_dialog_new ();
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "destroy",
(GtkSignalFunc) destroy, NULL);
gtk_window_set_title (GTK_WINDOW (window), "dialog");
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 0);
gtk_widget_set_usize(window, 300, 300);
/* create a new scrolled window. */
scrolled_window = gtk_scrolled_window_new (NULL, NULL);
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (scrolled_window), 10);
/* the policy is one of GTK_POLICY AUTOMATIC, or GTK_POLICY_ALWAYS.
* GTK_POLICY_AUTOMATIC will automatically decide whether you need
* scrollbars, whereas GTK_POLICY_ALWAYS will always leave the scrollbars
* there. The first one is the horizontal scrollbar, the second,
* the vertical. */
gtk_scrolled_window_set_policy (GTK_SCROLLED_WINDOW (scrolled_window),
GTK_POLICY_AUTOMATIC, GTK_POLICY_ALWAYS);
/* The dialog window is created with a vbox packed into it. */
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (GTK_DIALOG(window)->vbox), scrolled_window,
TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (scrolled_window);
/* create a table of 10 by 10 squares. */
table = gtk_table_new (10, 10, FALSE);
/* set the spacing to 10 on x and 10 on y */
gtk_table_set_row_spacings (GTK_TABLE (table), 10);
gtk_table_set_col_spacings (GTK_TABLE (table), 10);
/* pack the table into the scrolled window */
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (scrolled_window), table);
gtk_widget_show (table);
/* this simply creates a grid of toggle buttons on the table
* to demonstrate the scrolled window. */
for (i = 0; i < 10; i++)
for (j = 0; j < 10; j++) {
sprintf (buffer, "button (%d,%d)\n", i, j);
button = gtk_toggle_button_new_with_label (buffer);
gtk_table_attach_defaults (GTK_TABLE (table), button,
i, i+1, j, j+1);
gtk_widget_show (button);
}
/* Add a "close" button to the bottom of the dialog */
button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("close");
gtk_signal_connect_object (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
(GtkSignalFunc) gtk_widget_destroy,
GTK_OBJECT (window));
/* this makes it so the button is the default. */
GTK_WIDGET_SET_FLAGS (button, GTK_CAN_DEFAULT);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (GTK_DIALOG (window)->action_area), button, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
/* This grabs this button to be the default button. Simply hitting
* the "Enter" key will cause this button to activate. */
gtk_widget_grab_default (button);
gtk_widget_show (button);
gtk_widget_show (window);
gtk_main();
return(0);
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
Try playing with resizing the window. You'll notice how the scrollbars
react. You may also wish to use the gtk_widget_set_usize() call to set
the default size of the window or other widgets.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Paned Window Widgets
<p>
The paned window widgets are useful when you want to divide an area
into two parts, with the relative size of the two parts controlled by
the user. A groove is drawn between the two portions with a handle
that the user can drag to change the ratio. The division can either
be horizontal (HPaned) or vertical (VPaned).
To create a new paned window, call one of:
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_hpaned_new (void);
GtkWidget *gtk_vpaned_new (void);
</verb></tscreen>
After creating the paned window widget, you need to add child widgets
to its two halves. To do this, use the functions:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_paned_add1 (GtkPaned *paned, GtkWidget *child);
void gtk_paned_add2 (GtkPaned *paned, GtkWidget *child);
</verb></tscreen>
<tt/gtk_paned_add1()/ adds the child widget to the left or top half of
the paned window. <tt/gtk_paned_add2()/ adds the child widget to the
right or bottom half of the paned window.
As an example, we will create part of the user interface of an
imaginary email program. A window is divided into two portions
vertically, with the top portion being a list of email messages and
the bottom portion the text of the email message. Most of the program
is pretty straightforward. A couple of points to note: text can't
be added to a Text widget until it is realized. This could be done by
calling <tt/gtk_widget_realize()/, but as a demonstration of an alternate
technique, we connect a handler to the "realize" signal to add the
text. Also, we need to add the <tt/GTK_SHRINK/ option to some of the
items in the table containing the text window and its scrollbars, so
that when the bottom portion is made smaller, the correct portions
shrink instead of being pushed off the bottom of the window.
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start paned paned.c */
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
/* Create the list of "messages" */
GtkWidget *
create_list (void)
{
GtkWidget *scrolled_window;
GtkWidget *list;
GtkWidget *list_item;
int i;
char buffer[16];
/* Create a new scrolled window, with scrollbars only if needed */
scrolled_window = gtk_scrolled_window_new (NULL, NULL);
gtk_scrolled_window_set_policy (GTK_SCROLLED_WINDOW (scrolled_window),
GTK_POLICY_AUTOMATIC,
GTK_POLICY_AUTOMATIC);
/* Create a new list and put it in the scrolled window */
list = gtk_list_new ();
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER(scrolled_window), list);
gtk_widget_show (list);
/* Add some messages to the window */
for (i=0; i<10; i++) {
sprintf(buffer,"Message #%d",i);
list_item = gtk_list_item_new_with_label (buffer);
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER(list), list_item);
gtk_widget_show (list_item);
}
return scrolled_window;
}
/* Add some text to our text widget - this is a callback that is invoked
when our window is realized. We could also force our window to be
realized with gtk_widget_realize, but it would have to be part of
a hierarchy first */
void
realize_text (GtkWidget *text, gpointer data)
{
gtk_text_freeze (GTK_TEXT (text));
gtk_text_insert (GTK_TEXT (text), NULL, &amp;text->style->black, NULL,
"From: pathfinder@nasa.gov\n"
"To: mom@nasa.gov\n"
"Subject: Made it!\n"
"\n"
"We just got in this morning. The weather has been\n"
"great - clear but cold, and there are lots of fun sights.\n"
"Sojourner says hi. See you soon.\n"
" -Path\n", -1);
gtk_text_thaw (GTK_TEXT (text));
}
/* Create a scrolled text area that displays a "message" */
GtkWidget *
create_text (void)
{
GtkWidget *table;
GtkWidget *text;
GtkWidget *hscrollbar;
GtkWidget *vscrollbar;
/* Create a table to hold the text widget and scrollbars */
table = gtk_table_new (2, 2, FALSE);
/* Put a text widget in the upper left hand corner. Note the use of
* GTK_SHRINK in the y direction */
text = gtk_text_new (NULL, NULL);
gtk_table_attach (GTK_TABLE (table), text, 0, 1, 0, 1,
GTK_FILL | GTK_EXPAND,
GTK_FILL | GTK_EXPAND | GTK_SHRINK, 0, 0);
gtk_widget_show (text);
/* Put a HScrollbar in the lower left hand corner */
hscrollbar = gtk_hscrollbar_new (GTK_TEXT (text)->hadj);
gtk_table_attach (GTK_TABLE (table), hscrollbar, 0, 1, 1, 2,
GTK_EXPAND | GTK_FILL, GTK_FILL, 0, 0);
gtk_widget_show (hscrollbar);
/* And a VScrollbar in the upper right */
vscrollbar = gtk_vscrollbar_new (GTK_TEXT (text)->vadj);
gtk_table_attach (GTK_TABLE (table), vscrollbar, 1, 2, 0, 1,
GTK_FILL, GTK_EXPAND | GTK_FILL | GTK_SHRINK, 0, 0);
gtk_widget_show (vscrollbar);
/* Add a handler to put a message in the text widget when it is realized */
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (text), "realize",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (realize_text), NULL);
return table;
}
int
main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
GtkWidget *window;
GtkWidget *vpaned;
GtkWidget *list;
GtkWidget *text;
gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
gtk_window_set_title (GTK_WINDOW (window), "Paned Windows");
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "destroy",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (gtk_main_quit), NULL);
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 10);
/* create a vpaned widget and add it to our toplevel window */
vpaned = gtk_vpaned_new ();
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER(window), vpaned);
gtk_widget_show (vpaned);
/* Now create the contents of the two halves of the window */
list = create_list ();
gtk_paned_add1 (GTK_PANED(vpaned), list);
gtk_widget_show (list);
text = create_text ();
gtk_paned_add2 (GTK_PANED(vpaned), text);
gtk_widget_show (text);
gtk_widget_show (window);
gtk_main ();
return 0;
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Toolbar
<p>
Toolbars are usually used to group some number of widgets in order to simplify
customization of their look and layout. Typically a toolbar consists of buttons
with icons, labels and tooltips, but any other widget can also
be put inside a toolbar. Finally, items can be arranged horizontally
or vertically and buttons can be displayed with icons, labels or both.
Creating a toolbar is (as one may already suspect) done with the following
function:
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_toolbar_new( GtkOrientation orientation,
GtkToolbarStyle style );
</verb></tscreen>
where orientation may be one of:
<tscreen><verb>
GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL
GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL
</verb></tscreen>
and style one of:
<tscreen><verb>
GTK_TOOLBAR_TEXT
GTK_TOOLBAR_ICONS
GTK_TOOLBAR_BOTH
</verb></tscreen>
The style applies to all the buttons created with the `item' functions
(not to buttons inserted into toolbar as separate widgets).
After creating a toolbar one can append,prepend and insert items (that
means simple buttons) into the toolbar. To describe an item we need a
label text, a tooltip text, a private tooltip text, an icon
for the button and a callback function for it. For example, to append
an item you may use the following function:
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_toolbar_append_item( GtkToolbar *toolbar,
const char *text,
const char *tooltip_text,
const char *tooltip_private_text,
GtkWidget *icon,
GtkSignalFunc callback,
gpointer user_data );
</verb></tscreen>
If you want to use gtk_toolbar_insert_item, the only additional parameter
which must be specified is the position in which the item should be inserted.
To simplify adding spaces between toolbar items, you may use the following
function:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_toolbar_append_space( GtkToolbar *toolbar );
void gtk_toolbar_prepend_space( GtkToolbar *toolbar );
void gtk_toolbar_insert_space( GtkToolbar *toolbar,
gint position );
</verb></tscreen>
While the size of the added space can be set globally for a
whole toolbar with the function:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_toolbar_set_space_size( GtkToolbar *toolbar,
gint space_size) ;
</verb></tscreen>
If it's needed the orientation of a toolbar and its style can be changed
`on the fly' using the following functions:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_toolbar_set_orientation( GtkToolbar *toolbar,
GtkOrientation orientation );
void gtk_toolbar_set_style( GtkToolbar *toolbar,
GtkToolbarStyle style );
void gtk_toolbar_set_tooltips( GtkToolbar *toolbar,
gint enable );
</verb></tscreen>
To show some other things that can be done with a toolbar, let's take the
following program (we'll interrupt the listing with some additional explanations):
<tscreen><verb>
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
#include "gtk.xpm"
/* This function is connected to the Close button or
* closing the window from the WM */
void delete_event (GtkWidget *widget, GdkEvent *event, gpointer data)
{
gtk_main_quit ();
}
</verb></tscreen>
The above beginning seems for sure familiar to you if it's not your first
GTK program. There is one additional thing though, we include a nice XPM
picture to serve as an icon for all of the buttons.
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget* close_button; // this button will emit signal to close application
GtkWidget* tooltips_button; // to enable/disable tooltips
GtkWidget* text_button,
* icon_button,
* both_button; // radio buttons for toolbar style
GtkWidget* entry; // a text entry to show packing any widget into toolbar
</verb></tscreen>
In fact not all of the above widgets are needed here, but to make things
clearer I put them all together.
<tscreen><verb>
/* that's easy... when one of the buttons is toggled, we just
* check which one is active and set the style of the toolbar
* accordingly
* ATTENTION: our toolbar is passed as data to callback ! */
void radio_event (GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data)
{
if (GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON (text_button)->active)
gtk_toolbar_set_style(GTK_TOOLBAR ( data ), GTK_TOOLBAR_TEXT);
else if (GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON (icon_button)->active)
gtk_toolbar_set_style(GTK_TOOLBAR ( data ), GTK_TOOLBAR_ICONS);
else if (GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON (both_button)->active)
gtk_toolbar_set_style(GTK_TOOLBAR ( data ), GTK_TOOLBAR_BOTH);
}
/* even easier, just check given toggle button and enable/disable
* tooltips */
void toggle_event (GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data)
{
gtk_toolbar_set_tooltips (GTK_TOOLBAR ( data ),
GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON (widget)->active );
}
</verb></tscreen>
The above are just two callback functions that will be called when
one of the buttons on a toolbar is pressed. You should already be
familiar with things like this if you've already used toggle buttons (and
radio buttons).
<tscreen><verb>
int main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
/* Here is our main window (a dialog) and a handle for the handlebox */
GtkWidget* dialog;
GtkWidget* handlebox;
/* Ok, we need a toolbar, an icon with a mask (one for all of
the buttons) and an icon widget to put this icon in (but
we'll create a separate widget for each button) */
GtkWidget * toolbar;
GdkPixmap * icon;
GdkBitmap * mask;
GtkWidget * iconw;
/* this is called in all GTK application. */
gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
/* create a new window with a given title, and nice size */
dialog = gtk_dialog_new ();
gtk_window_set_title ( GTK_WINDOW ( dialog ) , "GTKToolbar Tutorial");
gtk_widget_set_usize( GTK_WIDGET ( dialog ) , 600 , 300 );
GTK_WINDOW ( dialog ) ->allow_shrink = TRUE;
/* typically we quit if someone tries to close us */
gtk_signal_connect ( GTK_OBJECT ( dialog ), "delete_event",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC ( delete_event ), NULL);
/* we need to realize the window because we use pixmaps for
* items on the toolbar in the context of it */
gtk_widget_realize ( dialog );
/* to make it nice we'll put the toolbar into the handle box,
* so that it can be detached from the main window */
handlebox = gtk_handle_box_new ();
gtk_box_pack_start ( GTK_BOX ( GTK_DIALOG(dialog)->vbox ),
handlebox, FALSE, FALSE, 5 );
</verb></tscreen>
The above should be similar to any other GTK application. Just initialization
of GTK, creating the window etc.. There is only one thing that probably
needs some explanation: a handle box. A handle box is just another box
that can be used to pack widgets in to. The difference between it and typical
boxes is that it can be detached from a parent window (or, in fact, the handle
box remains in the parent, but it is reduced to a very small rectangle, while
all of its contents are reparented to a new freely floating window). It is
usually nice to have a detachable toolbar, so these two widgets occur together
quite often.
<tscreen><verb>
/* toolbar will be horizontal, with both icons and text, and
* with 5pxl spaces between items and finally,
* we'll also put it into our handlebox */
toolbar = gtk_toolbar_new ( GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL,
GTK_TOOLBAR_BOTH );
gtk_container_border_width ( GTK_CONTAINER ( toolbar ) , 5 );
gtk_toolbar_set_space_size ( GTK_TOOLBAR ( toolbar ), 5 );
gtk_container_add ( GTK_CONTAINER ( handlebox ) , toolbar );
/* now we create icon with mask: we'll reuse it to create
* icon widgets for toolbar items */
icon = gdk_pixmap_create_from_xpm_d ( dialog->window, &amp;mask,
&amp;dialog->style->white, gtk_xpm );
</verb></tscreen>
Well, what we do above is just a straight-forward initialization of the toolbar
widget and creation of a GDK pixmap with its mask. If you want to know
something more about using pixmaps, refer to GDK documentation
or to the <ref id="sec_Pixmaps" name="Pixmaps"> section earlier in this tutorial.
<tscreen><verb>
/* our first item is <close> button */
iconw = gtk_pixmap_new ( icon, mask ); // icon widget
close_button =
gtk_toolbar_append_item ( GTK_TOOLBAR (toolbar), // our toolbar
"Close", // button label
"Closes this app", // tooltip for this button
"Private", // tooltip private string
iconw, // icon widget
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (delete_event), // a signal
NULL );
gtk_toolbar_append_space ( GTK_TOOLBAR ( toolbar ) ); // space after item
</verb></tscreen>
In the above code you see the simplest case: adding a button to toolbar.
Just before appending a new item, we have to construct a pixmap widget
to serve as an icon for this item; this step will have to be repeated for
each new item. Just after the item we also add a space, so the following
items will not touch each other. As you see gtk_toolbar_append_item returns
a pointer to our newly created button widget, so that we can work with it in
the normal way.
<tscreen><verb>
/* now, let's make our radio buttons group... */
iconw = gtk_pixmap_new ( icon, mask );
icon_button =
gtk_toolbar_append_element(GTK_TOOLBAR(toolbar),
GTK_TOOLBAR_CHILD_RADIOBUTTON, // a type of element
NULL, // pointer to widget
"Icon", // label
"Only icons in toolbar", // tooltip
"Private", // tooltip private string
iconw, // icon
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (radio_event), // signal
toolbar); // data for signal
gtk_toolbar_append_space ( GTK_TOOLBAR ( toolbar ) );
</verb></tscreen>
Here we begin creating a radio buttons group. To do this we use gtk_toolbar_append_element.
In fact, using this function one can also add simple items or even spaces
(type = GTK_TOOLBAR_CHILD_SPACE or GTK_TOOLBAR_CHILD_BUTTON). In the above
case we start creating a radio group. In creating other radio buttons for
this group a pointer to the previous button in the group is required,
so that a list of buttons can be easily constructed (see the section on
<ref id="sec_Radio_Buttons" name="Radio Buttons"> earlier in this tutorial).
<tscreen><verb>
/* following radio buttons refer to previous ones */
iconw = gtk_pixmap_new ( icon, mask );
text_button =
gtk_toolbar_append_element(GTK_TOOLBAR(toolbar),
GTK_TOOLBAR_CHILD_RADIOBUTTON,
icon_button,
"Text",
"Only texts in toolbar",
"Private",
iconw,
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (radio_event),
toolbar);
gtk_toolbar_append_space ( GTK_TOOLBAR ( toolbar ) );
iconw = gtk_pixmap_new ( icon, mask );
both_button =
gtk_toolbar_append_element(GTK_TOOLBAR(toolbar),
GTK_TOOLBAR_CHILD_RADIOBUTTON,
text_button,
"Both",
"Icons and text in toolbar",
"Private",
iconw,
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (radio_event),
toolbar);
gtk_toolbar_append_space ( GTK_TOOLBAR ( toolbar ) );
gtk_toggle_button_set_state(GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON(both_button),TRUE);
</verb></tscreen>
In the end we have set the state of one of the buttons manually (otherwise
they all stay in active state, preventing us from switching between them).
<tscreen><verb>
/* here we have just a simple toggle button */
iconw = gtk_pixmap_new ( icon, mask );
tooltips_button =
gtk_toolbar_append_element(GTK_TOOLBAR(toolbar),
GTK_TOOLBAR_CHILD_TOGGLEBUTTON,
NULL,
"Tooltips",
"Toolbar with or without tips",
"Private",
iconw,
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (toggle_event),
toolbar);
gtk_toolbar_append_space ( GTK_TOOLBAR ( toolbar ) );
gtk_toggle_button_set_state(GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON(tooltips_button),TRUE);
</verb></tscreen>
A toggle button can be created in the obvious way (if one knows how to create
radio buttons already).
<tscreen><verb>
/* to pack a widget into toolbar, we only have to
* create it and append it with an appropriate tooltip */
entry = gtk_entry_new ();
gtk_toolbar_append_widget( GTK_TOOLBAR (toolbar),
entry,
"This is just an entry",
"Private" );
/* well, it isn't created within thetoolbar, so we must still show it */
gtk_widget_show ( entry );
</verb></tscreen>
As you see, adding any kind of widget to a toolbar is simple. The
one thing you have to remember is that this widget must be shown manually
(contrary to other items which will be shown together with the toolbar).
<tscreen><verb>
/* that's it ! let's show everything. */
gtk_widget_show ( toolbar );
gtk_widget_show (handlebox);
gtk_widget_show ( dialog );
/* rest in gtk_main and wait for the fun to begin! */
gtk_main ();
return 0;
}
</verb></tscreen>
So, here we are at the end of toolbar tutorial. Of course, to appreciate
it in full you need also this nice XPM icon, so here it is:
<tscreen><verb>
/* XPM */
static char * gtk_xpm[] = {
"32 39 5 1",
". c none",
"+ c black",
"@ c #3070E0",
"# c #F05050",
"$ c #35E035",
"................+...............",
"..............+++++.............",
"............+++++@@++...........",
"..........+++++@@@@@@++.........",
"........++++@@@@@@@@@@++........",
"......++++@@++++++++@@@++.......",
".....+++@@@+++++++++++@@@++.....",
"...+++@@@@+++@@@@@@++++@@@@+....",
"..+++@@@@+++@@@@@@@@+++@@@@@++..",
".++@@@@@@+++@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@++",
".+#+@@@@@@++@@@@+++@@@@@@@@@@@@+",
".+##++@@@@+++@@@+++++@@@@@@@@$@.",
".+###++@@@@+++@@@+++@@@@@++$$$@.",
".+####+++@@@+++++++@@@@@+@$$$$@.",
".+#####+++@@@@+++@@@@++@$$$$$$+.",
".+######++++@@@@@@@++@$$$$$$$$+.",
".+#######+##+@@@@+++$$$$$$@@$$+.",
".+###+++##+##+@@++@$$$$$$++$$$+.",
".+###++++##+##+@@$$$$$$$@+@$$@+.",
".+###++++++#+++@$$@+@$$@++$$$@+.",
".+####+++++++#++$$@+@$$++$$$$+..",
".++####++++++#++$$@+@$++@$$$$+..",
".+#####+++++##++$$++@+++$$$$$+..",
".++####+++##+#++$$+++++@$$$$$+..",
".++####+++####++$$++++++@$$$@+..",
".+#####++#####++$$+++@++++@$@+..",
".+#####++#####++$$++@$$@+++$@@..",
".++####++#####++$$++$$$$$+@$@++.",
".++####++#####++$$++$$$$$$$$+++.",
".+++####+#####++$$++$$$$$$$@+++.",
"..+++#########+@$$+@$$$$$$+++...",
"...+++########+@$$$$$$$$@+++....",
".....+++######+@$$$$$$$+++......",
"......+++#####+@$$$$$@++........",
".......+++####+@$$$$+++.........",
".........++###+$$$@++...........",
"..........++##+$@+++............",
"...........+++++++..............",
".............++++..............."};
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Aspect Frames
<p>
The aspect frame widget is like a frame widget, except that it also
enforces the aspect ratio (that is, the ratio of the width to the
height) of the child widget to have a certain value, adding extra
space if necessary. This is useful, for instance, if you want to
preview a larger image. The size of the preview should vary when
the user resizes the window, but the aspect ratio needs to always match
the original image.
To create a new aspect frame use:
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_aspect_frame_new( const gchar *label,
gfloat xalign,
gfloat yalign,
gfloat ratio,
gint obey_child);
</verb></tscreen>
<tt/xalign/ and <tt/yalign/ specify alignment as with Alignment
widgets. If <tt/obey_child/ is true, the aspect ratio of a child
widget will match the aspect ratio of the ideal size it requests.
Otherwise, it is given by <tt/ratio/.
To change the options of an existing aspect frame, you can use:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_aspect_frame_set( GtkAspectFrame *aspect_frame,
gfloat xalign,
gfloat yalign,
gfloat ratio,
gint obey_child);
</verb></tscreen>
As an example, the following program uses an AspectFrame to
present a drawing area whose aspect ratio will always be 2:1, no
matter how the user resizes the top-level window.
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start aspectframe aspectframe.c */
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
int
main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
GtkWidget *window;
GtkWidget *aspect_frame;
GtkWidget *drawing_area;
gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
gtk_window_set_title (GTK_WINDOW (window), "Aspect Frame");
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "destroy",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (gtk_main_quit), NULL);
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 10);
/* Create an aspect_frame and add it to our toplevel window */
aspect_frame = gtk_aspect_frame_new ("2x1", /* label */
0.5, /* center x */
0.5, /* center y */
2, /* xsize/ysize = 2 */
FALSE /* ignore child's aspect */);
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER(window), aspect_frame);
gtk_widget_show (aspect_frame);
/* Now add a child widget to the aspect frame */
drawing_area = gtk_drawing_area_new ();
/* Ask for a 200x200 window, but the AspectFrame will give us a 200x100
* window since we are forcing a 2x1 aspect ratio */
gtk_widget_set_usize (drawing_area, 200, 200);
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER(aspect_frame), drawing_area);
gtk_widget_show (drawing_area);
gtk_widget_show (window);
gtk_main ();
return 0;
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>CList Widget
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<p>
The GtkCList widget has replaced the GtkList widget (which is still
available).
The GtkCList widget is a multi-column list widget that is capable of
handling literally thousands of rows of information. Each column can
optionally have a title, which itself is optionally active, allowing
us to bind a function to its selection.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Creating a GtkCList widget
<p>
Creating a GtkCList is quite straightforward, once you have learned about
widgets in general. It provides the almost standard two ways, that is the
hard way, and the easy way. But before we create it, there is one thing we
should figure out beforehand: how many columns should it have?
Not all columns have to be visible and can be used to store data that is
related to a certain cell in the list.
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_clist_new ( gint columns );
GtkWidget *gtk_clist_new_with_titles( gint columns,
gchar *titles[] );
</verb></tscreen>
The first form is very straight forward, the second might require some
explanation. Each column can have a title associated with it, and this
title can be a label or a button that reacts when we click on it. If we
use the second form, we must provide pointers to the title texts, and the
number of pointers should equal the number of columns specified. Of course
we can always use the first form, and manually add titles later.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Modes of operation
<p>
There are several attributes that can be used to alter the behaviour of
a GtkCList. First there is
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_clist_set_selection_mode( GtkCList *clist,
GtkSelectionMode mode );
</verb></tscreen>
which, as the name implies, sets the selection mode of the GtkCList. The first
argument is the GtkCList widget, and the second specifies the cell selection
mode (they are defined in gtkenums.h). At the time of this writing, the following
modes are available to us:
<itemize>
<item> GTK_SELECTION_SINGLE - The selection is either NULL or contains a GList
pointer for a single selected item.
<item> GTK_SELECTION_BROWSE - The selection is NULL if the list contains no
widgets or insensitive ones only, otherwise it contains a GList pointer for
one GList structure, and therefore exactly one list item.
<item> GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE - The selection is NULL if no list items are
selected or a GList pointer for the first selected item. That in turn points
to a GList structure for the second selected item and so on. This is currently
the <bf>default</bf> for the GtkCList widget.
<item> GTK_SELECTION_EXTENDED - The selection is always NULL.
</itemize>
Others might be added in later revisions of GTK.
Then there is
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_clist_set_policy (GtkCList * clist,
GtkPolicyType vscrollbar_policy,
GtkPolicyType hscrollbar_policy);
</verb></tscreen>
which defines what happens to the scrollbars. The following values are possible
for both the vertical and the horizontal scrollbar:
<itemize>
<item> GTK_POLICY_ALWAYS - The scrollbar will always be there.
<item> GTK_POLICY_AUTOMATIC - The scrollbar will be there only when the number
of items in the GtkCList exceeds the number that can be shown in the widget.
</itemize>
We can also define what the border of the GtkCList widget should look like. It is
done through
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_clist_set_border( GtkCList *clist,
GtkShadowType border );
</verb></tscreen>
And the possible values for the second argument are
<itemize>
<item> GTK_SHADOW_NONE
<item> GTK_SHADOW_IN
<item> GTK_SHADOW_OUT
<item> GTK_SHADOW_ETCHED_IN
<item> GTK_SHADOW_ETCHED_OUT
</itemize>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Working with titles
<p>
When you create a GtkCList widget, you will also get a set of title buttons
automatically. They live in the top of the CList window, and can act either
as normal buttons that respond to being pressed, or they can be passive,
in which case they are nothing more than a title. There are four different
calls that aid us in setting the status of the title buttons.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_clist_column_title_active( GtkCList *clist,
gint column );
void gtk_clist_column_title_passive( GtkCList *clist,
gint column );
void gtk_clist_column_titles_active( GtkCList *clist );
void gtk_clist_column_titles_passive( GtkCList *clist );
</verb></tscreen>
An active title is one which acts as a normal button, a passive one is just
a label. The first two calls above will activate/deactivate the title button
above the specific column, while the last two calls activate/deactivate all
title buttons in the supplied clist widget.
But of course there are those cases when we don't want them at all, and so
they can be hidden and shown at will using the following two calls.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_clist_column_titles_show( GtkCList *clist );
void gtk_clist_column_titles_hide( GtkCList *clist );
</verb></tscreen>
For titles to be really useful we need a mechanism to set and change them,
and this is done using
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_clist_set_column_title( GtkCList *clist,
gint column,
gchar *title );
</verb></tscreen>
Note that only the title of one column can be set at a time, so if all the
titles are known from the beginning, then I really suggest using
gtk_clist_new_with_titles (as described above) to set them. Saves you
coding time, and makes your program smaller. There are some cases where
getting the job done the manual way is better, and that's when not all
titles will be text. GtkCList provides us with title buttons that can in fact
incorporate whole widgets, for example a pixmap. It's all done through
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_clist_set_column_widget( GtkCList *clist,
gint column,
GtkWidget *widget );
</verb></tscreen>
which should require no special explanation.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Manipulating the list itself
<p>
It is possible to change the justification for a column, and it is done through
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_clist_set_column_justification( GtkCList *clist,
gint column,
GtkJustification justification );
</verb></tscreen>
The GtkJustification type can take the following values:
<itemize>
<item>GTK_JUSTIFY_LEFT - The text in the column will begin from the left edge.
<item>GTK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT - The text in the column will begin from the right edge.
<item>GTK_JUSTIFY_CENTER - The text is placed in the center of the column.
<item>GTK_JUSTIFY_FILL - The text will use up all available space in the
column. It is normally done by inserting extra blank spaces between words
(or between individual letters if it's a single word). Much in the same way as
any ordinary WYSIWYG text editor.
</itemize>
The next function is a very important one, and should be standard in the setup
of all GtkCList widgets. When the list is created, the width of the various
columns are chosen to match their titles, and since this is seldom the right
width we have to set it using
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_clist_set_column_width( GtkCList *clist,
gint column,
gint width );
</verb></tscreen>
Note that the width is given in pixels and not letters. The same goes for the
height of the cells in the columns, but as the default value is the height of
the current font this isn't as critical to the application. Still, it is done through
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_clist_set_row_height( GtkCList *clist,
gint height );
</verb></tscreen>
Again, note that the height is given in pixels.
We can also move the list around without user interaction, however, it does
require that we know what we are looking for. Or in other words, we need the row
and column of the item we want to scroll to.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_clist_moveto( GtkCList *clist,
gint row,
gint column,
gfloat row_align,
gfloat col_align );
</verb></tscreen>
The gfloat row_align is pretty important to understand. It's a value between 0.0 and
1.0, where 0.0 means that we should scroll the list so the row appears at the top,
while if the value of row_align is 1.0, the row will appear at the bottom instead. All
other values between 0.0 and 1.0 are also valid and will place the row between the top
and the bottom. The last argument, gfloat col_align works in the same way, though 0.0
marks left and 1.0 marks right instead.
Depending on the application's needs, we don't have to scroll to an item that is
already visible to us. So how do we know if it is visible? As usual, there is a function
to find that out as well.
<tscreen><verb>
GtkVisibility gtk_clist_row_is_visible( GtkCList *clist,
gint row );
</verb></tscreen>
The return value is is one of the following:
<itemize>
<item>GTK_VISIBILITY_NONE
<item>GTK_VISIBILITY_PARTIAL
<item>GTK_VISIBILITY_FULL
</itemize>
Note that it will only tell us if a row is visible. Currently there is no way to
determine this for a column. We can get partial information though, because if
the return is GTK_VISIBILITY_PARTIAL, then some of it is hidden, but we don't know if
it is the row that is being cut by the lower edge of the listbox, or if the row has
columns that are outside.
We can also change both the foreground and background colors of a particular
row. This is useful for marking the row selected by the user, and the two functions
that is used to do it are
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_clist_set_foreground( GtkCList *clist,
gint row,
GdkColor *color );
void gtk_clist_set_background( GtkCList *clist,
gint row,
GdkColor *color );
</verb></tscreen>
Please note that the colors must have been previously allocated.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Adding rows to the list
<p>
We can add rows in two ways. They can be appended at the end to the list using
<tscreen><verb>
gint gtk_clist_append( GtkCList *clist,
gchar *text[] );
</verb></tscreen>
or we can insert a row at a given place using
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_clist_insert( GtkCList *clist,
gint row,
gchar *text[] );
</verb></tscreen>
In both calls we have to provide a collection of pointers that are the texts
we want to put in the columns. The number of pointers should equal the number
of columns in the list. If the text[] argument is NULL, then there will be no
text in the columns of the row. This is useful, for example, if we want to
add pixmaps instead (something that has to be done manually).
Also, please note that the numbering of both rows and columns start at 0.
To remove an individual row we use
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_clist_remove( GtkCList *clist,
gint row );
</verb></tscreen>
There is also a call that removes all rows in the list. This is a lot faster
than calling gtk_clist_remove once for each row, which is the only alternative.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_clist_clear( GtkCList *clist );
</verb></tscreen>
There are also two convenience functions that should be used when a lot of
changes have to be made to the list. This is to prevent the list flickering while
being repeatedly updated, which may be highly annoying to the user. So instead it
is a good idea to freeze the list, do the updates to it, and finally thaw it which
causes the list to be updated on the screen.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_clist_freeze( GtkCList * clist );
void gtk_clist_thaw( GtkCList * clist );
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Setting text and pixmaps in the cells
<p>
A cell can contain a pixmap, text or both. To set them the following
functions are used.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_clist_set_text( GtkCList *clist,
gint row,
gint column,
gchar *text );
void gtk_clist_set_pixmap( GtkCList *clist,
gint row,
gint column,
GdkPixmap *pixmap,
GdkBitmap *mask );
void gtk_clist_set_pixtext( GtkCList *clist,
gint row,
gint column,
gchar *text,
guint8 spacing,
GdkPixmap *pixmap,
GdkBitmap *mask );
</verb></tscreen>
It's quite straightforward. All the calls have the GtkCList as the first
argument, followed by the row and column of the cell, followed by the data to be
set. The gint8 spacing argument in gtk_clist_set_pixtext is the number of pixels
between the pixmap and the beginning of the text.
To read back the data, we instead use
<tscreen><verb>
gint gtk_clist_get_text( GtkCList *clist,
gint row,
gint column,
gchar **text );
gint gtk_clist_get_pixmap( GtkCList *clist,
gint row,
gint column,
GdkPixmap **pixmap,
GdkBitmap **mask );
gint gtk_clist_get_pixtext( GtkCList *clist,
gint row,
gint column,
gchar **text,
guint8 *spacing,
GdkPixmap **pixmap,
GdkBitmap **mask );
</verb></tscreen>
It isn't necessary to read it all back in case you aren't interested. Any
of the pointers that are meant for return values (all except the clist) can
be NULL. So if we want to read back only the text from a cell that is of
type pixtext, then we would do the following, assuming that clist, row and
column already exist:
<tscreen><verb>
gchar *mytext;
gtk_clist_get_pixtext(clist, row, column, &amp;mytext, NULL, NULL, NULL);
</verb></tscreen>
There is one more call that is related to what's inside a cell in the
clist, and that's
<tscreen><verb>
GtkCellType gtk_clist_get_cell_type( GtkCList *clist,
gint row,
gint column );
</verb></tscreen>
which returns the type of data in a cell. The return value is one of
<itemize>
<item>GTK_CELL_EMPTY
<item>GTK_CELL_TEXT
<item>GTK_CELL_PIXMAP
<item>GTK_CELL_PIXTEXT
<item>GTK_CELL_WIDGET
</itemize>
There is also a function that will let us set the indentation, both
vertical and horizontal, of a cell. The indentation value is of type gint,
given in pixels, and can be both positive and negative.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_clist_set_shift( GtkCList *clist,
gint row,
gint column,
gint vertical,
gint horizontal );
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Storing data pointers
<p>
With a GtkCList it is possible to set a data pointer for a row. This
pointer will not be visible for the user, but is merely a convenience for
the programmer to associate a row with a pointer to some additional data.
The functions should be fairly self-explanatory by now
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_clist_set_row_data( GtkCList *clist,
gint row,
gpointer data );
void gtk_clist_set_row_data_full( GtkCList *clist,
gint row,
gpointer data,
GtkDestroyNotify destroy );
gpointer gtk_clist_get_row_data( GtkCList *clist,
gint row );
gint gtk_clist_find_row_from_data( GtkCList *clist,
gpointer data );
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Working with selections
<p>
There are also functions available that let us force the (un)selection
of a row. These are
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_clist_select_row( GtkCList *clist,
gint row,
gint column );
void gtk_clist_unselect_row( GtkCList *clist,
gint row,
gint column );
</verb></tscreen>
And also a function that will take x and y coordinates (for example, read from
the mousepointer), and map that onto the list, returning the
corresponding row and column.
<tscreen><verb>
gint gtk_clist_get_selection_info( GtkCList *clist,
gint x,
gint y,
gint *row,
gint *column );
</verb></tscreen>
When we detect something of interest, it might be movement of the pointer, a
click somewhere in the list, we can read the pointer coordinates and find out
where in the list the pointer is. Cumbersome? Luckily, there is a more simple way...
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>The signals that bring it together
<p>
As with all other widgets, there are a few signals that can be used. The
GtkCList widget is derived from the GtkContainer widget, and so has all the
same signals, but also the adds following:
<itemize>
<item>select_row - This signal will send the following information, in
order: GtkCList *clist, gint row, gint column, GtkEventButton *event
<item>unselect_row - When the user unselects a row, this signal is activated. It
sends the same information as select_row
<item>click_column - Send GtkCList *clist, gint column
</itemize>
So if we want to connect a callback to select_row, the callback function would
be declared like this
<tscreen><verb>
void select_row_callback(GtkWidget *widget,
gint row,
gint column,
GdkEventButton *event,
gpointer data);
</verb></tscreen>
The callback is connected as usual with
<tscreen><verb>
gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT( clist),
"select_row"
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(select_row_callback),
NULL);
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>A GtkCList example
<p>
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start clist clist.c */
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
#include <glib.h>
/* These are just the prototypes of the various callbacks */
void button_add_clicked( GtkWidget *button, gpointer data);
void button_clear_clicked( GtkWidget *button, gpointer data);
void button_hide_show_clicked( GtkWidget *button, gpointer data);
void selection_made( GtkWidget *clist, gint row, gint column,
GdkEventButton *event, gpointer data);
gint main (int argc, gchar *argv[])
{
GtkWidget *window;
GtkWidget *vbox, *hbox;
GtkWidget *clist;
GtkWidget *button_add, *button_clear, *button_hide_show;
gchar *titles[2] = {"Ingredients","Amount"};
gtk_init(&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
window=gtk_window_new(GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
gtk_widget_set_usize(GTK_WIDGET(window), 300, 150);
gtk_window_set_title(GTK_WINDOW(window), "GtkCList Example");
gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(window),
"destroy",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(gtk_main_quit),
NULL);
vbox=gtk_vbox_new(FALSE, 5);
gtk_container_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(vbox), 5);
gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(window), vbox);
gtk_widget_show(vbox);
/* Create the GtkCList. For this example we use 2 columns */
clist = gtk_clist_new_with_titles( 2, titles);
/* When a selection is made, we want to know about it. The callback
* used is selection_made, and its code can be found further down */
gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(clist), "select_row",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(selection_made),
NULL);
/* It isn't necessary to shadow the border, but it looks nice :) */
gtk_clist_set_border(GTK_CLIST(clist), GTK_SHADOW_OUT);
/* What however is important, is that we set the column widths as
* they will never be right otherwise. Note that the columns are
* numbered from 0 and up (to 1 in this case).
*/
gtk_clist_set_column_width (GTK_CLIST(clist), 0, 150);
/* Scollbars _only when needed_ */
gtk_clist_set_policy(GTK_CLIST(clist), GTK_POLICY_AUTOMATIC,
GTK_POLICY_AUTOMATIC);
/* Add the GtkCList widget to the vertical box and show it. */
gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), clist, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show(clist);
/* Create the buttons and add them to the window. See the button
* tutorial for more examples and comments on this.
*/
hbox = gtk_hbox_new(FALSE, 0);
gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), hbox, FALSE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show(hbox);
button_add = gtk_button_new_with_label("Add List");
button_clear = gtk_button_new_with_label("Clear List");
button_hide_show = gtk_button_new_with_label("Hide/Show titles");
gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(hbox), button_add, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(hbox), button_clear, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(hbox), button_hide_show, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
/* Connect our callbacks to the three buttons */
gtk_signal_connect_object(GTK_OBJECT(button_add), "clicked",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(button_add_clicked),
(gpointer) clist);
gtk_signal_connect_object(GTK_OBJECT(button_clear), "clicked",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(button_clear_clicked),
(gpointer) clist);
gtk_signal_connect_object(GTK_OBJECT(button_hide_show), "clicked",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(button_hide_show_clicked),
(gpointer) clist);
gtk_widget_show(button_add);
gtk_widget_show(button_clear);
gtk_widget_show(button_hide_show);
/* The interface is completely set up so we show the window and
* enter the gtk_main loop.
*/
gtk_widget_show(window);
gtk_main();
return 0;
}
/* User clicked the "Add List" button. */
void button_add_clicked( GtkWidget *button, gpointer data)
{
int indx;
/* Something silly to add to the list. 4 rows of 2 columns each */
gchar *drink[4][2] = {{"Milk", "3 Oz"},
{"Water", "6 l"},
{"Carrots", "2"},
{"Snakes", "55"}};
/* Here we do the actual adding of the text. It's done once for
* each row.
*/
for( indx=0; indx < 4; indx++)
gtk_clist_append( (GtkCList*) data, drink[indx]);
return;
}
/* User clicked the "Clear List" button. */
void button_clear_clicked( GtkWidget *button, gpointer data)
{
/* Clear the list using gtk_clist_clear. This is much faster than
* calling gtk_clist_remove once for each row.
*/
gtk_clist_clear((GtkCList*) data);
return;
}
/* The user clicked the "Hide/Show titles" button. */
void button_hide_show_clicked( GtkWidget *button, gpointer data)
{
/* Just a flag to remember the status. 0 = currently visible */
static short int flag = 0;
if (flag == 0)
{
/* Hide the titles and set the flag to 1 */
gtk_clist_column_titles_hide((GtkCList*) data);
flag++;
}
else
{
/* Show the titles and reset flag to 0 */
gtk_clist_column_titles_show((GtkCList*) data);
flag--;
}
return;
}
/* If we come here, then the user has selected a row in the list. */
void selection_made( GtkWidget *clist, gint row, gint column,
GdkEventButton *event, gpointer data)
{
gchar *text;
/* Get the text that is stored in the selected row and column
* which was clicked in. We will receive it as a pointer in the
* argument text.
*/
gtk_clist_get_text(GTK_CLIST(clist), row, column, &amp;text);
/* Just prints some information about the selected row */
g_print("You selected row %d. More specifically you clicked in column %d, and the text in this cell is %s\n\n", row, column, text);
return;
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect> List Widget
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<p>
NOTE: The GtkList widget has been superseded by the GtkCList widget.
The GtkList widget is designed to act as a vertical container for widgets
that should be of the type GtkListItem.
A GtkList widget has its own window to receive events and its own
background color which is usually white. As it is directly derived from a
GtkContainer it can be treated as such by using the GTK_CONTAINER(List)
macro, see the GtkContainer widget for more on this.
One should already be familiar with the usage of a GList and its
related functions g_list_*() to be able to use the GtkList widget to
it full extent.
There is one field inside the structure definition of the GtkList widget
that will be of greater interest to us, this is:
<tscreen><verb>
struct _GtkList
{
...
GList *selection;
guint selection_mode;
...
};
</verb></tscreen>
The selection field of a GtkList points to a linked list of all items
that are currently selected, or NULL if the selection is empty.
So to learn about the current selection we read the GTK_LIST()->selection
field, but do not modify it since the internal fields are maintained by
the gtk_list_*() functions.
The selection_mode of the GtkList determines the selection facilities
of a GtkList and therefore the contents of the GTK_LIST()->selection
field. The selection_mode may be one of the following:
<itemize>
<item> GTK_SELECTION_SINGLE - The selection is either NULL
or contains a GList pointer
for a single selected item.
<item> GTK_SELECTION_BROWSE - The selection is NULL if the list
contains no widgets or insensitive
ones only, otherwise it contains
a GList pointer for one GList
structure, and therefore exactly
one list item.
<item> GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE - The selection is NULL if no list
items are selected or a GList pointer
for the first selected item. That
in turn points to a GList structure
for the second selected item and so
on.
<item> GTK_SELECTION_EXTENDED - The selection is always NULL.
</itemize>
The default is GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Signals
<p>
<tscreen><verb>
void selection_changed( GtkList *list );
</verb></tscreen>
This signal will be invoked whenever the selection field
of a GtkList has changed. This happens when a child of
the GtkList got selected or deselected.
<tscreen><verb>
void select_child( GtkList *list,
GtkWidget *child);
</verb></tscreen>
This signal is invoked when a child of the GtkList is about
to get selected. This happens mainly on calls to
gtk_list_select_item(), gtk_list_select_child(), button presses
and sometimes indirectly triggered on some else occasions where
children get added to or removed from the GtkList.
<tscreen><verb>
void unselect_child( GtkList *list,
GtkWidget *child );
</verb></tscreen>
This signal is invoked when a child of the GtkList is about
to get deselected. This happens mainly on calls to
gtk_list_unselect_item(), gtk_list_unselect_child(), button presses
and sometimes indirectly triggered on some else occasions where
children get added to or removed from the GtkList.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Functions
<p>
<tscreen><verb>
guint gtk_list_get_type( void );
</verb></tscreen>
Returns the `GtkList' type identifier.
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_list_new( void );
</verb></tscreen>
Create a new GtkList object. The new widget is returned as a pointer to a
GtkWidget object. NULL is returned on failure.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_list_insert_items( GtkList *list,
GList *items,
gint position );
</verb></tscreen>
Insert list items into the list, starting at <tt/position/.
<tt/items/ is a doubly linked list where each nodes data
pointer is expected to point to a newly created GtkListItem.
The GList nodes of <tt/items/ are taken over by the list.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_list_append_items( GtkList *list,
GList *items);
</verb></tscreen>
Insert list items just like gtk_list_insert_items() at the end
of the list. The GList nodes of <tt/items/ are taken over by the list.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_list_prepend_items( GtkList *list,
GList *items);
</verb></tscreen>
Insert list items just like gtk_list_insert_items() at the very
beginning of the list. The GList nodes of <tt/items/ are taken over
by the list.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_list_remove_items( GtkList *list,
GList *items);
</verb></tscreen>
Remove list items from the list. <tt/items/ is a doubly linked
list where each nodes data pointer is expected to point to a
direct child of list. It is the callers responsibility to make a
call to g_list_free(items) afterwards. Also the caller has to
destroy the list items himself.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_list_clear_items( GtkList *list,
gint start,
gint end );
</verb></tscreen>
Remove and destroy list items from the list. A widget is affected if
its current position within the list is in the range specified by
<tt/start/ and <tt/end/.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_list_select_item( GtkList *list,
gint item );
</verb></tscreen>
Invoke the select_child signal for a list item
specified through its current position within the list.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_list_unselect_item( GtkList *list,
gint item);
</verb></tscreen>
Invoke the unselect_child signal for a list item
specified through its current position within the list.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_list_select_child( GtkList *list,
GtkWidget *child);
</verb></tscreen>
Invoke the select_child signal for the specified child.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_list_unselect_child( GtkList *list,
GtkWidget *child);
</verb></tscreen>
Invoke the unselect_child signal for the specified child.
<tscreen><verb>
gint gtk_list_child_position( GtkList *list,
GtkWidget *child);
</verb></tscreen>
Return the position of <tt/child/ within the list. "-1" is returned on failure.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_list_set_selection_mode( GtkList *list,
GtkSelectionMode mode );
</verb></tscreen>
Set the selection mode MODE which can be of GTK_SELECTION_SINGLE,
GTK_SELECTION_BROWSE, GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE or GTK_SELECTION_EXTENDED.
<tscreen><verb>
GtkList *GTK_LIST( gpointer obj );
</verb></tscreen>
Cast a generic pointer to `GtkList *'. *Note Standard Macros::, for
more info.
<tscreen><verb>
GtkListClass *GTK_LIST_CLASS( gpointer class);
</verb></tscreen>
Cast a generic pointer to `GtkListClass*'. *Note Standard Macros::,
for more info.
<tscreen><verb>
gint GTK_IS_LIST( gpointer obj);
</verb></tscreen>
Determine if a generic pointer refers to a `GtkList' object. *Note
Standard Macros::, for more info.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Example
<p>
Following is an example program that will print out the changes
of the selection of a GtkList, and lets you "arrest" list items
into a prison by selecting them with the rightmost mouse button.
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start list list.c */
/* include the gtk+ header files
* include stdio.h, we need that for the printf() function
*/
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
#include <stdio.h>
/* this is our data identification string to store
* data in list items
*/
const gchar *list_item_data_key="list_item_data";
/* prototypes for signal handler that we are going to connect
* to the GtkList widget
*/
static void sigh_print_selection (GtkWidget *gtklist,
gpointer func_data);
static void sigh_button_event (GtkWidget *gtklist,
GdkEventButton *event,
GtkWidget *frame);
/* main function to set up the user interface */
gint main (int argc, gchar *argv[])
{
GtkWidget *separator;
GtkWidget *window;
GtkWidget *vbox;
GtkWidget *scrolled_window;
GtkWidget *frame;
GtkWidget *gtklist;
GtkWidget *button;
GtkWidget *list_item;
GList *dlist;
guint i;
gchar buffer[64];
/* initialize gtk+ (and subsequently gdk) */
gtk_init(&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
/* create a window to put all the widgets in
* connect gtk_main_quit() to the "destroy" event of
* the window to handle window manager close-window-events
*/
window=gtk_window_new(GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
gtk_window_set_title(GTK_WINDOW(window), "GtkList Example");
gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(window),
"destroy",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(gtk_main_quit),
NULL);
/* inside the window we need a box to arrange the widgets
* vertically */
vbox=gtk_vbox_new(FALSE, 5);
gtk_container_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(vbox), 5);
gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(window), vbox);
gtk_widget_show(vbox);
/* this is the scrolled window to put the GtkList widget inside */
scrolled_window=gtk_scrolled_window_new(NULL, NULL);
gtk_widget_set_usize(scrolled_window, 250, 150);
gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(vbox), scrolled_window);
gtk_widget_show(scrolled_window);
/* create the GtkList widget
* connect the sigh_print_selection() signal handler
* function to the "selection_changed" signal of the GtkList
* to print out the selected items each time the selection
* has changed */
gtklist=gtk_list_new();
gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(scrolled_window), gtklist);
gtk_widget_show(gtklist);
gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gtklist),
"selection_changed",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(sigh_print_selection),
NULL);
/* we create a "Prison" to put a list item in ;)
*/
frame=gtk_frame_new("Prison");
gtk_widget_set_usize(frame, 200, 50);
gtk_container_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(frame), 5);
gtk_frame_set_shadow_type(GTK_FRAME(frame), GTK_SHADOW_OUT);
gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(vbox), frame);
gtk_widget_show(frame);
/* connect the sigh_button_event() signal handler to the GtkList
* which will handle the "arresting" of list items
*/
gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gtklist),
"button_release_event",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(sigh_button_event),
frame);
/* create a separator
*/
separator=gtk_hseparator_new();
gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(vbox), separator);
gtk_widget_show(separator);
/* finally create a button and connect it<69>s "clicked" signal
* to the destruction of the window
*/
button=gtk_button_new_with_label("Close");
gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(vbox), button);
gtk_widget_show(button);
gtk_signal_connect_object(GTK_OBJECT(button),
"clicked",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(gtk_widget_destroy),
GTK_OBJECT(window));
/* now we create 5 list items, each having it<69>s own
* label and add them to the GtkList using gtk_container_add()
* also we query the text string from the label and
* associate it with the list_item_data_key for each list item
*/
for (i=0; i<5; i++) {
GtkWidget *label;
gchar *string;
sprintf(buffer, "ListItemContainer with Label #%d", i);
label=gtk_label_new(buffer);
list_item=gtk_list_item_new();
gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(list_item), label);
gtk_widget_show(label);
gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(gtklist), list_item);
gtk_widget_show(list_item);
gtk_label_get(GTK_LABEL(label), &amp;string);
gtk_object_set_data(GTK_OBJECT(list_item),
list_item_data_key,
string);
}
/* here, we are creating another 5 labels, this time
* we use gtk_list_item_new_with_label() for the creation
* we can<61>t query the text string from the label because
* we don<6F>t have the labels pointer and therefore
* we just associate the list_item_data_key of each
* list item with the same text string
* for adding of the list items we put them all into a doubly
* linked list (GList), and then add them by a single call to
* gtk_list_append_items()
* because we use g_list_prepend() to put the items into the
* doubly linked list, their order will be descending (instead
* of ascending when using g_list_append())
*/
dlist=NULL;
for (; i<10; i++) {
sprintf(buffer, "List Item with Label %d", i);
list_item=gtk_list_item_new_with_label(buffer);
dlist=g_list_prepend(dlist, list_item);
gtk_widget_show(list_item);
gtk_object_set_data(GTK_OBJECT(list_item),
list_item_data_key,
"ListItem with integrated Label");
}
gtk_list_append_items(GTK_LIST(gtklist), dlist);
/* finally we want to see the window, don't we? ;)
*/
gtk_widget_show(window);
/* fire up the main event loop of gtk
*/
gtk_main();
/* we get here after gtk_main_quit() has been called which
* happens if the main window gets destroyed
*/
return 0;
}
/* this is the signal handler that got connected to button
* press/release events of the GtkList
*/
void
sigh_button_event (GtkWidget *gtklist,
GdkEventButton *event,
GtkWidget *frame)
{
/* we only do something if the third (rightmost mouse button
* was released
*/
if (event->type==GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE &amp;&amp;
event->button==3) {
GList *dlist, *free_list;
GtkWidget *new_prisoner;
/* fetch the currently selected list item which
* will be our next prisoner ;)
*/
dlist=GTK_LIST(gtklist)->selection;
if (dlist)
new_prisoner=GTK_WIDGET(dlist->data);
else
new_prisoner=NULL;
/* look for already imprisoned list items, we
* will put them back into the list
* remember to free the doubly linked list that
* gtk_container_children() returns
*/
dlist=gtk_container_children(GTK_CONTAINER(frame));
free_list=dlist;
while (dlist) {
GtkWidget *list_item;
list_item=dlist->data;
gtk_widget_reparent(list_item, gtklist);
dlist=dlist->next;
}
g_list_free(free_list);
/* if we have a new prisoner, remove him from the
* GtkList and put him into the frame "Prison"
* we need to unselect the item before
*/
if (new_prisoner) {
GList static_dlist;
static_dlist.data=new_prisoner;
static_dlist.next=NULL;
static_dlist.prev=NULL;
gtk_list_unselect_child(GTK_LIST(gtklist),
new_prisoner);
gtk_widget_reparent(new_prisoner, frame);
}
}
}
/* this is the signal handler that gets called if GtkList
* emits the "selection_changed" signal
*/
void
sigh_print_selection (GtkWidget *gtklist,
gpointer func_data)
{
GList *dlist;
/* fetch the doubly linked list of selected items
* of the GtkList, remember to treat this as read-only!
*/
dlist=GTK_LIST(gtklist)->selection;
/* if there are no selected items there is nothing more
* to do than just telling the user so
*/
if (!dlist) {
g_print("Selection cleared\n");
return;
}
/* ok, we got a selection and so we print it
*/
g_print("The selection is a ");
/* get the list item from the doubly linked list
* and then query the data associated with list_item_data_key
* we then just print it
*/
while (dlist) {
GtkObject *list_item;
gchar *item_data_string;
list_item=GTK_OBJECT(dlist->data);
item_data_string=gtk_object_get_data(list_item,
list_item_data_key);
g_print("%s ", item_data_string);
dlist=dlist->next;
}
g_print("\n");
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> List Item Widget
<p>
The GtkListItem widget is designed to act as a container holding up
to one child, providing functions for selection/deselection just like
the GtkList widget requires them for its children.
A GtkListItem has its own window to receive events and has its own
background color which is usually white.
As it is directly derived from a
GtkItem it can be treated as such by using the GTK_ITEM(ListItem)
macro, see the GtkItem widget for more on this.
Usually a GtkListItem just holds a label to identify e.g. a filename
within a GtkList -- therefore the convenience function
gtk_list_item_new_with_label() is provided. The same effect can be
achieved by creating a GtkLabel on its own, setting its alignment
to xalign=0 and yalign=0.5 with a subsequent container addition
to the GtkListItem.
As one is not forced to add a GtkLabel to a GtkListItem, you could
also add a GtkVBox or a GtkArrow etc. to the GtkListItem.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Signals
<p>
A GtkListItem does not create new signals on its own, but inherits
the signals of a GtkItem. *Note GtkItem::, for more info.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Functions
<p>
<tscreen><verb>
guint gtk_list_item_get_type( void );
</verb></tscreen>
Returns the `GtkListItem' type identifier.
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_list_item_new( void );
</verb></tscreen>
Create a new GtkListItem object. The new widget is returned as a pointer
to a GtkWidget object. NULL is returned on failure.
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_list_item_new_with_label( gchar *label );
</verb></tscreen>
Create a new GtkListItem object, having a single GtkLabel as
the sole child. The new widget is returned as a pointer to a
GtkWidget object. NULL is returned on failure.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_list_item_select( GtkListItem *list_item );
</verb></tscreen>
This function is basically a wrapper around a call to
gtk_item_select (GTK_ITEM (list_item)) which will emit the
select signal.
*Note GtkItem::, for more info.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_list_item_deselect( GtkListItem *list_item );
</verb></tscreen>
This function is basically a wrapper around a call to
gtk_item_deselect (GTK_ITEM (list_item)) which will emit the
deselect signal.
*Note GtkItem::, for more info.
<tscreen><verb>
GtkListItem *GTK_LIST_ITEM( gpointer obj );
</verb></tscreen>
Cast a generic pointer to `GtkListItem*'. *Note Standard Macros::,
for more info.
<tscreen><verb>
GtkListItemClass *GTK_LIST_ITEM_CLASS( gpointer class );
</verb></tscreen>
Cast a generic pointer to GtkListItemClass*. *Note Standard
Macros::, for more info.
<tscreen><verb>
gint GTK_IS_LIST_ITEM( gpointer obj );
</verb></tscreen>
Determine if a generic pointer refers to a `GtkListItem' object.
*Note Standard Macros::, for more info.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Example
<p>
Please see the GtkList example on this, which covers the usage of a
GtkListItem as well.
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect> Tree Widget<label id="sec_Tree_Widgets">
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<p>
The purpose of tree widgets is to display hierarchically-organized
data. The GtkTree widget itself is a vertical container for widgets
of type GtkTreeItem. GtkTree itself is not terribly different from
GtkList - both are derived directly from GtkContainer, and the
GtkContainer methods work in the same way on GtkTree widgets as on
GtkList widgets. The difference is that GtkTree widgets can be nested
within other GtkTree widgets. We'll see how to do this shortly.
The GtkTree widget has its own window, and defaults to a white
background, as does GtkList. Also, most of the GtkTree methods work
in the same way as the corresponding GtkList ones. However, GtkTree
is not derived from GtkList, so you cannot use them interchangeably.
<sect1> Creating a Tree
<p>
A GtkTree is created in the usual way, using:
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget* gtk_tree_new( void );
</verb></tscreen>
Like the GtkList widget, a GtkTree will simply keep growing as more
items are added to it, as well as when subtrees are expanded.
For this reason, they are almost always packed into a
GtkScrolledWindow. You might want to use gtk_widget_set_usize() on
the scrolled window to ensure that it is big enough to see the tree's
items, as the default size for GtkScrolledWindow is quite small.
Now that you have a tree, you'll probably want to add some items to
it. <ref id="sec_Tree_Item_Widget" name="The Tree Item Widget"> below
explains the gory details of GtkTreeItem. For now, it'll suffice to
create one, using:
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget* gtk_tree_item_new_with_label( gchar *label );
</verb></tscreen>
You can then add it to the tree using one of the following (see
<ref id="sec_GtkTree_Functions" name="Functions and Macros">
below for more options):
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_tree_append( GtkTree *tree,
GtkWidget *tree_item );
void gtk_tree_prepend( GtkTree *tree,
GtkWidget *tree_item );
</verb></tscreen>
Note that you must add items to a GtkTree one at a time - there is no
equivalent to gtk_list_*_items().
<sect1> Adding a Subtree
<p>
A subtree is created like any other GtkTree widget. A subtree is added
to another tree beneath a tree item, using:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_tree_item_set_subtree( GtkTreeItem *tree_item,
GtkWidget *subtree );
</verb></tscreen>
You do not need to call gtk_widget_show() on a subtree before or after
adding it to a GtkTreeItem. However, you <em>must</em> have added the
GtkTreeItem in question to a parent tree before calling
gtk_tree_item_set_subtree(). This is because, technically, the parent
of the subtree is <em>not</em> the GtkTreeItem which "owns" it, but
rather the GtkTree which holds that GtkTreeItem.
When you add a subtree to a GtkTreeItem, a plus or minus sign appears
beside it, which the user can click on to "expand" or "collapse" it,
meaning, to show or hide its subtree. GtkTreeItems are collapsed by
default. Note that when you collapse a GtkTreeItem, any selected
items in its subtree remain selected, which may not be what the user
expects.
<sect1> Handling the Selection List
<p>
As with GtkList, the GtkTree type has a <tt>selection</tt> field, and
it is possible to control the behaviour of the tree (somewhat) by
setting the selection type using:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_tree_set_selection_mode( GtkTree *tree,
GtkSelectionMode mode );
</verb></tscreen>
The semantics associated with the various selection modes are
described in the section on the GtkList widget. As with the GtkList
widget, the "select_child", "unselect_child" (not really - see <ref
id="sec_GtkTree_Signals" name="Signals"> below for an explanation),
and "selection_changed" signals are emitted when list items are
selected or unselected. However, in order to take advantage of these
signals, you need to know <em>which</em> GtkTree widget they will be
emitted by, and where to find the list of selected items.
This is a source of potential confusion. The best way to explain this
is that though all GtkTree widgets are created equal, some are more
equal than others. All GtkTree widgets have their own X window, and
can therefore receive events such as mouse clicks (if their
GtkTreeItems or their children don't catch them first!). However, to
make GTK_SELECTION_SINGLE and GTK_SELECTION_BROWSE selection types
behave in a sane manner, the list of selected items is specific to the
topmost GtkTree widget in a hierarchy, known as the "root tree".
Thus, accessing the <tt>selection</tt>field directly in an arbitrary
GtkTree widget is not a good idea unless you <em>know</em> it's the
root tree. Instead, use the GTK_TREE_SELECTION (Tree) macro, which
gives the root tree's selection list as a GList pointer. Of course,
this list can include items that are not in the subtree in question if
the selection type is GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE.
Finally, the "select_child" (and "unselect_child", in theory) signals
are emitted by all trees, but the "selection_changed" signal is only
emitted by the root tree. Consequently, if you want to handle the
"select_child" signal for a tree and all its subtrees, you will have
to call gtk_signal_connect() for every subtree.
<sect1> Tree Widget Internals
<p>
The GtkTree's struct definition looks like this:
<tscreen><verb>
struct _GtkTree
{
GtkContainer container;
GList *children;
GtkTree* root_tree; /* owner of selection list */
GtkWidget* tree_owner;
GList *selection;
guint level;
guint indent_value;
guint current_indent;
guint selection_mode : 2;
guint view_mode : 1;
guint view_line : 1;
};
</verb></tscreen>
The perils associated with accessing the <tt>selection</tt> field
directly have already been mentioned. The other important fields of
the struct can also be accessed with handy macros or class functions.
GTK_TREE_IS_ROOT_TREE (Tree) returns a boolean value which indicates
whether a tree is the root tree in a GtkTree hierarchy, while
GTK_TREE_ROOT_TREE (Tree) returns the root tree, an object of type
GtkTree (so, remember to cast it using GTK_WIDGET (Tree) if you want
to use one of the gtk_widget_*() functions on it).
Instead of directly accessing the children field of a GtkTree widget,
it's probably best to cast it using GTK_CONTAINER (Tree), and pass it
to the gtk_container_children() function. This creates a duplicate of
the original list, so it's advisable to free it up using g_list_free()
after you're done with it, or to iterate on it destructively, like
this:
<tscreen><verb>
children = gtk_container_children (GTK_CONTAINER (tree));
while (children) {
do_something_nice (GTK_TREE_ITEM (children->data));
children = g_list_remove_link (children, children);
}
</verb></tscreen>
The <tt>tree_owner</tt> field is defined only in subtrees, where it
points to the GtkTreeItem widget which holds the tree in question.
The <tt>level</tt> field indicates how deeply nested a particular tree
is; root trees have level 0, and each successive level of subtrees has
a level one greater than the parent level. This field is set only
after a GtkTree widget is actually mapped (i.e. drawn on the screen).
<sect2> Signals<label id="sec_GtkTree_Signals">
<p>
<tscreen><verb>
void selection_changed( GtkTree *tree );
</verb></tscreen>
This signal will be emitted whenever the <tt>selection</tt> field of a
GtkTree has changed. This happens when a child of the GtkTree is
selected or deselected.
<tscreen><verb>
void select_child( GtkTree *tree,
GtkWidget *child );
</verb></tscreen>
This signal is emitted when a child of the GtkTree is about to get
selected. This happens on calls to gtk_tree_select_item(),
gtk_tree_select_child(), on <em>all</em> button presses and calls to
gtk_tree_item_toggle() and gtk_item_toggle(). It may sometimes be
indirectly triggered on other occasions where children get added to or
removed from the GtkTree.
<tscreen><verb>
void unselect_child (GtkTree *tree,
GtkWidget *child);
</verb></tscreen>
This signal is emitted when a child of the GtkTree is about to get
deselected. As of GTK+ 1.0.4, this seems to only occur on calls to
gtk_tree_unselect_item() or gtk_tree_unselect_child(), and perhaps on
other occasions, but <em>not</em> when a button press deselects a
child, nor on emission of the "toggle" signal by gtk_item_toggle().
<sect2> Functions and Macros<label id="sec_GtkTree_Functions">
<p>
<tscreen><verb>
guint gtk_tree_get_type( void );
</verb></tscreen>
Returns the `GtkTree' type identifier.
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget* gtk_tree_new( void );
</verb></tscreen>
Create a new GtkTree object. The new widget is returned as a pointer to a
GtkWidget object. NULL is returned on failure.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_tree_append( GtkTree *tree,
GtkWidget *tree_item );
</verb></tscreen>
Append a tree item to a GtkTree.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_tree_prepend( GtkTree *tree,
GtkWidget *tree_item );
</verb></tscreen>
Prepend a tree item to a GtkTree.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_tree_insert( GtkTree *tree,
GtkWidget *tree_item,
gint position );
</verb></tscreen>
Insert a tree item into a GtkTree at the position in the list
specified by <tt>position.</tt>
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_tree_remove_items( GtkTree *tree,
GList *items );
</verb></tscreen>
Remove a list of items (in the form of a GList *) from a GtkTree.
Note that removing an item from a tree dereferences (and thus usually)
destroys it <em>and</em> its subtree, if it has one, <em>and</em> all
subtrees in that subtree. If you want to remove only one item, you
can use gtk_container_remove().
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_tree_clear_items( GtkTree *tree,
gint start,
gint end );
</verb></tscreen>
Remove the items from position <tt>start</tt> to position <tt>end</tt>
from a GtkTree. The same warning about dereferencing applies here, as
gtk_tree_clear_items() simply constructs a list and passes it to
gtk_tree_remove_items().
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_tree_select_item( GtkTree *tree,
gint item );
</verb></tscreen>
Emits the "select_item" signal for the child at position
<tt>item</tt>, thus selecting the child (unless you unselect it in a
signal handler...)
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_tree_unselect_item( GtkTree *tree,
gint item );
</verb></tscreen>
Emits the "unselect_item" signal for the child at position
<tt>item</tt>, thus unselecting the child.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_tree_select_child( GtkTree *tree,
GtkWidget *tree_item );
</verb></tscreen>
Emits the "select_item" signal for the child <tt>tree_item</tt>, thus
selecting it.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_tree_unselect_child( GtkTree *tree,
GtkWidget *tree_item );
</verb></tscreen>
Emits the "unselect_item" signal for the child <tt>tree_item</tt>,
thus unselecting it.
<tscreen><verb>
gint gtk_tree_child_position( GtkTree *tree,
GtkWidget *child );
</verb></tscreen>
Returns the position in the tree of <tt>child</tt>, unless
<tt>child</tt> is not in the tree, in which case it returns -1.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_tree_set_selection_mode( GtkTree *tree,
GtkSelectionMode mode );
</verb></tscreen>
Sets the selection mode, which can be one of GTK_SELECTION_SINGLE (the
default), GTK_SELECTION_BROWSE, GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE, or
GTK_SELECTION_EXTENDED. This is only defined for root trees, which
makes sense, since the root tree "owns" the selection. Setting it for
subtrees has no effect at all; the value is simply ignored.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_tree_set_view_mode( GtkTree *tree,
GtkTreeViewMode mode );
</verb></tscreen>
Sets the "view mode", which can be either GTK_TREE_VIEW_LINE (the
default) or GTK_TREE_VIEW_ITEM. The view mode propagates from a tree
to its subtrees, and can't be set exclusively to a subtree (this is
not exactly true - see the example code comments).
The term "view mode" is rather ambiguous - basically, it controls the
way the highlight is drawn when one of a tree's children is selected.
If it's GTK_TREE_VIEW_LINE, the entire GtkTreeItem widget is
highlighted, while for GTK_TREE_VIEW_ITEM, only the child widget
(i.e. usually the label) is highlighted.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_tree_set_view_lines( GtkTree *tree,
guint flag );
</verb></tscreen>
Controls whether connecting lines between tree items are drawn.
<tt>flag</tt> is either TRUE, in which case they are, or FALSE, in
which case they aren't.
<tscreen><verb>
GtkTree *GTK_TREE (gpointer obj);
</verb></tscreen>
Cast a generic pointer to `GtkTree *'.
<tscreen><verb>
GtkTreeClass *GTK_TREE_CLASS (gpointer class);
</verb></tscreen>
Cast a generic pointer to `GtkTreeClass*'.
<tscreen><verb>
gint GTK_IS_TREE (gpointer obj);
</verb></tscreen>
Determine if a generic pointer refers to a `GtkTree' object.
<tscreen><verb>
gint GTK_IS_ROOT_TREE (gpointer obj)
</verb></tscreen>
Determine if a generic pointer refers to a `GtkTree' object
<em>and</em> is a root tree. Though this will accept any pointer, the
results of passing it a pointer that does not refer to a GtkTree are
undefined and possibly harmful.
<tscreen><verb>
GtkTree *GTK_TREE_ROOT_TREE (gpointer obj)
</verb></tscreen>
Return the root tree of a pointer to a `GtkTree' object. The above
warning applies.
<tscreen><verb>
GList *GTK_TREE_SELECTION( gpointer obj)
</verb></tscreen>
Return the selection list of the root tree of a `GtkTree' object. The
above warning applies here, too.
<sect1> Tree Item Widget<label id="sec_Tree_Item_Widget">
<p>
The GtkTreeItem widget, like GtkListItem, is derived from GtkItem,
which in turn is derived from GtkBin. Therefore, the item itself is a
generic container holding exactly one child widget, which can be of
any type. The GtkTreeItem widget has a number of extra fields, but
the only one we need be concerned with is the <tt>subtree</tt> field.
The definition for the GtkTreeItem struct looks like this:
<tscreen><verb>
struct _GtkTreeItem
{
GtkItem item;
GtkWidget *subtree;
GtkWidget *pixmaps_box;
GtkWidget *plus_pix_widget, *minus_pix_widget;
GList *pixmaps; /* pixmap node for this items color depth */
guint expanded : 1;
};
</verb></tscreen>
The <tt>pixmaps_box</tt> field is a GtkEventBox which catches clicks
on the plus/minus symbol which controls expansion and collapsing. The
<tt>pixmaps</tt> field points to an internal data structure. Since
you can always obtain the subtree of a GtkTreeItem in a (relatively)
type-safe manner with the GTK_TREE_ITEM_SUBTREE (Item) macro, it's
probably advisable never to touch the insides of a GtkTreeItem unless
you <em>really</em> know what you're doing.
Since it is directly derived from a GtkItem it can be treated as such
by using the GTK_ITEM (TreeItem) macro. A GtkTreeItem usually holds a
label, so the convenience function gtk_list_item_new_with_label() is
provided. The same effect can be achieved using code like the
following, which is actually copied verbatim from
gtk_tree_item_new_with_label():
<tscreen><verb>
tree_item = gtk_tree_item_new ();
label_widget = gtk_label_new (label);
gtk_misc_set_alignment (GTK_MISC (label_widget), 0.0, 0.5);
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (tree_item), label_widget);
gtk_widget_show (label_widget);
</verb></tscreen>
As one is not forced to add a GtkLabel to a GtkTreeItem, you could
also add a GtkHBox or a GtkArrow, or even a GtkNotebook (though your
app will likely be quite unpopular in this case) to the GtkTreeItem.
If you remove all the items from a subtree, it will be destroyed and
unparented, unless you reference it beforehand, and the GtkTreeItem
which owns it will be collapsed. So, if you want it to stick around,
do something like the following:
<tscreen><verb>
gtk_widget_ref (tree);
owner = GTK_TREE(tree)->tree_owner;
gtk_container_remove (GTK_CONTAINER(tree), item);
if (tree->parent == NULL){
gtk_tree_item_expand (GTK_TREE_ITEM(owner));
gtk_tree_item_set_subtree (GTK_TREE_ITEM(owner), tree);
}
else
gtk_widget_unref (tree);
</verb></tscreen>
Finally, drag-n-drop <em>does</em> work with GtkTreeItems. You just
have to make sure that the GtkTreeItem you want to make into a drag
item or a drop site has not only been added to a GtkTree, but that
each successive parent widget has a parent itself, all the way back to
a toplevel or dialog window, when you call gtk_widget_dnd_drag_set()
or gtk_widget_dnd_drop_set(). Otherwise, strange things will happen.
<sect2> Signals
<p>
GtkTreeItem inherits the "select", "deselect", and "toggle" signals
from GtkItem. In addition, it adds two signals of its own, "expand"
and "collapse".
<tscreen><verb>
void select( GtkItem *tree_item );
</verb></tscreen>
This signal is emitted when an item is about to be selected, either
after it has been clicked on by the user, or when the program calls
gtk_tree_item_select(), gtk_item_select(), or gtk_tree_select_child().
<tscreen><verb>
void deselect( GtkItem *tree_item );
</verb></tscreen>
This signal is emitted when an item is about to be unselected, either
after it has been clicked on by the user, or when the program calls
gtk_tree_item_deselect() or gtk_item_deselect(). In the case of
GtkTreeItems, it is also emitted by gtk_tree_unselect_child(), and
sometimes gtk_tree_select_child().
<tscreen><verb>
void toggle( GtkItem *tree_item );
</verb></tscreen>
This signal is emitted when the program calls gtk_item_toggle(). The
effect it has when emitted on a GtkTreeItem is to call
gtk_tree_select_child() (and never gtk_tree_unselect_child()) on the
item's parent tree, if the item has a parent tree. If it doesn't,
then the highlight is reversed on the item.
<tscreen><verb>
void expand( GtkTreeItem *tree_item );
</verb></tscreen>
This signal is emitted when the tree item's subtree is about to be
expanded, that is, when the user clicks on the plus sign next to the
item, or when the program calls gtk_tree_item_expand().
<tscreen><verb>
void collapse( GtkTreeItem *tree_item );
</verb></tscreen>
This signal is emitted when the tree item's subtree is about to be
collapsed, that is, when the user clicks on the minus sign next to the
item, or when the program calls gtk_tree_item_collapse().
<sect2> Functions and Macros
<p>
<tscreen><verb>
guint gtk_tree_item_get_type( void );
</verb></tscreen>
Returns the `GtkTreeItem' type identifier.
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget* gtk_tree_item_new( void );
</verb></tscreen>
Create a new GtkTreeItem object. The new widget is returned as a pointer
to a GtkWidget object. NULL is returned on failure.
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget* gtk_tree_item_new_with_label (gchar *label);
</verb></tscreen>
Create a new GtkTreeItem object, having a single GtkLabel as
the sole child. The new widget is returned as a pointer to a
GtkWidget object. NULL is returned on failure.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_tree_item_select( GtkTreeItem *tree_item );
</verb></tscreen>
This function is basically a wrapper around a call to
gtk_item_select (GTK_ITEM (tree_item)) which will emit the
select signal.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_tree_item_deselect( GtkTreeItem *tree_item );
</verb></tscreen>
This function is basically a wrapper around a call to
gtk_item_deselect (GTK_ITEM (tree_item)) which will emit the
deselect signal.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_tree_item_set_subtree( GtkTreeItem *tree_item,
GtkWidget *subtree );
</verb></tscreen>
This function adds subtree to tree_item, showing it if tree_item is
expanded, or hiding it if tree_item is collapsed. Again, remember
that the tree_item must have already been added to a tree for this to
work.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_tree_item_remove_subtree( GtkTreeItem *tree_item );
</verb></tscreen>
This removes all of tree_item's subtree's children (thus unreferencing
and destroying it, any of its children's subtrees, and so on...), then
removes the subtree itself, and hides the plus/minus sign.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_tree_item_expand( GtkTreeItem *tree_item );
</verb></tscreen>
This emits the "expand" signal on tree_item, which expands it.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_tree_item_collapse( GtkTreeItem *tree_item );
</verb></tscreen>
This emits the "collapse" signal on tree_item, which collapses it.
<tscreen><verb>
GtkTreeItem *GTK_TREE_ITEM (gpointer obj)
</verb></tscreen>
Cast a generic pointer to `GtkTreeItem*'.
<tscreen><verb>
GtkTreeItemClass *GTK_TREE_ITEM_CLASS (gpointer obj)
</verb></tscreen>
Cast a generic pointer to `GtkTreeItemClass'.
<tscreen><verb>
gint GTK_IS_TREE_ITEM (gpointer obj)
</verb></tscreen>
Determine if a generic pointer refers to a `GtkTreeItem' object.
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget GTK_TREE_ITEM_SUBTREE (gpointer obj)
</verb></tscreen>
Returns a tree item's subtree (obj should point to a `GtkTreeItem'
object).
<sect1> Tree Example
<p>
This is somewhat like the tree example in testgtk.c, but a lot less
complete (although much better commented). It puts up a window with a
tree, and connects all the signals for the relevant objects, so you
can see when they are emitted.
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start tree tree.c */
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
/* for all the GtkItem:: and GtkTreeItem:: signals */
static void cb_itemsignal (GtkWidget *item, gchar *signame)
{
gchar *name;
GtkLabel *label;
/* It's a GtkBin, so it has one child, which we know to be a
label, so get that */
label = GTK_LABEL (GTK_BIN (item)->child);
/* Get the text of the label */
gtk_label_get (label, &amp;name);
/* Get the level of the tree which the item is in */
g_print ("%s called for item %s->%p, level %d\n", signame, name,
item, GTK_TREE (item->parent)->level);
}
/* Note that this is never called */
static void cb_unselect_child (GtkWidget *root_tree, GtkWidget *child,
GtkWidget *subtree)
{
g_print ("unselect_child called for root tree %p, subtree %p, child %p\n",
root_tree, subtree, child);
}
/* Note that this is called every time the user clicks on an item,
whether it is already selected or not. */
static void cb_select_child (GtkWidget *root_tree, GtkWidget *child,
GtkWidget *subtree)
{
g_print ("select_child called for root tree %p, subtree %p, child %p\n",
root_tree, subtree, child);
}
static void cb_selection_changed (GtkWidget *tree)
{
GList *i;
g_print ("selection_change called for tree %p\n", tree);
g_print ("selected objects are:\n");
i = GTK_TREE_SELECTION(tree);
while (i){
gchar *name;
GtkLabel *label;
GtkWidget *item;
/* Get a GtkWidget pointer from the list node */
item = GTK_WIDGET (i->data);
label = GTK_LABEL (GTK_BIN (item)->child);
gtk_label_get (label, &amp;name);
g_print ("\t%s on level %d\n", name, GTK_TREE
(item->parent)->level);
i = i->next;
}
}
int main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
GtkWidget *window, *scrolled_win, *tree;
static gchar *itemnames[] = {"Foo", "Bar", "Baz", "Quux",
"Maurice"};
gint i;
gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
/* a generic toplevel window */
window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(window), "delete_event",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (gtk_main_quit), NULL);
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER(window), 5);
/* A generic scrolled window */
scrolled_win = gtk_scrolled_window_new (NULL, NULL);
gtk_scrolled_window_set_policy (GTK_SCROLLED_WINDOW (scrolled_win),
GTK_POLICY_AUTOMATIC,
GTK_POLICY_AUTOMATIC);
gtk_widget_set_usize (scrolled_win, 150, 200);
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER(window), scrolled_win);
gtk_widget_show (scrolled_win);
/* Create the root tree */
tree = gtk_tree_new();
g_print ("root tree is %p\n", tree);
/* connect all GtkTree:: signals */
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(tree), "select_child",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(cb_select_child), tree);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(tree), "unselect_child",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(cb_unselect_child), tree);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(tree), "selection_changed",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(cb_selection_changed), tree);
/* Add it to the scrolled window */
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER(scrolled_win), tree);
/* Set the selection mode */
gtk_tree_set_selection_mode (GTK_TREE(tree),
GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE);
/* Show it */
gtk_widget_show (tree);
for (i = 0; i < 5; i++){
GtkWidget *subtree, *item;
gint j;
/* Create a tree item */
item = gtk_tree_item_new_with_label (itemnames[i]);
/* Connect all GtkItem:: and GtkTreeItem:: signals */
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(item), "select",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(cb_itemsignal), "select");
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(item), "deselect",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(cb_itemsignal), "deselect");
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(item), "toggle",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(cb_itemsignal), "toggle");
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(item), "expand",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(cb_itemsignal), "expand");
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(item), "collapse",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(cb_itemsignal), "collapse");
/* Add it to the parent tree */
gtk_tree_append (GTK_TREE(tree), item);
/* Show it - this can be done at any time */
gtk_widget_show (item);
/* Create this item's subtree */
subtree = gtk_tree_new();
g_print ("-> item %s->%p, subtree %p\n", itemnames[i], item,
subtree);
/* This is still necessary if you want these signals to be called
for the subtree's children. Note that selection_change will be
signalled for the root tree regardless. */
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(subtree), "select_child",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(cb_select_child), subtree);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(subtree), "unselect_child",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(cb_unselect_child), subtree);
/* This has absolutely no effect, because it is completely ignored
in subtrees */
gtk_tree_set_selection_mode (GTK_TREE(subtree),
GTK_SELECTION_SINGLE);
/* Neither does this, but for a rather different reason - the
view_mode and view_line values of a tree are propagated to
subtrees when they are mapped. So, setting it later on would
actually have a (somewhat unpredictable) effect */
gtk_tree_set_view_mode (GTK_TREE(subtree), GTK_TREE_VIEW_ITEM);
/* Set this item's subtree - note that you cannot do this until
AFTER the item has been added to its parent tree! */
gtk_tree_item_set_subtree (GTK_TREE_ITEM(item), subtree);
for (j = 0; j < 5; j++){
GtkWidget *subitem;
/* Create a subtree item, in much the same way */
subitem = gtk_tree_item_new_with_label (itemnames[j]);
/* Connect all GtkItem:: and GtkTreeItem:: signals */
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(subitem), "select",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(cb_itemsignal), "select");
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(subitem), "deselect",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(cb_itemsignal), "deselect");
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(subitem), "toggle",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(cb_itemsignal), "toggle");
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(subitem), "expand",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(cb_itemsignal), "expand");
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(subitem), "collapse",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(cb_itemsignal), "collapse");
g_print ("-> -> item %s->%p\n", itemnames[j], subitem);
/* Add it to its parent tree */
gtk_tree_append (GTK_TREE(subtree), subitem);
/* Show it */
gtk_widget_show (subitem);
}
}
/* Show the window and loop endlessly */
gtk_widget_show (window);
gtk_main();
return 0;
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>Menu Widget
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<p>
There are two ways to create menus, there's the easy way, and there's the
hard way. Both have their uses, but you can usually use the menufactory
(the easy way). The "hard" way is to create all the menus using the calls
directly. The easy way is to use the gtk_menu_factory calls. This is
much simpler, but there are advantages and disadvantages to each approach.
The menufactory is much easier to use, and to add new menus to, although
writing a few wrapper functions to create menus using the manual method
could go a long way towards usability. With the menufactory, it is not
possible to add images or the character '/' to the menus.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Manual Menu Creation
<p>
In the true tradition of teaching, we'll show you the hard
way first. <tt>:)</>
There are three widgets that go into making a menubar and submenus:
<itemize>
<item>a menu item, which is what the user wants to select, e.g. 'Save'
<item>a menu, which acts as a container for the menu items, and
<item>a menubar, which is a container for each of the individual menus,
</itemize>
This is slightly complicated by the fact that menu item widgets are used
for two different things. They are both the widgets that are packed into
the menu, and the widget that is packed into the menubar, which,
when selected, activates the menu.
Let's look at the functions that are used to create menus and menubars.
This first function is used to create a new menubar.
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_menu_bar_new( void );
</verb></tscreen>
This rather self explanatory function creates a new menubar. You use
gtk_container_add to pack this into a window, or the box_pack functions to
pack it into a box - the same as buttons.
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_menu_new( void );
</verb></tscreen>
This function returns a pointer to a new menu, it is never actually shown
(with gtk_widget_show), it is just a container for the menu items. Hopefully this will
become more clear when you look at the example below.
The next two calls are used to create menu items that are packed into
the menu (and menubar).
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_menu_item_new( void );
</verb></tscreen>
and
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_menu_item_new_with_label( const char *label );
</verb></tscreen>
These calls are used to create the menu items that are to be displayed.
Remember to differentiate between a "menu" as created with gtk_menu_new
and a "menu item" as created by the gtk_menu_item_new functions. The
menu item will be an actual button with an associated action,
whereas a menu will be a container holding menu items.
The gtk_menu_new_with_label and gtk_menu_new functions are just as you'd expect after
reading about the buttons. One creates a new menu item with a label
already packed into it, and the other just creates a blank menu item.
Once you've created a menu item you have to put it into a menu. This is
done using the function gtk_menu_append. In order to capture when the item
is selected by the user, we need to connect to the <tt/activate/ signal in
the usual way. So, if we wanted to create a standard <tt/File/ menu, with
the options <tt/Open/, <tt/Save/ and <tt/Quit/ the code would look something like
<tscreen><verb>
file_menu = gtk_menu_new(); /* Don't need to show menus */
/* Create the menu items */
open_item = gtk_menu_item_new_with_label("Open");
save_item = gtk_menu_item_new_with_label("Save");
quit_item = gtk_menu_item_new_with_label("Quit");
/* Add them to the menu */
gtk_menu_append( GTK_MENU(file_menu), open_item);
gtk_menu_append( GTK_MENU(file_menu), save_item);
gtk_menu_append( GTK_MENU(file_menu), quit_item);
/* Attach the callback functions to the activate signal */
gtk_signal_connect_object( GTK_OBJECT(open_items), "activate",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(menuitem_response), (gpointer) "file.open");
gtk_signal_connect_object( GTK_OBJECT(save_items), "activate",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(menuitem_response), (gpointer) "file.save");
/* We can attach the Quit menu item to our exit function */
gtk_signal_connect_object( GTK_OBJECT(quit_items), "activate",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(destroy), (gpointer) "file.quit");
/* We do need to show menu items */
gtk_widget_show( open_item );
gtk_widget_show( save_item );
gtk_widget_show( quit_item );
</verb></tscreen>
At this point we have our menu. Now we need to create a menubar and a menu
item for the <tt/File/ entry, to which we add our menu. The code looks like this
<tscreen><verb>
menu_bar = gtk_menu_bar_new();
gtk_container_add( GTK_CONTAINER(window), menu_bar);
gtk_widget_show( menu_bar );
file_item = gtk_menu_item_new_with_label("File");
gtk_widget_show(file_item);
</verb></tscreen>
Now we need to associate the menu with <tt/file_item/. This is done with the
function
<tscreen>
void gtk_menu_item_set_submenu( GtkMenuItem *menu_item,
GtkWidget *submenu );
</tscreen>
So, our example would continue with
<tscreen><verb>
gtk_menu_item_set_submenu( GTK_MENU_ITEM(file_item), file_menu );
</verb></tscreen>
All that is left to do is to add the menu to the menubar, which is accomplished
using the function
<tscreen>
void gtk_menu_bar_append( GtkMenuBar *menu_bar, GtkWidget *menu_item);
</tscreen>
which in our case looks like this:
<tscreen><verb>
gtk_menu_bar_append( GTK_MENU_BAR (menu_bar), file_item );
</verb></tscreen>
If we wanted the menu right justified on the menubar, such as help menus
often are, we can use the following function (again on <tt/file_item/
in the current example) before attaching it to the menubar.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_menu_item_right_justify( GtkMenuItem *menu_item );
</verb></tscreen>
Here is a summary of the steps needed to create a menu bar with menus attached:
<itemize>
<item> Create a new menu using gtk_menu_new()
<item> Use multiple calls to gtk_menu_item_new() for each item you wish to have
on your menu. And use gtk_menu_append() to put each of these new items on
to the menu.
<item> Create a menu item using gtk_menu_item_new(). This will be the root of
the menu, the text appearing here will be on the menubar itself.
<item>Use gtk_menu_item_set_submenu() to attach the menu to the root menu
item (the one created in the above step).
<item> Create a new menubar using gtk_menu_bar_new. This step only needs
to be done once when creating a series of menus on one menu bar.
<item> Use gtk_menu_bar_append to put the root menu onto the menubar.
</itemize>
Creating a popup menu is nearly the same. The difference is that the
menu is not posted `automatically' by a menubar, but explicitly by calling
the function gtk_menu_popup() from a button-press event, for example.
Take these steps:
<itemize>
<item>Create an event handling function. It needs to have the prototype
<tscreen>
static gint handler( GtkWidget *widget,
GdkEvent *event );
</tscreen>
and it will use the event to find out where to pop up the menu.
<item>In the event handler, if the event is a mouse button press, treat
<tt>event</tt> as a button event (which it is) and use it as
shown in the sample code to pass information to gtk_menu_popup().
<item>Bind that event handler to a widget with
<tscreen>
gtk_signal_connect_object(GTK_OBJECT(widget), "event",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (handler), GTK_OBJECT(menu));
</tscreen>
where <tt>widget</tt> is the widget you are binding to, <tt>handler</tt>
is the handling function, and <tt>menu</tt> is a menu created with
gtk_menu_new(). This can be a menu which is also posted by a menu bar,
as shown in the sample code.
</itemize>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Manual Menu Example
<p>
That should about do it. Let's take a look at an example to help clarify.
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start menu menu.c */
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
static gint button_press (GtkWidget *, GdkEvent *);
static void menuitem_response (gchar *);
int main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
GtkWidget *window;
GtkWidget *menu;
GtkWidget *menu_bar;
GtkWidget *root_menu;
GtkWidget *menu_items;
GtkWidget *vbox;
GtkWidget *button;
char buf[128];
int i;
gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
/* create a new window */
window = gtk_window_new(GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
gtk_widget_set_usize( GTK_WIDGET (window), 200, 100);
gtk_window_set_title(GTK_WINDOW (window), "GTK Menu Test");
gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT (window), "delete_event",
(GtkSignalFunc) gtk_main_quit, NULL);
/* Init the menu-widget, and remember -- never
* gtk_show_widget() the menu widget!!
* This is the menu that holds the menu items, the one that
* will pop up when you click on the "Root Menu" in the app */
menu = gtk_menu_new();
/* Next we make a little loop that makes three menu-entries for "test-menu".
* Notice the call to gtk_menu_append. Here we are adding a list of
* menu items to our menu. Normally, we'd also catch the "clicked"
* signal on each of the menu items and setup a callback for it,
* but it's omitted here to save space. */
for(i = 0; i < 3; i++)
{
/* Copy the names to the buf. */
sprintf(buf, "Test-undermenu - %d", i);
/* Create a new menu-item with a name... */
menu_items = gtk_menu_item_new_with_label(buf);
/* ...and add it to the menu. */
gtk_menu_append(GTK_MENU (menu), menu_items);
/* Do something interesting when the menuitem is selected */
gtk_signal_connect_object(GTK_OBJECT(menu_items), "activate",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(menuitem_response), (gpointer) g_strdup(buf));
/* Show the widget */
gtk_widget_show(menu_items);
}
/* This is the root menu, and will be the label
* displayed on the menu bar. There won't be a signal handler attached,
* as it only pops up the rest of the menu when pressed. */
root_menu = gtk_menu_item_new_with_label("Root Menu");
gtk_widget_show(root_menu);
/* Now we specify that we want our newly created "menu" to be the menu
* for the "root menu" */
gtk_menu_item_set_submenu(GTK_MENU_ITEM (root_menu), menu);
/* A vbox to put a menu and a button in: */
vbox = gtk_vbox_new(FALSE, 0);
gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(window), vbox);
gtk_widget_show(vbox);
/* Create a menu-bar to hold the menus and add it to our main window */
menu_bar = gtk_menu_bar_new();
gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), menu_bar, FALSE, FALSE, 2);
gtk_widget_show(menu_bar);
/* Create a button to which to attach menu as a popup */
button = gtk_button_new_with_label("press me");
gtk_signal_connect_object(GTK_OBJECT(button), "event",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (button_press), GTK_OBJECT(menu));
gtk_box_pack_end(GTK_BOX(vbox), button, TRUE, TRUE, 2);
gtk_widget_show(button);
/* And finally we append the menu-item to the menu-bar -- this is the
* "root" menu-item I have been raving about =) */
gtk_menu_bar_append(GTK_MENU_BAR (menu_bar), root_menu);
/* always display the window as the last step so it all splashes on
* the screen at once. */
gtk_widget_show(window);
gtk_main ();
return 0;
}
/* Respond to a button-press by posting a menu passed in as widget.
*
* Note that the "widget" argument is the menu being posted, NOT
* the button that was pressed.
*/
static gint button_press (GtkWidget *widget, GdkEvent *event)
{
if (event->type == GDK_BUTTON_PRESS) {
GdkEventButton *bevent = (GdkEventButton *) event;
gtk_menu_popup (GTK_MENU(widget), NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL,
bevent->button, bevent->time);
/* Tell calling code that we have handled this event; the buck
* stops here. */
return TRUE;
}
/* Tell calling code that we have not handled this event; pass it on. */
return FALSE;
}
/* Print a string when a menu item is selected */
static void menuitem_response (gchar *string)
{
printf("%s\n", string);
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
You may also set a menu item to be insensitive and, using an accelerator
table, bind keys to menu functions.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Using GtkMenuFactory
<p>
Now that we've shown you the hard way, here's how you do it using the
gtk_menu_factory calls.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Menu Factory Example
<p>
Here is an example using the GTK menu factory. This is the first file,
menufactory.h. We keep a separate menufactory.c and mfmain.c because
of the global variables used in the menufactory.c file.
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start menu menufactory.h */
#ifndef __MENUFACTORY_H__
#define __MENUFACTORY_H__
#ifdef __cplusplus
extern "C" {
#endif /* __cplusplus */
void get_main_menu (GtkWidget *, GtkWidget **menubar);
#ifdef __cplusplus
}
#endif /* __cplusplus */
#endif /* __MENUFACTORY_H__ */
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
And here is the menufactory.c file.
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start menu menufactory.c */
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
#include <strings.h>
#include "mfmain.h"
static void print_hello(GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data);
/* this is the GtkMenuEntry structure used to create new menus. The
* first member is the menu definition string. The second, the
* default accelerator key used to access this menu function with
* the keyboard. The third is the callback function to call when
* this menu item is selected (by the accelerator key, or with the
* mouse.) The last member is the data to pass to your callback function.
*/
static GtkMenuEntry menu_items[] =
{
{"<Main>/File/New", "<control>N", print_hello, NULL},
{"<Main>/File/Open", "<control>O", print_hello, NULL},
{"<Main>/File/Save", "<control>S", print_hello, NULL},
{"<Main>/File/Save as", NULL, NULL, NULL},
{"<Main>/File/<separator>", NULL, NULL, NULL},
{"<Main>/File/Quit", "<control>Q", file_quit_cmd_callback, "OK, I'll quit"},
{"<Main>/Options/Test", NULL, NULL, NULL}
};
static void
print_hello(GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data)
{
printf("hello!\n");
}
void get_main_menu(GtkWidget *window, GtkWidget ** menubar)
{
int nmenu_items = sizeof(menu_items) / sizeof(menu_items[0]);
GtkMenuFactory *factory;
GtkMenuFactory *subfactory;
factory = gtk_menu_factory_new(GTK_MENU_FACTORY_MENU_BAR);
subfactory = gtk_menu_factory_new(GTK_MENU_FACTORY_MENU_BAR);
gtk_menu_factory_add_subfactory(factory, subfactory, "<Main>");
gtk_menu_factory_add_entries(factory, menu_items, nmenu_items);
gtk_window_add_accelerator_table(GTK_WINDOW(window), subfactory->table);
if (menubar)
*menubar = subfactory->widget;
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
And here's the mfmain.h
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start menu mfmain.h */
#ifndef __MFMAIN_H__
#define __MFMAIN_H__
#ifdef __cplusplus
extern "C" {
#endif /* __cplusplus */
void file_quit_cmd_callback(GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data);
#ifdef __cplusplus
}
#endif /* __cplusplus */
#endif /* __MFMAIN_H__ */
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
And mfmain.c
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start menu mfmain.c */
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
#include "mfmain.h"
#include "menufactory.h"
int main(int argc, char *argv[])
{
GtkWidget *window;
GtkWidget *main_vbox;
GtkWidget *menubar;
gtk_init(&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
window = gtk_window_new(GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(window), "destroy",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(file_quit_cmd_callback),
"WM destroy");
gtk_window_set_title(GTK_WINDOW(window), "Menu Factory");
gtk_widget_set_usize(GTK_WIDGET(window), 300, 200);
main_vbox = gtk_vbox_new(FALSE, 1);
gtk_container_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(main_vbox), 1);
gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(window), main_vbox);
gtk_widget_show(main_vbox);
get_main_menu(window, &amp;menubar);
gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(main_vbox), menubar, FALSE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show(menubar);
gtk_widget_show(window);
gtk_main();
return(0);
}
/* This is just to demonstrate how callbacks work when using the
* menufactory. Often, people put all the callbacks from the menus
* in a separate file, and then have them call the appropriate functions
* from there. Keeps it more organized. */
void file_quit_cmd_callback (GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data)
{
g_print ("%s\n", (char *) data);
gtk_exit(0);
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
And a makefile so it'll be easier to compile it.
<tscreen><verb>
# Makefile.mf
CC = gcc
PROF = -g
C_FLAGS = -Wall $(PROF) -L/usr/local/include -DDEBUG
L_FLAGS = $(PROF) -L/usr/X11R6/lib -L/usr/local/lib
L_POSTFLAGS = -lgtk -lgdk -lglib -lXext -lX11 -lm
PROGNAME = menufactory
O_FILES = menufactory.o mfmain.o
$(PROGNAME): $(O_FILES)
rm -f $(PROGNAME)
$(CC) $(L_FLAGS) -o $(PROGNAME) $(O_FILES) $(L_POSTFLAGS)
.c.o:
$(CC) -c $(C_FLAGS) $<
clean:
rm -f core *.o $(PROGNAME) nohup.out
distclean: clean
rm -f *~
</verb></tscreen>
For now, there's only this example. An explanation and lots 'o' comments
will follow later.
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect> Text Widget
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<p>
The Text widget allows multiple lines of text to be displayed and edited.
It supports both multi-colored and multi-font text, allowing them to be
mixed in any way we wish. It also has a wide set of key based text editing
commands, which are compatible with Emacs.
The text widget supports full cut-and-paste facilities, including the use
of double- and triple-click to select a word and a whole line, respectively.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Creating and Configuring a Text box
<p>
There is only one function for creating a new Text widget.
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_text_new( GtkAdjustment *hadj,
GtkAdjustment *vadj );
</verb></tscreen>
The arguments allow us to give the Text widget pointers to Adjustments
that can be used to track the viewing position of the widget. Passing NULL
values to either or both of these arguments will cause the gtk_text_new
function to create its own.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_text_set_adjustments( GtkText *text,
GtkAdjustment *hadj,
GtkAdjustment *vadj );
</verb></tscreen>
The above function allows the horizontal and vertical adjustments of a
Text widget to be changed at any time.
The text widget will not automatically create its own scrollbars when
the amount of text to be displayed is too long for the display window. We
therefore have to create and add them to the display layout ourselves.
<tscreen><verb>
vscrollbar = gtk_vscrollbar_new (GTK_TEXT(text)->vadj);
gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(hbox), vscrollbar, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (vscrollbar);
</verb></tscreen>
The above code snippet creates a new vertical scrollbar, and attaches
it to the vertical adjustment of the text widget, <tt/text/. It then packs
it into a box in the normal way.
Note, currently the GtkText widget does not support horizontal scrollbars.
There are two main ways in which a Text widget can be used: to allow the
user to edit a body of text, or to allow us to display multiple lines of
text to the user. In order for us to switch between these modes of
operation, the text widget has the following function:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_text_set_editable( GtkText *text,
gint editable );
</verb></tscreen>
The <tt/editable/ argument is a TRUE or FALSE value that specifies whether
the user is permitted to edit the contents of the Text widget. When the
text widget is editable, it will display a cursor at the current insertion
point.
You are not, however, restricted to just using the text widget in these
two modes. You can toggle the editable state of the text widget at any
time, and can insert text at any time.
The text widget wraps lines of text that are too long to
fit onto a single line of the display window. Its default behaviour is
to break words across line breaks. This can be changed using the next
function:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_text_set_word_wrap( GtkText *text,
gint word_wrap );
</verb></tscreen>
Using this function allows us to specify that the text widget should
wrap long lines on word boundaries. The <tt/word_wrap/ argument is a
TRUE or FALSE value.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Text Manipulation
<P>
The current insertion point of a Text widget can be set using
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_text_set_point( GtkText *text,
guint index );
</verb></tscreen>
where <tt/index/ is the position to set the insertion point.
Analogous to this is the function for getting the current insertion point:
<tscreen><verb>
guint gtk_text_get_point( GtkText *text );
</verb></tscreen>
A function that is useful in combination with the above two functions is
<tscreen><verb>
guint gtk_text_get_length( GtkText *text );
</verb></tscreen>
which returns the current length of the Text widget. The length is the
number of characters that are within the text block of the widget,
including characters such as carriage-return, which marks the end of lines.
In order to insert text at the current insertion point of a Text
widget, the function gtk_text_insert is used, which also allows us to
specify background and foreground colors and a font for the text.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_text_insert( GtkText *text,
GdkFont *font,
GdkColor *fore,
GdkColor *back,
const char *chars,
gint length );
</verb></tscreen>
Passing a value of <tt/NULL/ in as the value for the foreground color,
background colour or font will result in the values set within the widget
style to be used. Using a value of <tt/-1/ for the length parameter will
result in the whole of the text string given being inserted.
The text widget is one of the few within GTK that redraws itself
dynamically, outside of the gtk_main function. This means that all changes
to the contents of the text widget take effect immediately. This may be
undesirable when performing multiple changes to the text widget. In order
to allow us to perform multiple updates to the text widget without it
continuously redrawing, we can freeze the widget, which temporarily stops
it from automatically redrawing itself every time it is changed. We can
then thaw the widget after our updates are complete.
The following two functions perform this freeze and thaw action:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_text_freeze( GtkText *text );
void gtk_text_thaw( GtkText *text );
</verb></tscreen>
Text is deleted from the text widget relative to the current insertion
point by the following two functions. The return value is a TRUE or
FALSE indicator of whether the operation was successful.
<tscreen><verb>
gint gtk_text_backward_delete( GtkText *text,
guint nchars );
gint gtk_text_forward_delete ( GtkText *text,
guint nchars );
</verb></tscreen>
If you want to retrieve the contents of the text widget, then the macro
<tt/GTK_TEXT_INDEX(t, index)/ allows you to retrieve the character at
position <tt/index/ within the text widget <tt/t/.
To retrieve larger blocks of text, we can use the function
<tscreen><verb>
gchar *gtk_editable_get_chars( GtkEditable *editable,
gint start_pos,
gint end_pos );
</verb></tscreen>
This is a function of the parent class of the text widget. A value of -1 as
<tt/end_pos/ signifies the end of the text. The index of the text starts at 0.
The function allocates a new chunk of memory for the text block, so don't forget
to free it with a call to g_free when you have finished with it.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Keyboard Shortcuts
<p>
The text widget has a number of pre-installed keyboard shortcuts for common
editing, motion and selection functions. These are accessed using Control
and Alt key combinations.
In addition to these, holding down the Control key whilst using cursor key
movement will move the cursor by words rather than characters. Holding down
Shift whilst using cursor movement will extend the selection.
<sect2>Motion Shortcuts
<p>
<itemize>
<item> Ctrl-A Beginning of line
<item> Ctrl-E End of line
<item> Ctrl-N Next Line
<item> Ctrl-P Previous Line
<item> Ctrl-B Backward one character
<item> Ctrl-F Forward one character
<item> Alt-B Backward one word
<item> Alt-F Forward one word
</itemize>
<sect2>Editing Shortcuts
<p>
<itemize>
<item> Ctrl-H Delete Backward Character (Backspace)
<item> Ctrl-D Delete Forward Character (Delete)
<item> Ctrl-W Delete Backward Word
<item> Alt-D Delete Forward Word
<item> Ctrl-K Delete to end of line
<item> Ctrl-U Delete line
</itemize>
<sect2>Selection Shortcuts
<p>
<itemize>
<item> Ctrl-X Cut to clipboard
<item> Ctrl-C Copy to clipboard
<item> Ctrl-V Paste from clipboard
</itemize>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>A GtkText Example
<p>
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start text text.c */
/* text.c */
#include <stdio.h>
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
void text_toggle_editable (GtkWidget *checkbutton,
GtkWidget *text)
{
gtk_text_set_editable(GTK_TEXT(text),
GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON(checkbutton)->active);
}
void text_toggle_word_wrap (GtkWidget *checkbutton,
GtkWidget *text)
{
gtk_text_set_word_wrap(GTK_TEXT(text),
GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON(checkbutton)->active);
}
void close_application( GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data )
{
gtk_main_quit();
}
int main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
GtkWidget *window;
GtkWidget *box1;
GtkWidget *box2;
GtkWidget *hbox;
GtkWidget *button;
GtkWidget *check;
GtkWidget *separator;
GtkWidget *table;
GtkWidget *vscrollbar;
GtkWidget *text;
GdkColormap *cmap;
GdkColor colour;
GdkFont *fixed_font;
FILE *infile;
gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
gtk_widget_set_usize (window, 600, 500);
gtk_window_set_policy (GTK_WINDOW(window), TRUE, TRUE, FALSE);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "destroy",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(close_application),
NULL);
gtk_window_set_title (GTK_WINDOW (window), "Text Widget Example");
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 0);
box1 = gtk_vbox_new (FALSE, 0);
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), box1);
gtk_widget_show (box1);
box2 = gtk_vbox_new (FALSE, 10);
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (box2), 10);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (box2);
table = gtk_table_new (2, 2, FALSE);
gtk_table_set_row_spacing (GTK_TABLE (table), 0, 2);
gtk_table_set_col_spacing (GTK_TABLE (table), 0, 2);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box2), table, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (table);
/* Create the GtkText widget */
text = gtk_text_new (NULL, NULL);
gtk_text_set_editable (GTK_TEXT (text), TRUE);
gtk_table_attach (GTK_TABLE (table), text, 0, 1, 0, 1,
GTK_EXPAND | GTK_SHRINK | GTK_FILL,
GTK_EXPAND | GTK_SHRINK | GTK_FILL, 0, 0);
gtk_widget_show (text);
/* Add a vertical scrollbar to the GtkText widget */
vscrollbar = gtk_vscrollbar_new (GTK_TEXT (text)->vadj);
gtk_table_attach (GTK_TABLE (table), vscrollbar, 1, 2, 0, 1,
GTK_FILL, GTK_EXPAND | GTK_SHRINK | GTK_FILL, 0, 0);
gtk_widget_show (vscrollbar);
/* Get the system colour map and allocate the colour red */
cmap = gdk_colormap_get_system();
colour.red = 0xffff;
colour.green = 0;
colour.blue = 0;
if (!gdk_color_alloc(cmap, &amp;colour)) {
g_error("couldn't allocate colour");
}
/* Load a fixed font */
fixed_font = gdk_font_load ("-misc-fixed-medium-r-*-*-*-140-*-*-*-*-*-*");
/* Realizing a widget creates a window for it, ready for us to insert some text */
gtk_widget_realize (text);
/* Freeze the text widget, ready for multiple updates */
gtk_text_freeze (GTK_TEXT (text));
/* Insert some coloured text */
gtk_text_insert (GTK_TEXT (text), NULL, &amp;text->style->black, NULL,
"Supports ", -1);
gtk_text_insert (GTK_TEXT (text), NULL, &amp;colour, NULL,
"colored ", -1);
gtk_text_insert (GTK_TEXT (text), NULL, &amp;text->style->black, NULL,
"text and different ", -1);
gtk_text_insert (GTK_TEXT (text), fixed_font, &amp;text->style->black, NULL,
"fonts\n\n", -1);
/* Load the file text.c into the text window */
infile = fopen("text.c", "r");
if (infile) {
char buffer[1024];
int nchars;
while (1)
{
nchars = fread(buffer, 1, 1024, infile);
gtk_text_insert (GTK_TEXT (text), fixed_font, NULL,
NULL, buffer, nchars);
if (nchars < 1024)
break;
}
fclose (infile);
}
/* Thaw the text widget, allowing the updates to become visible */
gtk_text_thaw (GTK_TEXT (text));
hbox = gtk_hbutton_box_new ();
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box2), hbox, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (hbox);
check = gtk_check_button_new_with_label("Editable");
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (hbox), check, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(check), "toggled",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(text_toggle_editable), text);
gtk_toggle_button_set_state(GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON(check), TRUE);
gtk_widget_show (check);
check = gtk_check_button_new_with_label("Wrap Words");
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (hbox), check, FALSE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(check), "toggled",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(text_toggle_word_wrap), text);
gtk_toggle_button_set_state(GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON(check), FALSE);
gtk_widget_show (check);
separator = gtk_hseparator_new ();
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), separator, FALSE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (separator);
box2 = gtk_vbox_new (FALSE, 10);
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (box2), 10);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box1), box2, FALSE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (box2);
button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("close");
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(close_application),
NULL);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box2), button, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
GTK_WIDGET_SET_FLAGS (button, GTK_CAN_DEFAULT);
gtk_widget_grab_default (button);
gtk_widget_show (button);
gtk_widget_show (window);
gtk_main ();
return 0;
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect> Undocumented Widgets
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<p>
These all require authors! :) Please consider contributing to our tutorial.
If you must use one of these widgets that are undocumented, I strongly
suggest you take a look at their respective header files in the GTK
distribution. GTK's function names are very descriptive. Once you have an
understanding of how things work, it's not difficult to figure out how to
use a widget simply by looking at its function declarations. This, along
with a few examples from others' code, and it should be no problem.
When you do come to understand all the functions of a new undocumented
widget, please consider writing a tutorial on it so others may benefit
from your time.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Fixed Container
<p>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Curves
<p>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Previews
<p>
(This may need to be rewritten to follow the style of the rest of the tutorial)
<tscreen><verb>
Previews serve a number of purposes in GIMP/GTK. The most important one is
this. High quality images may take up to tens of megabytes of memory - easy!
Any operation on an image that big is bound to take a long time. If it takes
you 5-10 trial-and-errors (i.e. 10-20 steps, since you have to revert after
you make an error) to choose the desired modification, it make take you
literally hours to make the right one - if you don't run out of memory
first. People who have spent hours in color darkrooms know the feeling.
Previews to the rescue!
But the annoyance of the delay is not the only issue. Oftentimes it is
helpful to compare the Before and After versions side-by-side or at least
back-to-back. If you're working with big images and 10 second delays,
obtaining the Before and After impressions is, to say the least, difficult.
For 30M images (4"x6", 600dpi, 24 bit) the side-by-side comparison is right
out for most people, while back-to-back is more like back-to-1001, 1002,
..., 1010-back! Previews to the rescue!
But there's more. Previews allow for side-by-side pre-previews. In other
words, you write a plug-in (e.g. the filterpack simulation) which would have
a number of here's-what-it-would-look-like-if-you-were-to-do-this previews.
An approach like this acts as a sort of a preview palette and is very
effective for subtle changes. Let's go previews!
There's more. For certain plug-ins real-time image-specific human
intervention maybe necessary. In the SuperNova plug-in, for example, the
user is asked to enter the coordinates of the center of the future
supernova. The easiest way to do this, really, is to present the user with a
preview and ask him to interactively select the spot. Let's go previews!
Finally, a couple of misc uses. One can use previews even when not working
with big images. For example, they are useful when rendering complicated
patterns. (Just check out the venerable Diffraction plug-in + many other
ones!) As another example, take a look at the colormap rotation plug-in
(work in progress). You can also use previews for little logos inside you
plug-ins and even for an image of yourself, The Author. Let's go previews!
When Not to Use Previews
Don't use previews for graphs, drawing etc. GDK is much faster for that. Use
previews only for rendered images!
Let's go previews!
You can stick a preview into just about anything. In a vbox, an hbox, a
table, a button, etc. But they look their best in tight frames around them.
Previews by themselves do not have borders and look flat without them. (Of
course, if the flat look is what you want...) Tight frames provide the
necessary borders.
[Image][Image]
Previews in many ways are like any other widgets in GTK (whatever that
means) except they possess an additional feature: they need to be filled with
some sort of an image! First, we will deal exclusively with the GTK aspect
of previews and then we'll discuss how to fill them.
GtkWidget *preview!
Without any ado:
/* Create a preview widget,
set its size, an show it */
GtkWidget *preview;
preview=gtk_preview_new(GTK_PREVIEW_COLOR)
/*Other option:
GTK_PREVIEW_GRAYSCALE);*/
gtk_preview_size (GTK_PREVIEW (preview), WIDTH, HEIGHT);
gtk_widget_show(preview);
my_preview_rendering_function(preview);
Oh yeah, like I said, previews look good inside frames, so how about:
GtkWidget *create_a_preview(int Width,
int Height,
int Colorfulness)
{
GtkWidget *preview;
GtkWidget *frame;
frame = gtk_frame_new(NULL);
gtk_frame_set_shadow_type (GTK_FRAME (frame), GTK_SHADOW_IN);
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER(frame),0);
gtk_widget_show(frame);
preview=gtk_preview_new (Colorfulness?GTK_PREVIEW_COLOR
:GTK_PREVIEW_GRAYSCALE);
gtk_preview_size (GTK_PREVIEW (preview), Width, Height);
gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(frame),preview);
gtk_widget_show(preview);
my_preview_rendering_function(preview);
return frame;
}
That's my basic preview. This routine returns the "parent" frame so you can
place it somewhere else in your interface. Of course, you can pass the
parent frame to this routine as a parameter. In many situations, however,
the contents of the preview are changed continually by your application. In
this case you may want to pass a pointer to the preview to a
"create_a_preview()" and thus have control of it later.
One more important note that may one day save you a lot of time. Sometimes
it is desirable to label you preview. For example, you may label the preview
containing the original image as "Original" and the one containing the
modified image as "Less Original". It might occur to you to pack the
preview along with the appropriate label into a vbox. The unexpected caveat
is that if the label is wider than the preview (which may happen for a
variety of reasons unforseeable to you, from the dynamic decision on the
size of the preview to the size of the font) the frame expands and no longer
fits tightly over the preview. The same problem can probably arise in other
situations as well.
[Image]
The solution is to place the preview and the label into a 2x1 table and by
attaching them with the following parameters (this is one possible variations
of course. The key is no GTK_FILL in the second attachment):
gtk_table_attach(GTK_TABLE(table),label,0,1,0,1,
0,
GTK_EXPAND|GTK_FILL,
0,0);
gtk_table_attach(GTK_TABLE(table),frame,0,1,1,2,
GTK_EXPAND,
GTK_EXPAND,
0,0);
And here's the result:
[Image]
Misc
Making a preview clickable is achieved most easily by placing it in a
button. It also adds a nice border around the preview and you may not even
need to place it in a frame. See the Filter Pack Simulation plug-in for an
example.
This is pretty much it as far as GTK is concerned.
Filling In a Preview
In order to familiarize ourselves with the basics of filling in previews,
let's create the following pattern (contrived by trial and error):
[Image]
void
my_preview_rendering_function(GtkWidget *preview)
{
#define SIZE 100
#define HALF (SIZE/2)
guchar *row=(guchar *) malloc(3*SIZE); /* 3 bits per dot */
gint i, j; /* Coordinates */
double r, alpha, x, y;
if (preview==NULL) return; /* I usually add this when I want */
/* to avoid silly crashes. You */
/* should probably make sure that */
/* everything has been nicely */
/* initialized! */
for (j=0; j < ABS(cos(2*alpha)) ) { /* Are we inside the shape? */
/* glib.h contains ABS(x). */
row[i*3+0] = sqrt(1-r)*255; /* Define Red */
row[i*3+1] = 128; /* Define Green */
row[i*3+2] = 224; /* Define Blue */
} /* "+0" is for alignment! */
else {
row[i*3+0] = r*255;
row[i*3+1] = ABS(sin((float)i/SIZE*2*PI))*255;
row[i*3+2] = ABS(sin((float)j/SIZE*2*PI))*255;
}
}
gtk_preview_draw_row( GTK_PREVIEW(preview),row,0,j,SIZE);
/* Insert "row" into "preview" starting at the point with */
/* coordinates (0,j) first column, j_th row extending SIZE */
/* pixels to the right */
}
free(row); /* save some space */
gtk_widget_draw(preview,NULL); /* what does this do? */
gdk_flush(); /* or this? */
}
Non-GIMP users can have probably seen enough to do a lot of things already.
For the GIMP users I have a few pointers to add.
Image Preview
It is probably wise to keep a reduced version of the image around with just
enough pixels to fill the preview. This is done by selecting every n'th
pixel where n is the ratio of the size of the image to the size of the
preview. All further operations (including filling in the previews) are then
performed on the reduced number of pixels only. The following is my
implementation of reducing the image. (Keep in mind that I've had only basic
C!)
(UNTESTED CODE ALERT!!!)
typedef struct {
gint width;
gint height;
gint bbp;
guchar *rgb;
guchar *mask;
} ReducedImage;
enum {
SELECTION_ONLY,
SELECTION_IN_CONTEXT,
ENTIRE_IMAGE
};
ReducedImage *Reduce_The_Image(GDrawable *drawable,
GDrawable *mask,
gint LongerSize,
gint Selection)
{
/* This function reduced the image down to the the selected preview size */
/* The preview size is determine by LongerSize, i.e. the greater of the */
/* two dimensions. Works for RGB images only! */
gint RH, RW; /* Reduced height and reduced width */
gint width, height; /* Width and Height of the area being reduced */
gint bytes=drawable->bpp;
ReducedImage *temp=(ReducedImage *)malloc(sizeof(ReducedImage));
guchar *tempRGB, *src_row, *tempmask, *src_mask_row,R,G,B;
gint i, j, whichcol, whichrow, x1, x2, y1, y2;
GPixelRgn srcPR, srcMask;
gint NoSelectionMade=TRUE; /* Assume that we're dealing with the entire */
/* image. */
gimp_drawable_mask_bounds (drawable->id, &amp;x1, &amp;y1, &amp;x2, &amp;y2);
width = x2-x1;
height = y2-y1;
/* If there's a SELECTION, we got its bounds!)
if (width != drawable->width &amp;&amp; height != drawable->height)
NoSelectionMade=FALSE;
/* Become aware of whether the user has made an active selection */
/* This will become important later, when creating a reduced mask. */
/* If we want to preview the entire image, overrule the above! */
/* Of course, if no selection has been made, this does nothing! */
if (Selection==ENTIRE_IMAGE) {
x1=0;
x2=drawable->width;
y1=0;
y2=drawable->height;
}
/* If we want to preview a selection with some surrounding area we */
/* have to expand it a little bit. Consider it a bit of a riddle. */
if (Selection==SELECTION_IN_CONTEXT) {
x1=MAX(0, x1-width/2.0);
x2=MIN(drawable->width, x2+width/2.0);
y1=MAX(0, y1-height/2.0);
y2=MIN(drawable->height, y2+height/2.0);
}
/* How we can determine the width and the height of the area being */
/* reduced. */
width = x2-x1;
height = y2-y1;
/* The lines below determine which dimension is to be the longer */
/* side. The idea borrowed from the supernova plug-in. I suspect I */
/* could've thought of it myself, but the truth must be told. */
/* Plagiarism stinks! */
if (width>height) {
RW=LongerSize;
RH=(float) height * (float) LongerSize/ (float) width;
}
else {
RH=LongerSize;
RW=(float)width * (float) LongerSize/ (float) height;
}
/* The entire image is stretched into a string! */
tempRGB = (guchar *) malloc(RW*RH*bytes);
tempmask = (guchar *) malloc(RW*RH);
gimp_pixel_rgn_init (&amp;srcPR, drawable, x1, y1, width, height, FALSE, FALSE);
gimp_pixel_rgn_init (&amp;srcMask, mask, x1, y1, width, height, FALSE, FALSE);
/* Grab enough to save a row of image and a row of mask. */
src_row = (guchar *) malloc (width*bytes);
src_mask_row = (guchar *) malloc (width);
for (i=0; i < RH; i++) {
whichrow=(float)i*(float)height/(float)RH;
gimp_pixel_rgn_get_row (&amp;srcPR, src_row, x1, y1+whichrow, width);
gimp_pixel_rgn_get_row (&amp;srcMask, src_mask_row, x1, y1+whichrow, width);
for (j=0; j < RW; j++) {
whichcol=(float)j*(float)width/(float)RW;
/* No selection made = each point is completely selected! */
if (NoSelectionMade)
tempmask[i*RW+j]=255;
else
tempmask[i*RW+j]=src_mask_row[whichcol];
/* Add the row to the one long string which now contains the image! */
tempRGB[i*RW*bytes+j*bytes+0]=src_row[whichcol*bytes+0];
tempRGB[i*RW*bytes+j*bytes+1]=src_row[whichcol*bytes+1];
tempRGB[i*RW*bytes+j*bytes+2]=src_row[whichcol*bytes+2];
/* Hold on to the alpha as well */
if (bytes==4)
tempRGB[i*RW*bytes+j*bytes+3]=src_row[whichcol*bytes+3];
}
}
temp->bpp=bytes;
temp->width=RW;
temp->height=RH;
temp->rgb=tempRGB;
temp->mask=tempmask;
return temp;
}
The following is a preview function which used the same ReducedImage type!
Note that it uses fakes transparency (if one is present by means of
fake_transparency which is defined as follows:
gint fake_transparency(gint i, gint j)
{
if ( ((i%20)- 10) * ((j%20)- 10)>0 )
return 64;
else
return 196;
}
Now here's the preview function:
void
my_preview_render_function(GtkWidget *preview,
gint changewhat,
gint changewhich)
{
gint Inten, bytes=drawable->bpp;
gint i, j, k;
float partial;
gint RW=reduced->width;
gint RH=reduced->height;
guchar *row=malloc(bytes*RW);;
for (i=0; i < RH; i++) {
for (j=0; j < RW; j++) {
row[j*3+0] = reduced->rgb[i*RW*bytes + j*bytes + 0];
row[j*3+1] = reduced->rgb[i*RW*bytes + j*bytes + 1];
row[j*3+2] = reduced->rgb[i*RW*bytes + j*bytes + 2];
if (bytes==4)
for (k=0; k<3; k++) {
float transp=reduced->rgb[i*RW*bytes+j*bytes+3]/255.0;
row[3*j+k]=transp*a[3*j+k]+(1-transp)*fake_transparency(i,j);
}
}
gtk_preview_draw_row( GTK_PREVIEW(preview),row,0,i,RW);
}
free(a);
gtk_widget_draw(preview,NULL);
gdk_flush();
}
Applicable Routines
guint gtk_preview_get_type (void);
/* No idea */
void gtk_preview_uninit (void);
/* No idea */
GtkWidget* gtk_preview_new (GtkPreviewType type);
/* Described above */
void gtk_preview_size (GtkPreview *preview,
gint width,
gint height);
/* Allows you to resize an existing preview. */
/* Apparently there's a bug in GTK which makes */
/* this process messy. A way to clean up a mess */
/* is to manually resize the window containing */
/* the preview after resizing the preview. */
void gtk_preview_put (GtkPreview *preview,
GdkWindow *window,
GdkGC *gc,
gint srcx,
gint srcy,
gint destx,
gint desty,
gint width,
gint height);
/* No idea */
void gtk_preview_put_row (GtkPreview *preview,
guchar *src,
guchar *dest,
gint x,
gint y,
gint w);
/* No idea */
void gtk_preview_draw_row (GtkPreview *preview,
guchar *data,
gint x,
gint y,
gint w);
/* Described in the text */
void gtk_preview_set_expand (GtkPreview *preview,
gint expand);
/* No idea */
/* No clue for any of the below but */
/* should be standard for most widgets */
void gtk_preview_set_gamma (double gamma);
void gtk_preview_set_color_cube (guint nred_shades,
guint ngreen_shades,
guint nblue_shades,
guint ngray_shades);
void gtk_preview_set_install_cmap (gint install_cmap);
void gtk_preview_set_reserved (gint nreserved);
GdkVisual* gtk_preview_get_visual (void);
GdkColormap* gtk_preview_get_cmap (void);
GtkPreviewInfo* gtk_preview_get_info (void);
That's all, folks!
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>The EventBox Widget<label id="sec_The_EventBox_Widget">
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<p>
Some gtk widgets don't have associated X windows, so they just draw on
their parents. Because of this, they cannot receive events
and if they are incorrectly sized, they don't clip so you can get
messy overwriting etc. If you require more from these widgets, the
EventBox is for you.
At first glance, the EventBox widget might appear to be totally
useless. It draws nothing on the screen and responds to no
events. However, it does serve a function - it provides an X window for
its child widget. This is important as many GTK widgets do not
have an associated X window. Not having an X window saves memory and
improves performance, but also has some drawbacks. A widget without an
X window cannot receive events, and does not perform any clipping on
its contents. Although the name <em/EventBox/ emphasizes the
event-handling function, the widget can also be used for clipping.
(And more ... see the example below.)
To create a new EventBox widget, use:
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget *gtk_event_box_new( void );
</verb></tscreen>
A child widget can then be added to this EventBox:
<tscreen><verb>
gtk_container_add( GTK_CONTAINER(event_box), widget );
</verb></tscreen>
The following example demonstrates both uses of an EventBox - a label
is created that is clipped to a small box, and set up so that a
mouse-click on the label causes the program to exit.
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start eventbox eventbox.c */
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
int
main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
GtkWidget *window;
GtkWidget *event_box;
GtkWidget *label;
gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
gtk_window_set_title (GTK_WINDOW (window), "Event Box");
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "destroy",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (gtk_exit), NULL);
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 10);
/* Create an EventBox and add it to our toplevel window */
event_box = gtk_event_box_new ();
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER(window), event_box);
gtk_widget_show (event_box);
/* Create a long label */
label = gtk_label_new ("Click here to quit, quit, quit, quit, quit");
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (event_box), label);
gtk_widget_show (label);
/* Clip it short. */
gtk_widget_set_usize (label, 110, 20);
/* And bind an action to it */
gtk_widget_set_events (event_box, GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(event_box), "button_press_event",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (gtk_exit), NULL);
/* Yet one more thing you need an X window for ... */
gtk_widget_realize (event_box);
gdk_window_set_cursor (event_box->window, gdk_cursor_new (GDK_HAND1));
gtk_widget_show (window);
gtk_main ();
return 0;
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>Setting Widget Attributes<label id="sec_setting_widget_attributes">
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<p>
This describes the functions used to operate on widgets. These can be used
to set style, padding, size etc.
(Maybe I should make a whole section on accelerators.)
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_widget_install_accelerator( GtkWidget *widget,
GtkAcceleratorTable *table,
gchar *signal_name,
gchar key,
guint8 modifiers );
void gtk_widget_remove_accelerator ( GtkWidget *widget,
GtkAcceleratorTable *table,
gchar *signal_name);
void gtk_widget_activate( GtkWidget *widget );
void gtk_widget_set_name( GtkWidget *widget,
gchar *name );
gchar *gtk_widget_get_name( GtkWidget *widget );
void gtk_widget_set_sensitive( GtkWidget *widget,
gint sensitive );
void gtk_widget_set_style( GtkWidget *widget,
GtkStyle *style );
GtkStyle *gtk_widget_get_style( GtkWidget *widget );
GtkStyle *gtk_widget_get_default_style( void );
void gtk_widget_set_uposition( GtkWidget *widget,
gint x,
gint y );
void gtk_widget_set_usize( GtkWidget *widget,
gint width,
gint height );
void gtk_widget_grab_focus( GtkWidget *widget );
void gtk_widget_show( GtkWidget *widget );
void gtk_widget_hide( GtkWidget *widget );
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>Timeouts, IO and Idle Functions<label id="sec_timeouts">
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Timeouts
<p>
You may be wondering how you make GTK do useful work when in gtk_main.
Well, you have several options. Using the following functions you can
create a timeout function that will be called every "interval"
milliseconds.
<tscreen><verb>
gint gtk_timeout_add( guint32 interval,
GtkFunction function,
gpointer data );
</verb></tscreen>
The first argument is the number of milliseconds between calls to your
function. The second argument is the function you wish to have called, and
the third, the data passed to this callback function. The return value is
an integer "tag" which may be used to stop the timeout by calling:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_timeout_remove( gint tag );
</verb></tscreen>
You may also stop the timeout function by returning zero or FALSE from
your callback function. Obviously this means if you want your function to
continue to be called, it should return a non-zero value, i.e. TRUE.
The declaration of your callback should look something like this:
<tscreen><verb>
gint timeout_callback( gpointer data );
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Monitoring IO
<p>
Another nifty feature of GTK, is the ability to have it check for data on a
file descriptor for you (as returned by open(2) or socket(2)). This is
especially useful for networking applications. The function:
<tscreen><verb>
gint gdk_input_add( gint source,
GdkInputCondition condition,
GdkInputFunction function,
gpointer data );
</verb></tscreen>
Where the first argument is the file descriptor you wish to have watched,
and the second specifies what you want GDK to look for. This may be one of:
<itemize>
<item>GDK_INPUT_READ - Call your function when there is data ready for
reading on your file descriptor.
<item>GDK_INPUT_WRITE - Call your function when the file descriptor is
ready for writing.
</itemize>
As I'm sure you've figured out already, the third argument is the function
you wish to have called when the above conditions are satisfied, and the
fourth is the data to pass to this function.
The return value is a tag that may be used to stop GDK from monitoring this
file descriptor using the following function.
<tscreen><verb>
void gdk_input_remove( gint tag );
</verb></tscreen>
The callback function should be declared as:
<tscreen><verb>
void input_callback( gpointer data,
gint source,
GdkInputCondition condition );
</verb></tscreen>
Where <tt/source/ and <tt/condition/ are as specified above.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Idle Functions
<p>
<!-- Need to check on idle priorities - TRG -->
What if you have a function you want called when nothing else is
happening ?
<tscreen><verb>
gint gtk_idle_add( GtkFunction function,
gpointer data );
</verb></tscreen>
This causes GTK to call the specified function whenever nothing else is
happening.
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_idle_remove( gint tag );
</verb></tscreen>
I won't explain the meaning of the arguments as they follow very much like
the ones above. The function pointed to by the first argument to
gtk_idle_add will be called whenever the opportunity arises. As with the
others, returning FALSE will stop the idle function from being called.
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>Advanced Event and Signal Handling<label id="sec_Adv_Events_and_Signals">
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Signal Functions
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2>Connecting and Disconnecting Signal Handlers
<p>
<tscreen><verb>
guint gtk_signal_connect( GtkObject *object,
const gchar *name,
GtkSignalFunc func,
gpointer func_data );
guint gtk_signal_connect_after( GtkObject *object,
const gchar *name,
GtkSignalFunc func,
gpointer func_data );
guint gtk_signal_connect_object( GtkObject *object,
const gchar *name,
GtkSignalFunc func,
GtkObject *slot_object );
guint gtk_signal_connect_object_after( GtkObject *object,
const gchar *name,
GtkSignalFunc func,
GtkObject *slot_object );
guint gtk_signal_connect_full( GtkObject *object,
const gchar *name,
GtkSignalFunc func,
GtkCallbackMarshal marshal,
gpointer data,
GtkDestroyNotify destroy_func,
gint object_signal,
gint after );
guint gtk_signal_connect_interp( GtkObject *object,
const gchar *name,
GtkCallbackMarshal func,
gpointer data,
GtkDestroyNotify destroy_func,
gint after );
void gtk_signal_connect_object_while_alive( GtkObject *object,
const gchar *signal,
GtkSignalFunc func,
GtkObject *alive_object );
void gtk_signal_connect_while_alive( GtkObject *object,
const gchar *signal,
GtkSignalFunc func,
gpointer func_data,
GtkObject *alive_object );
void gtk_signal_disconnect( GtkObject *object,
guint handler_id );
void gtk_signal_disconnect_by_func( GtkObject *object,
GtkSignalFunc func,
gpointer data );
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2>Blocking and Unblocking Signal Handlers
<p>
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_signal_handler_block( GtkObject *object,
guint handler_id);
void gtk_signal_handler_block_by_func( GtkObject *object,
GtkSignalFunc func,
gpointer data );
void gtk_signal_handler_block_by_data( GtkObject *object,
gpointer data );
void gtk_signal_handler_unblock( GtkObject *object,
guint handler_id );
void gtk_signal_handler_unblock_by_func( GtkObject *object,
GtkSignalFunc func,
gpointer data );
void gtk_signal_handler_unblock_by_data( GtkObject *object,
gpointer data );
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2>Emitting and Stopping Signals
<p>
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_signal_emit( GtkObject *object,
guint signal_id,
... );
void gtk_signal_emit_by_name( GtkObject *object,
const gchar *name,
... );
void gtk_signal_emitv( GtkObject *object,
guint signal_id,
GtkArg *params );
void gtk_signal_emitv_by_name( GtkObject *object,
const gchar *name,
GtkArg *params );
guint gtk_signal_n_emissions( GtkObject *object,
guint signal_id );
guint gtk_signal_n_emissions_by_name( GtkObject *object,
const gchar *name );
void gtk_signal_emit_stop( GtkObject *object,
guint signal_id );
void gtk_signal_emit_stop_by_name( GtkObject *object,
const gchar *name );
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Signal Emission and Propagation
<p>
Signal emission is the process wherby GTK+ runs all handlers for a
specific object and signal.
First, note that the return value from a signal emission is the
return value of the <em>last</em> handler executed. Since event signals
are all of type GTK_RUN_LAST, this will be the default (GTK+ supplied)
default handler, unless you connect with gtk_signal_connect_after().
The way an event (say GTK_BUTTON_PRESS) is handled, is:
<itemize>
<item>Start with the widget where the event occured.
<item>Emit the generic "event" signal. If that signal handler returns
a value of TRUE, stop all processing.
<item>Otherwise, emit a specific, "button_press_event" signal. If that
returns TRUE, stop all processing.
<item>Otherwise, go to the widget's parent, and repeat the above steps.
<item>Contimue until some signal handler returns TRUE, or until the
top-level widget is reached.
</itemize>
Some consequences of the above are:
<itemize>
<item>Your handler's return value will have no effect if there is a
default handler, unless you connect with gtk_signal_connect_after().
<item>To prevent the default handler from being run, you need to connect
with gtk_signal_connect() and use gtk_signal_emit_stop_by_name() - the
return value only affects whether the signal is propagated, not the
current emission.
</itemize>
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>Managing Selections
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Overview
<p>
One type of interprocess communication supported by GTK is
<em>selections</em>. A selection identifies a chunk of data, for
instance, a portion of text, selected by the user in some fashion, for
instance, by dragging with the mouse. Only one application on a
display, (the <em>owner</em> can own a particular selection at one
time, so when a selection is claimed by one application, the previous
owner must indicate to the user that selection has been
relinquished. Other applications can request the contents of a
selection in different forms, called <em>targets</em>. There can be
any number of selections, but most X applications only handle one, the
<em>primary selection</em>.
In most cases, it isn't necessary for a GTK application to deal with
selections itself. The standard widgets, such as the Entry widget,
already have the capability to claim the selection when appropriate
(e.g., when the user drags over text), and to retrieve the contents of
the selection owned by another widget, or another application (e.g.,
when the user clicks the second mouse button). However, there may be
cases in which you want to give other widgets the ability to supply
the selection, or you wish to retrieve targets not supported by
default.
A fundamental concept needed to understand selection handling is that
of the <em>atom</em>. An atom is an integer that uniquely identifies a
string (on a certain display). Certain atoms are predefined by the X
server, and in some cases there are constants in <tt>gtk.h</tt>
corresponding to these atoms. For instance the constant
<tt>GDK_PRIMARY_SELECTION</tt> corresponds to the string "PRIMARY".
In other cases, you should use the functions
<tt>gdk_atom_intern()</tt>, to get the atom corresponding to a string,
and <tt>gdk_atom_name()</tt>, to get the name of an atom. Both
selections and targets are identified by atoms.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Retrieving the selection
<p>
Retrieving the selection is an asynchronous process. To start the
process, you call:
<tscreen><verb>
gint gtk_selection_convert( GtkWidget *widget,
GdkAtom selection,
GdkAtom target,
guint32 time );
</verb</tscreen>
This <em>converts</em> the selection into the form specified by
<tt/target/. If at all possible, the time field should be the time
from the event that triggered the selection. This helps make sure that
events occur in the order that the user requested them. However, if it
is not available (for instance, if the conversion was triggered by
a "clicked" signal), then you can use the constant
<tt>GDK_CURRENT_TIME</tt>.
When the selection owner responds to the request, a
"selection_received" signal is sent to your application. The handler
for this signal receives a pointer to a <tt>GtkSelectionData</tt>
structure, which is defined as:
<tscreen><verb>
struct _GtkSelectionData
{
GdkAtom selection;
GdkAtom target;
GdkAtom type;
gint format;
guchar *data;
gint length;
};
</verb></tscreen>
<tt>selection</tt> and <tt>target</tt> are the values you gave in your
<tt>gtk_selection_convert()</tt> call. <tt>type</tt> is an atom that
identifies the type of data returned by the selection owner. Some
possible values are "STRING", a string of latin-1 characters, "ATOM",
a series of atoms, "INTEGER", an integer, etc. Most targets can only
return one type. <tt/format/ gives the length of the units (for
instance characters) in bits. Usually, you don't care about this when
receiving data. <tt>data</tt> is a pointer to the returned data, and
<tt>length</tt> gives the length of the returned data, in bytes. If
<tt>length</tt> is negative, then an error occurred and the selection
could not be retrieved. This might happen if no application owned the
selection, or if you requested a target that the application didn't
support. The buffer is actually guaranteed to be one byte longer than
<tt>length</tt>; the extra byte will always be zero, so it isn't
necessary to make a copy of strings just to null terminate them.
In the following example, we retrieve the special target "TARGETS",
which is a list of all targets into which the selection can be
converted.
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start selection gettargets.c */
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
void selection_received (GtkWidget *widget,
GtkSelectionData *selection_data,
gpointer data);
/* Signal handler invoked when user clicks on the "Get Targets" button */
void
get_targets (GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data)
{
static GdkAtom targets_atom = GDK_NONE;
/* Get the atom corresponding to the string "TARGETS" */
if (targets_atom == GDK_NONE)
targets_atom = gdk_atom_intern ("TARGETS", FALSE);
/* And request the "TARGETS" target for the primary selection */
gtk_selection_convert (widget, GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY, targets_atom,
GDK_CURRENT_TIME);
}
/* Signal handler called when the selections owner returns the data */
void
selection_received (GtkWidget *widget, GtkSelectionData *selection_data,
gpointer data)
{
GdkAtom *atoms;
GList *item_list;
int i;
/* **** IMPORTANT **** Check to see if retrieval succeeded */
if (selection_data->length < 0)
{
g_print ("Selection retrieval failed\n");
return;
}
/* Make sure we got the data in the expected form */
if (selection_data->type != GDK_SELECTION_TYPE_ATOM)
{
g_print ("Selection \"TARGETS\" was not returned as atoms!\n");
return;
}
/* Print out the atoms we received */
atoms = (GdkAtom *)selection_data->data;
item_list = NULL;
for (i=0; i<selection_data->length/sizeof(GdkAtom); i++)
{
char *name;
name = gdk_atom_name (atoms[i]);
if (name != NULL)
g_print ("%s\n",name);
else
g_print ("(bad atom)\n");
}
return;
}
int
main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
GtkWidget *window;
GtkWidget *button;
gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
/* Create the toplevel window */
window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
gtk_window_set_title (GTK_WINDOW (window), "Event Box");
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 10);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "destroy",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (gtk_exit), NULL);
/* Create a button the user can click to get targets */
button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("Get Targets");
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), button);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(button), "clicked",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (get_targets), NULL);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(button), "selection_received",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (selection_received), NULL);
gtk_widget_show (button);
gtk_widget_show (window);
gtk_main ();
return 0;
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Supplying the selection
<p>
Supplying the selection is a bit more complicated. You must register
handlers that will be called when your selection is requested. For
each selection/target pair you will handle, you make a call to:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_selection_add_handler( GtkWidget *widget,
GdkAtom selection,
GdkAtom target,
GtkSelectionFunction function,
GtkRemoveFunction remove_func,
gpointer data );
</verb></tscreen>
<tt/widget/, <tt/selection/, and <tt/target/ identify the requests
this handler will manage. <tt/remove_func/, if not
NULL, will be called when the signal handler is removed. This is
useful, for instance, for interpreted languages which need to
keep track of a reference count for <tt/data/.
The callback function has the signature:
<tscreen><verb>
typedef void (*GtkSelectionFunction)( GtkWidget *widget,
GtkSelectionData *selection_data,
gpointer data );
</verb></tscreen>
The GtkSelectionData is the same as above, but this time, we're
responsible for filling in the fields <tt/type/, <tt/format/,
<tt/data/, and <tt/length/. (The <tt/format/ field is actually
important here - the X server uses it to figure out whether the data
needs to be byte-swapped or not. Usually it will be 8 - <em/i.e./ a
character - or 32 - <em/i.e./ a. integer.) This is done by calling the
function:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_selection_data_set( GtkSelectionData *selection_data,
GdkAtom type,
gint format,
guchar *data,
gint length );
</verb></tscreen>
This function takes care of properly making a copy of the data so that
you don't have to worry about keeping it around. (You should not fill
in the fields of the GtkSelectionData structure by hand.)
When prompted by the user, you claim ownership of the selection by
calling:
<tscreen><verb>
gint gtk_selection_owner_set( GtkWidget *widget,
GdkAtom selection,
guint32 time );
</verb></tscreen>
If another application claims ownership of the selection, you will
receive a "selection_clear_event".
As an example of supplying the selection, the following program adds
selection functionality to a toggle button. When the toggle button is
depressed, the program claims the primary selection. The only target
supported (aside from certain targets like "TARGETS" supplied by GTK
itself), is the "STRING" target. When this target is requested, a
string representation of the time is returned.
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start selection setselection.c */
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
#include <time.h>
/* Callback when the user toggles the selection */
void
selection_toggled (GtkWidget *widget, gint *have_selection)
{
if (GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON(widget)->active)
{
*have_selection = gtk_selection_owner_set (widget,
GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY,
GDK_CURRENT_TIME);
/* if claiming the selection failed, we return the button to
the out state */
if (!*have_selection)
gtk_toggle_button_set_state (GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON(widget), FALSE);
}
else
{
if (*have_selection)
{
/* Before clearing the selection by setting the owner to NULL,
we check if we are the actual owner */
if (gdk_selection_owner_get (GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY) == widget->window)
gtk_selection_owner_set (NULL, GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY,
GDK_CURRENT_TIME);
*have_selection = FALSE;
}
}
}
/* Called when another application claims the selection */
gint
selection_clear (GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventSelection *event,
gint *have_selection)
{
*have_selection = FALSE;
gtk_toggle_button_set_state (GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON(widget), FALSE);
return TRUE;
}
/* Supplies the current time as the selection. */
void
selection_handle (GtkWidget *widget,
GtkSelectionData *selection_data,
gpointer data)
{
gchar *timestr;
time_t current_time;
current_time = time (NULL);
timestr = asctime (localtime(&amp;current_time));
/* When we return a single string, it should not be null terminated.
That will be done for us */
gtk_selection_data_set (selection_data, GDK_SELECTION_TYPE_STRING,
8, timestr, strlen(timestr));
}
int
main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
GtkWidget *window;
GtkWidget *selection_button;
static int have_selection = FALSE;
gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
/* Create the toplevel window */
window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
gtk_window_set_title (GTK_WINDOW (window), "Event Box");
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 10);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "destroy",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (gtk_exit), NULL);
/* Create a toggle button to act as the selection */
selection_button = gtk_toggle_button_new_with_label ("Claim Selection");
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), selection_button);
gtk_widget_show (selection_button);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(selection_button), "toggled",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (selection_toggled), &amp;have_selection);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(selection_button), "selection_clear_event",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (selection_clear), &amp;have_selection);
gtk_selection_add_handler (selection_button, GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY,
GDK_SELECTION_TYPE_STRING,
selection_handle, NULL);
gtk_widget_show (selection_button);
gtk_widget_show (window);
gtk_main ();
return 0;
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>glib<label id="sec_glib">
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<p>
glib provides many useful functions and definitions available for use
when creating GDK and GTK applications. I will list them all here with
a brief explanation. Many are duplicates of standard libc functions so
I won't go into detail on those. This is mostly to be used as a reference,
so you know what is available for use.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Definitions
<p>
Definitions for the extremes of many of the standard types are:
<tscreen><verb>
G_MINFLOAT
G_MAXFLOAT
G_MINDOUBLE
G_MAXDOUBLE
G_MINSHORT
G_MAXSHORT
G_MININT
G_MAXINT
G_MINLONG
G_MAXLONG
</verb></tscreen>
Also, the following typedefs. The ones left unspecified are dynamically set
depending on the architecture. Remember to avoid counting on the size of a
pointer if you want to be portable! E.g., a pointer on an Alpha is 8 bytes, but 4
on Intel.
<tscreen><verb>
char gchar;
short gshort;
long glong;
int gint;
char gboolean;
unsigned char guchar;
unsigned short gushort;
unsigned long gulong;
unsigned int guint;
float gfloat;
double gdouble;
long double gldouble;
void* gpointer;
gint8
guint8
gint16
guint16
gint32
guint32
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Doubly Linked Lists
<p>
The following functions are used to create, manage, and destroy doubly
linked lists. I assume you know what linked lists are, as it is beyond the scope
of this document to explain them. Of course, it's not required that you
know these for general use of GTK, but they are nice to know.
<tscreen><verb>
GList *g_list_alloc( void );
void g_list_free( GList *list );
void g_list_free_1( GList *list );
GList *g_list_append( GList *list,
gpointer data );
GList *g_list_prepend( GList *list,
gpointer data );
GList *g_list_insert( GList *list,
gpointer data,
gint position );
GList *g_list_remove( GList *list,
gpointer data );
GList *g_list_remove_link( GList *list,
GList *link );
GList *g_list_reverse( GList *list );
GList *g_list_nth( GList *list,
gint n );
GList *g_list_find( GList *list,
gpointer data );
GList *g_list_last( GList *list );
GList *g_list_first( GList *list );
gint g_list_length( GList *list );
void g_list_foreach( GList *list,
GFunc func,
gpointer user_data );
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Singly Linked Lists
<p>
Many of the above functions for singly linked lists are identical to the
above. Here is a complete list:
<tscreen><verb>
GSList *g_slist_alloc( void );
void g_slist_free( GSList *list );
void g_slist_free_1( GSList *list );
GSList *g_slist_append( GSList *list,
gpointer data );
GSList *g_slist_prepend( GSList *list,
gpointer data );
GSList *g_slist_insert( GSList *list,
gpointer data,
gint position );
GSList *g_slist_remove( GSList *list,
gpointer data );
GSList *g_slist_remove_link( GSList *list,
GSList *link );
GSList *g_slist_reverse( GSList *list );
GSList *g_slist_nth( GSList *list,
gint n );
GSList *g_slist_find( GSList *list,
gpointer data );
GSList *g_slist_last( GSList *list );
gint g_slist_length( GSList *list );
void g_slist_foreach( GSList *list,
GFunc func,
gpointer user_data );
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Memory Management
<p>
<tscreen><verb>
gpointer g_malloc( gulong size );
</verb></tscreen>
This is a replacement for malloc(). You do not need to check the return
value as it is done for you in this function.
<tscreen><verb>
gpointer g_malloc0( gulong size );
</verb></tscreen>
Same as above, but zeroes the memory before returning a pointer to it.
<tscreen><verb>
gpointer g_realloc( gpointer mem,
gulong size );
</verb></tscreen>
Relocates "size" bytes of memory starting at "mem". Obviously, the
memory should have been previously allocated.
<tscreen><verb>
void g_free( gpointer mem );
</verb></tscreen>
Frees memory. Easy one.
<tscreen><verb>
void g_mem_profile( void );
</verb></tscreen>
Dumps a profile of used memory, but requires that you add #define
MEM_PROFILE to the top of glib/gmem.c and re-make and make install.
<tscreen><verb>
void g_mem_check( gpointer mem );
</verb></tscreen>
Checks that a memory location is valid. Requires you add #define
MEM_CHECK to the top of gmem.c and re-make and make install.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Timers
<p>
Timer functions..
<tscreen><verb>
GTimer *g_timer_new( void );
void g_timer_destroy( GTimer *timer );
void g_timer_start( GTimer *timer );
void g_timer_stop( GTimer *timer );
void g_timer_reset( GTimer *timer );
gdouble g_timer_elapsed( GTimer *timer,
gulong *microseconds );
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>String Handling
<p>
A whole mess of string handling functions. They all look very interesting, and
probably better for many purposes than the standard C string functions, but
require documentation.
<tscreen><verb>
GString *g_string_new( gchar *init );
void g_string_free( GString *string,
gint free_segment );
GString *g_string_assign( GString *lval,
gchar *rval );
GString *g_string_truncate( GString *string,
gint len );
GString *g_string_append( GString *string,
gchar *val );
GString *g_string_append_c( GString *string,
gchar c );
GString *g_string_prepend( GString *string,
gchar *val );
GString *g_string_prepend_c( GString *string,
gchar c );
void g_string_sprintf( GString *string,
gchar *fmt,
...);
void g_string_sprintfa ( GString *string,
gchar *fmt,
... );
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Utility and Error Functions
<p>
<tscreen><verb>
gchar *g_strdup( const gchar *str );
</verb></tscreen>
Replacement strdup function. Copies the original strings contents to
newly allocated memory, and returns a pointer to it.
<tscreen><verb>
gchar *g_strerror( gint errnum );
</verb></tscreen>
I recommend using this for all error messages. It's much nicer, and more
portable than perror() or others. The output is usually of the form:
<tscreen><verb>
program name:function that failed:file or further description:strerror
</verb></tscreen>
Here's an example of one such call used in our hello_world program:
<tscreen><verb>
g_print("hello_world:open:%s:%s\n", filename, g_strerror(errno));
</verb></tscreen>
<tscreen><verb>
void g_error( gchar *format, ... );
</verb></tscreen>
Prints an error message. The format is just like printf, but it
prepends "** ERROR **: " to your message, and exits the program.
Use only for fatal errors.
<tscreen><verb>
void g_warning( gchar *format, ... );
</verb></tscreen>
Same as above, but prepends "** WARNING **: ", and does not exit the
program.
<tscreen><verb>
void g_message( gchar *format, ... );
</verb></tscreen>
Prints "message: " prepended to the string you pass in.
<tscreen><verb>
void g_print( gchar *format, ... );
</verb></tscreen>
Replacement for printf().
And our last function:
<tscreen><verb>
gchar *g_strsignal( gint signum );
</verb></tscreen>
Prints out the name of the Unix system signal given the signal number.
Useful in generic signal handling functions.
All of the above are more or less just stolen from glib.h. If anyone cares
to document any function, just send me an email!
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>GTK's rc Files
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<p>
GTK has its own way of dealing with application defaults, by using rc
files. These can be used to set the colors of just about any widget, and
can also be used to tile pixmaps onto the background of some widgets.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Functions For rc Files
<p>
When your application starts, you should include a call to:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_rc_parse( char *filename );
</verb></tscreen>
Passing in the filename of your rc file. This will cause GTK to parse this
file, and use the style settings for the widget types defined there.
If you wish to have a special set of widgets that can take on a different
style from others, or any other logical division of widgets, use a call to:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_widget_set_name( GtkWidget *widget,
gchar *name );
</verb></tscreen>
Passing your newly created widget as the first argument, and the name
you wish to give it as the second. This will allow you to change the
attributes of this widget by name through the rc file.
If we use a call something like this:
<tscreen><verb>
button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("Special Button");
gtk_widget_set_name (button, "special button");
</verb></tscreen>
Then this button is given the name "special button" and may be addressed by
name in the rc file as "special button.GtkButton". [<--- Verify ME!]
The example rc file below, sets the properties of the main window, and lets
all children of that main window inherit the style described by the "main
button" style. The code used in the application is:
<tscreen><verb>
window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
gtk_widget_set_name (window, "main window");
</verb></tscreen>
And then the style is defined in the rc file using:
<tscreen><verb>
widget "main window.*GtkButton*" style "main_button"
</verb></tscreen>
Which sets all the GtkButton widgets in the "main window" to the
"main_buttons" style as defined in the rc file.
As you can see, this is a fairly powerful and flexible system. Use your
imagination as to how best to take advantage of this.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>GTK's rc File Format
<p>
The format of the GTK file is illustrated in the example below. This is
the testgtkrc file from the GTK distribution, but I've added a
few comments and things. You may wish to include this explanation
your application to allow the user to fine tune his application.
There are several directives to change the attributes of a widget.
<itemize>
<item>fg - Sets the foreground color of a widget.
<item>bg - Sets the background color of a widget.
<item>bg_pixmap - Sets the background of a widget to a tiled pixmap.
<item>font - Sets the font to be used with the given widget.
</itemize>
In addition to this, there are several states a widget can be in, and you
can set different colors, pixmaps and fonts for each state. These states are:
<itemize>
<item>NORMAL - The normal state of a widget, without the mouse over top of
it, and not being pressed etc.
<item>PRELIGHT - When the mouse is over top of the widget, colors defined
using this state will be in effect.
<item>ACTIVE - When the widget is pressed or clicked it will be active, and
the attributes assigned by this tag will be in effect.
<item>INSENSITIVE - When a widget is set insensitive, and cannot be
activated, it will take these attributes.
<item>SELECTED - When an object is selected, it takes these attributes.
</itemize>
When using the "fg" and "bg" keywords to set the colors of widgets, the
format is:
<tscreen><verb>
fg[<STATE>] = { Red, Green, Blue }
</verb></tscreen>
Where STATE is one of the above states (PRELIGHT, ACTIVE etc), and the Red,
Green and Blue are values in the range of 0 - 1.0, { 1.0, 1.0, 1.0 } being
white. They must be in float form, or they will register as 0, so a straight
"1" will not work, it must be "1.0". A straight "0" is fine because it
doesn't matter if it's not recognized. Unrecognized values are set to 0.
bg_pixmap is very similar to the above, except the colors are replaced by a
filename.
pixmap_path is a list of paths separated by ":"'s. These paths will be
searched for any pixmap you specify.
The font directive is simply:
<tscreen><verb>
font = "<font name>"
</verb></tscreen>
Where the only hard part is figuring out the font string. Using xfontsel or
similar utility should help.
The "widget_class" sets the style of a class of widgets. These classes are
listed in the widget overview on the class hierarchy.
The "widget" directive sets a specifically named set of widgets to a
given style, overriding any style set for the given widget class.
These widgets are registered inside the application using the
gtk_widget_set_name() call. This allows you to specify the attributes of a
widget on a per widget basis, rather than setting the attributes of an
entire widget class. I urge you to document any of these special widgets so
users may customize them.
When the keyword <tt>parent</> is used as an attribute, the widget will take on
the attributes of its parent in the application.
When defining a style, you may assign the attributes of a previously defined
style to this new one.
<tscreen><verb>
style "main_button" = "button"
{
font = "-adobe-helvetica-medium-r-normal--*-100-*-*-*-*-*-*"
bg[PRELIGHT] = { 0.75, 0, 0 }
}
</verb></tscreen>
This example takes the "button" style, and creates a new "main_button" style
simply by changing the font and prelight background color of the "button"
style.
Of course, many of these attributes don't apply to all widgets. It's a
simple matter of common sense really. Anything that could apply, should.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Example rc file
<p>
<tscreen><verb>
# pixmap_path "<dir 1>:<dir 2>:<dir 3>:..."
#
pixmap_path "/usr/include/X11R6/pixmaps:/home/imain/pixmaps"
#
# style <name> [= <name>]
# {
# <option>
# }
#
# widget <widget_set> style <style_name>
# widget_class <widget_class_set> style <style_name>
# Here is a list of all the possible states. Note that some do not apply to
# certain widgets.
#
# NORMAL - The normal state of a widget, without the mouse over top of
# it, and not being pressed etc.
#
# PRELIGHT - When the mouse is over top of the widget, colors defined
# using this state will be in effect.
#
# ACTIVE - When the widget is pressed or clicked it will be active, and
# the attributes assigned by this tag will be in effect.
#
# INSENSITIVE - When a widget is set insensitive, and cannot be
# activated, it will take these attributes.
#
# SELECTED - When an object is selected, it takes these attributes.
#
# Given these states, we can set the attributes of the widgets in each of
# these states using the following directives.
#
# fg - Sets the foreground color of a widget.
# fg - Sets the background color of a widget.
# bg_pixmap - Sets the background of a widget to a tiled pixmap.
# font - Sets the font to be used with the given widget.
#
# This sets a style called "button". The name is not really important, as
# it is assigned to the actual widgets at the bottom of the file.
style "window"
{
#This sets the padding around the window to the pixmap specified.
#bg_pixmap[<STATE>] = "<pixmap filename>"
bg_pixmap[NORMAL] = "warning.xpm"
}
style "scale"
{
#Sets the foreground color (font color) to red when in the "NORMAL"
#state.
fg[NORMAL] = { 1.0, 0, 0 }
#Sets the background pixmap of this widget to that of its parent.
bg_pixmap[NORMAL] = "<parent>"
}
style "button"
{
# This shows all the possible states for a button. The only one that
# doesn't apply is the SELECTED state.
fg[PRELIGHT] = { 0, 1.0, 1.0 }
bg[PRELIGHT] = { 0, 0, 1.0 }
bg[ACTIVE] = { 1.0, 0, 0 }
fg[ACTIVE] = { 0, 1.0, 0 }
bg[NORMAL] = { 1.0, 1.0, 0 }
fg[NORMAL] = { .99, 0, .99 }
bg[INSENSITIVE] = { 1.0, 1.0, 1.0 }
fg[INSENSITIVE] = { 1.0, 0, 1.0 }
}
# In this example, we inherit the attributes of the "button" style and then
# override the font and background color when prelit to create a new
# "main_button" style.
style "main_button" = "button"
{
font = "-adobe-helvetica-medium-r-normal--*-100-*-*-*-*-*-*"
bg[PRELIGHT] = { 0.75, 0, 0 }
}
style "toggle_button" = "button"
{
fg[NORMAL] = { 1.0, 0, 0 }
fg[ACTIVE] = { 1.0, 0, 0 }
# This sets the background pixmap of the toggle_button to that of its
# parent widget (as defined in the application).
bg_pixmap[NORMAL] = "<parent>"
}
style "text"
{
bg_pixmap[NORMAL] = "marble.xpm"
fg[NORMAL] = { 1.0, 1.0, 1.0 }
}
style "ruler"
{
font = "-adobe-helvetica-medium-r-normal--*-80-*-*-*-*-*-*"
}
# pixmap_path "~/.pixmaps"
# These set the widget types to use the styles defined above.
# The widget types are listed in the class hierarchy, but could probably be
# just listed in this document for the users reference.
widget_class "GtkWindow" style "window"
widget_class "GtkDialog" style "window"
widget_class "GtkFileSelection" style "window"
widget_class "*Gtk*Scale" style "scale"
widget_class "*GtkCheckButton*" style "toggle_button"
widget_class "*GtkRadioButton*" style "toggle_button"
widget_class "*GtkButton*" style "button"
widget_class "*Ruler" style "ruler"
widget_class "*GtkText" style "text"
# This sets all the buttons that are children of the "main window" to
# the main_button style. These must be documented to be taken advantage of.
widget "main window.*GtkButton*" style "main_button"
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>Writing Your Own Widgets
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Overview
<p>
Although the GTK distribution comes with many types of widgets that
should cover most basic needs, there may come a time when you need to
create your own new widget type. Since GTK uses widget inheritance
extensively, and there is already a widget that is close to what you want,
it is often possible to make a useful new widget type in
just a few lines of code. But before starting work on a new widget, check
around first to make sure that someone has not already written
it. This will prevent duplication of effort and keep the number of
GTK widgets out there to a minimum, which will help keep both the code
and the interface of different applications consistent. As a flip side
to this, once you finish your widget, announce it to the world so
other people can benefit. The best place to do this is probably the
<tt>gtk-list</tt>.
Complete sources for the example widgets are available at the place you
got this tutorial, or from:
<htmlurl url="http://www.gtk.org/~otaylor/gtk/tutorial/"
name="http://www.gtk.org/~otaylor/gtk/tutorial/">
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> The Anatomy Of A Widget
<p>
In order to create a new widget, it is important to have an
understanding of how GTK objects work. This section is just meant as a
brief overview. See the reference documentation for the details.
GTK widgets are implemented in an object oriented fashion. However,
they are implemented in standard C. This greatly improves portability
and stability over using current generation C++ compilers; however,
it does mean that the widget writer has to pay attention to some of
the implementation details. The information common to all instances of
one class of widgets (e.g., to all Button widgets) is stored in the
<em>class structure</em>. There is only one copy of this in
which is stored information about the class's signals
(which act like virtual functions in C). To support inheritance, the
first field in the class structure must be a copy of the parent's
class structure. The declaration of the class structure of GtkButtton
looks like:
<tscreen><verb>
struct _GtkButtonClass
{
GtkContainerClass parent_class;
void (* pressed) (GtkButton *button);
void (* released) (GtkButton *button);
void (* clicked) (GtkButton *button);
void (* enter) (GtkButton *button);
void (* leave) (GtkButton *button);
};
</verb></tscreen>
When a button is treated as a container (for instance, when it is
resized), its class structure can be cast to GtkContainerClass, and
the relevant fields used to handle the signals.
There is also a structure for each widget that is created on a
per-instance basis. This structure has fields to store information that
is different for each instance of the widget. We'll call this
structure the <em>object structure</em>. For the Button class, it looks
like:
<tscreen><verb>
struct _GtkButton
{
GtkContainer container;
GtkWidget *child;
guint in_button : 1;
guint button_down : 1;
};
</verb></tscreen>
Note that, similar to the class structure, the first field is the
object structure of the parent class, so that this structure can be
cast to the parent class's object structure as needed.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Creating a Composite widget
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> Introduction
<p>
One type of widget that you may be interested in creating is a
widget that is merely an aggregate of other GTK widgets. This type of
widget does nothing that couldn't be done without creating new
widgets, but provides a convenient way of packaging user interface
elements for reuse. The FileSelection and ColorSelection widgets in
the standard distribution are examples of this type of widget.
The example widget that we'll create in this section is the Tictactoe
widget, a 3x3 array of toggle buttons which triggers a signal when all
three buttons in a row, column, or on one of the diagonals are
depressed.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> Choosing a parent class
<p>
The parent class for a composite widget is typically the container
class that holds all of the elements of the composite widget. For
example, the parent class of the FileSelection widget is the
Dialog class. Since our buttons will be arranged in a table, it
might seem natural to make our parent class the GtkTable
class. Unfortunately, this turns out not to work. The creation of a
widget is divided among two functions - a <tt/WIDGETNAME_new()/
function that the user calls, and a <tt/WIDGETNAME_init()/ function
which does the basic work of initializing the widget which is
independent of the arguments passed to the <tt/_new()/
function. Descendent widgets only call the <tt/_init/ function of
their parent widget. But this division of labor doesn't work well for
tables, which when created, need to know the number of rows and
columns in the table. Unless we want to duplicate most of the
functionality of <tt/gtk_table_new()/ in our Tictactoe widget, we had
best avoid deriving it from GtkTable. For that reason, we derive it
from GtkVBox instead, and stick our table inside the VBox.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> The header file
<p>
Each widget class has a header file which declares the object and
class structures for that widget, along with public functions.
A couple of features are worth pointing out. To prevent duplicate
definitions, we wrap the entire header file in:
<tscreen><verb>
#ifndef __TICTACTOE_H__
#define __TICTACTOE_H__
.
.
.
#endif /* __TICTACTOE_H__ */
</verb></tscreen>
And to keep C++ programs that include the header file happy, in:
<tscreen><verb>
#ifdef __cplusplus
extern "C" {
#endif /* __cplusplus */
.
.
.
#ifdef __cplusplus
}
#endif /* __cplusplus */
</verb></tscreen>
Along with the functions and structures, we declare three standard
macros in our header file, <tt/TICTACTOE(obj)/,
<tt/TICTACTOE_CLASS(klass)/, and <tt/IS_TICTACTOE(obj)/, which cast a
pointer into a pointer to the object or class structure, and check
if an object is a Tictactoe widget respectively.
Here is the complete header file:
<tscreen><verb>
/* tictactoe.h */
#ifndef __TICTACTOE_H__
#define __TICTACTOE_H__
#include <gdk/gdk.h>
#include <gtk/gtkvbox.h>
#ifdef __cplusplus
extern "C" {
#endif /* __cplusplus */
#define TICTACTOE(obj) GTK_CHECK_CAST (obj, tictactoe_get_type (), Tictactoe)
#define TICTACTOE_CLASS(klass) GTK_CHECK_CLASS_CAST (klass, tictactoe_get_type (), TictactoeClass)
#define IS_TICTACTOE(obj) GTK_CHECK_TYPE (obj, tictactoe_get_type ())
typedef struct _Tictactoe Tictactoe;
typedef struct _TictactoeClass TictactoeClass;
struct _Tictactoe
{
GtkVBox vbox;
GtkWidget *buttons[3][3];
};
struct _TictactoeClass
{
GtkVBoxClass parent_class;
void (* tictactoe) (Tictactoe *ttt);
};
guint tictactoe_get_type (void);
GtkWidget* tictactoe_new (void);
void tictactoe_clear (Tictactoe *ttt);
#ifdef __cplusplus
}
#endif /* __cplusplus */
#endif /* __TICTACTOE_H__ */
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> The <tt/_get_type()/ function.
<p>
We now continue on to the implementation of our widget. A core
function for every widget is the function
<tt/WIDGETNAME_get_type()/. This function, when first called, tells
GTK about the widget class, and gets an ID that uniquely identifies
the widget class. Upon subsequent calls, it just returns the ID.
<tscreen><verb>
guint
tictactoe_get_type ()
{
static guint ttt_type = 0;
if (!ttt_type)
{
GtkTypeInfo ttt_info =
{
"Tictactoe",
sizeof (Tictactoe),
sizeof (TictactoeClass),
(GtkClassInitFunc) tictactoe_class_init,
(GtkObjectInitFunc) tictactoe_init,
(GtkArgSetFunc) NULL,
(GtkArgGetFunc) NULL
};
ttt_type = gtk_type_unique (gtk_vbox_get_type (), &amp;ttt_info);
}
return ttt_type;
}
</verb></tscreen>
The GtkTypeInfo structure has the following definition:
<tscreen><verb>
struct _GtkTypeInfo
{
gchar *type_name;
guint object_size;
guint class_size;
GtkClassInitFunc class_init_func;
GtkObjectInitFunc object_init_func;
GtkArgSetFunc arg_set_func;
GtkArgGetFunc arg_get_func;
};
</verb></tscreen>
The fields of this structure are pretty self-explanatory. We'll ignore
the <tt/arg_set_func/ and <tt/arg_get_func/ fields here: they have an important,
but as yet largely
unimplemented, role in allowing widget options to be conveniently set
from interpreted languages. Once GTK has a correctly filled in copy of
this structure, it knows how to create objects of a particular widget
type.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> The <tt/_class_init()/ function
<p>
The <tt/WIDGETNAME_class_init()/ function initializes the fields of
the widget's class structure, and sets up any signals for the
class. For our Tictactoe widget it looks like:
<tscreen><verb>
enum {
TICTACTOE_SIGNAL,
LAST_SIGNAL
};
static gint tictactoe_signals[LAST_SIGNAL] = { 0 };
static void
tictactoe_class_init (TictactoeClass *class)
{
GtkObjectClass *object_class;
object_class = (GtkObjectClass*) class;
tictactoe_signals[TICTACTOE_SIGNAL] = gtk_signal_new ("tictactoe",
GTK_RUN_FIRST,
object_class->type,
GTK_SIGNAL_OFFSET (TictactoeClass, tictactoe),
gtk_signal_default_marshaller, GTK_TYPE_NONE, 0);
gtk_object_class_add_signals (object_class, tictactoe_signals, LAST_SIGNAL);
class->tictactoe = NULL;
}
</verb></tscreen>
Our widget has just one signal, the <tt/tictactoe/ signal that is
invoked when a row, column, or diagonal is completely filled in. Not
every composite widget needs signals, so if you are reading this for
the first time, you may want to skip to the next section now, as
things are going to get a bit complicated.
The function:
<tscreen><verb>
gint gtk_signal_new( const gchar *name,
GtkSignalRunType run_type,
GtkType object_type,
gint function_offset,
GtkSignalMarshaller marshaller,
GtkType return_val,
guint nparams,
...);
</verb></tscreen>
Creates a new signal. The parameters are:
<itemize>
<item> <tt/name/: The name of the signal.
<item> <tt/run_type/: Whether the default handler runs before or after
user handlers. Usually this will be <tt/GTK_RUN_FIRST/, or <tt/GTK_RUN_LAST/,
although there are other possibilities.
<item> <tt/object_type/: The ID of the object that this signal applies
to. (It will also apply to that objects descendents)
<item> <tt/function_offset/: The offset within the class structure of
a pointer to the default handler.
<item> <tt/marshaller/: A function that is used to invoke the signal
handler. For signal handlers that have no arguments other than the
object that emitted the signal and user data, we can use the
pre-supplied marshaller function <tt/gtk_signal_default_marshaller/.
<item> <tt/return_val/: The type of the return val.
<item> <tt/nparams/: The number of parameters of the signal handler
(other than the two default ones mentioned above)
<item> <tt/.../: The types of the parameters.
</itemize>
When specifying types, the <tt/GtkType/ enumeration is used:
<tscreen><verb>
typedef enum
{
GTK_TYPE_INVALID,
GTK_TYPE_NONE,
GTK_TYPE_CHAR,
GTK_TYPE_BOOL,
GTK_TYPE_INT,
GTK_TYPE_UINT,
GTK_TYPE_LONG,
GTK_TYPE_ULONG,
GTK_TYPE_FLOAT,
GTK_TYPE_DOUBLE,
GTK_TYPE_STRING,
GTK_TYPE_ENUM,
GTK_TYPE_FLAGS,
GTK_TYPE_BOXED,
GTK_TYPE_FOREIGN,
GTK_TYPE_CALLBACK,
GTK_TYPE_ARGS,
GTK_TYPE_POINTER,
/* it'd be great if the next two could be removed eventually */
GTK_TYPE_SIGNAL,
GTK_TYPE_C_CALLBACK,
GTK_TYPE_OBJECT
} GtkFundamentalType;
</verb></tscreen>
<tt/gtk_signal_new()/ returns a unique integer identifier for the
signal, that we store in the <tt/tictactoe_signals/ array, which we
index using an enumeration. (Conventionally, the enumeration elements
are the signal name, uppercased, but here there would be a conflict
with the <tt/TICTACTOE()/ macro, so we called it <tt/TICTACTOE_SIGNAL/
instead.
After creating our signals, we need to tell GTK to associate our
signals with the Tictactoe class. We do that by calling
<tt/gtk_object_class_add_signals()/. We then set the pointer which
points to the default handler for the `tictactoe' signal to NULL,
indicating that there is no default action.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> The <tt/_init()/ function.
<p>
Each widget class also needs a function to initialize the object
structure. Usually, this function has the fairly limited role of
setting the fields of the structure to default values. For composite
widgets, however, this function also creates the component widgets.
<tscreen><verb>
static void
tictactoe_init (Tictactoe *ttt)
{
GtkWidget *table;
gint i,j;
table = gtk_table_new (3, 3, TRUE);
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER(ttt), table);
gtk_widget_show (table);
for (i=0;i<3; i++)
for (j=0;j<3; j++)
{
ttt->buttons[i][j] = gtk_toggle_button_new ();
gtk_table_attach_defaults (GTK_TABLE(table), ttt->buttons[i][j],
i, i+1, j, j+1);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (ttt->buttons[i][j]), "toggled",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (tictactoe_toggle), ttt);
gtk_widget_set_usize (ttt->buttons[i][j], 20, 20);
gtk_widget_show (ttt->buttons[i][j]);
}
}
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> And the rest...
<p>
There is one more function that every widget (except for base widget
types like GtkBin that cannot be instantiated) needs to have - the
function that the user calls to create an object of that type. This is
conventionally called <tt/WIDGETNAME_new()/. In some
widgets, though not for the Tictactoe widgets, this function takes
arguments, and does some setup based on the arguments. The other two
functions are specific to the Tictactoe widget.
<tt/tictactoe_clear()/ is a public function that resets all the
buttons in the widget to the up position. Note the use of
<tt/gtk_signal_handler_block_by_data()/ to keep our signal handler for
button toggles from being triggered unnecessarily.
<tt/tictactoe_toggle()/ is the signal handler that is invoked when the
user clicks on a button. It checks to see if there are any winning
combinations that involve the toggled button, and if so, emits
the "tictactoe" signal.
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget*
tictactoe_new ()
{
return GTK_WIDGET ( gtk_type_new (tictactoe_get_type ()));
}
void
tictactoe_clear (Tictactoe *ttt)
{
int i,j;
for (i=0;i<3;i++)
for (j=0;j<3;j++)
{
gtk_signal_handler_block_by_data (GTK_OBJECT(ttt->buttons[i][j]), ttt);
gtk_toggle_button_set_state (GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON (ttt->buttons[i][j]),
FALSE);
gtk_signal_handler_unblock_by_data (GTK_OBJECT(ttt->buttons[i][j]), ttt);
}
}
static void
tictactoe_toggle (GtkWidget *widget, Tictactoe *ttt)
{
int i,k;
static int rwins[8][3] = { { 0, 0, 0 }, { 1, 1, 1 }, { 2, 2, 2 },
{ 0, 1, 2 }, { 0, 1, 2 }, { 0, 1, 2 },
{ 0, 1, 2 }, { 0, 1, 2 } };
static int cwins[8][3] = { { 0, 1, 2 }, { 0, 1, 2 }, { 0, 1, 2 },
{ 0, 0, 0 }, { 1, 1, 1 }, { 2, 2, 2 },
{ 0, 1, 2 }, { 2, 1, 0 } };
int success, found;
for (k=0; k<8; k++)
{
success = TRUE;
found = FALSE;
for (i=0;i<3;i++)
{
success = success &amp;&amp;
GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON(ttt->buttons[rwins[k][i]][cwins[k][i]])->active;
found = found ||
ttt->buttons[rwins[k][i]][cwins[k][i]] == widget;
}
if (success &amp;&amp; found)
{
gtk_signal_emit (GTK_OBJECT (ttt),
tictactoe_signals[TICTACTOE_SIGNAL]);
break;
}
}
}
</verb></tscreen>
And finally, an example program using our Tictactoe widget:
<tscreen><verb>
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
#include "tictactoe.h"
/* Invoked when a row, column or diagonal is completed */
void
win (GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data)
{
g_print ("Yay!\n");
tictactoe_clear (TICTACTOE (widget));
}
int
main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
GtkWidget *window;
GtkWidget *ttt;
gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
gtk_window_set_title (GTK_WINDOW (window), "Aspect Frame");
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "destroy",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (gtk_exit), NULL);
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 10);
/* Create a new Tictactoe widget */
ttt = tictactoe_new ();
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), ttt);
gtk_widget_show (ttt);
/* And attach to its "tictactoe" signal */
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (ttt), "tictactoe",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (win), NULL);
gtk_widget_show (window);
gtk_main ();
return 0;
}
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Creating a widget from scratch.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> Introduction
<p>
In this section, we'll learn more about how widgets display themselves
on the screen and interact with events. As an example of this, we'll
create an analog dial widget with a pointer that the user can drag to
set the value.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> Displaying a widget on the screen
<p>
There are several steps that are involved in displaying on the screen.
After the widget is created with a call to <tt/WIDGETNAME_new()/,
several more functions are needed:
<itemize>
<item> <tt/WIDGETNAME_realize()/ is responsible for creating an X
window for the widget if it has one.
<item> <tt/WIDGETNAME_map()/ is invoked after the user calls
<tt/gtk_widget_show()/. It is responsible for making sure the widget
is actually drawn on the screen (<em/mapped/). For a container class,
it must also make calls to <tt/map()/> functions of any child widgets.
<item> <tt/WIDGETNAME_draw()/ is invoked when <tt/gtk_widget_draw()/
is called for the widget or one of its ancestors. It makes the actual
calls to the drawing functions to draw the widget on the screen. For
container widgets, this function must make calls to
<tt/gtk_widget_draw()/ for its child widgets.
<item> <tt/WIDGETNAME_expose()/ is a handler for expose events for the
widget. It makes the necessary calls to the drawing functions to draw
the exposed portion on the screen. For container widgets, this
function must generate expose events for its child widgets which don't
have their own windows. (If they have their own windows, then X will
generate the necessary expose events)
</itemize>
You might notice that the last two functions are quite similar - each
is responsible for drawing the widget on the screen. In fact many
types of widgets don't really care about the difference between the
two. The default <tt/draw()/ function in the widget class simply
generates a synthetic expose event for the redrawn area. However, some
types of widgets can save work by distinguishing between the two
functions. For instance, if a widget has multiple X windows, then
since expose events identify the exposed window, it can redraw only
the affected window, which is not possible for calls to <tt/draw()/.
Container widgets, even if they don't care about the difference for
themselves, can't simply use the default <tt/draw()/ function because
their child widgets might care about the difference. However,
it would be wasteful to duplicate the drawing code between the two
functions. The convention is that such widgets have a function called
<tt/WIDGETNAME_paint()/ that does the actual work of drawing the
widget, that is then called by the <tt/draw()/ and <tt/expose()/
functions.
In our example approach, since the dial widget is not a container
widget, and only has a single window, we can take the simplest
approach and use the default <tt/draw()/ function and only implement
an <tt/expose()/ function.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> The origins of the Dial Widget
<p>
Just as all land animals are just variants on the first amphibian that
crawled up out of the mud, Gtk widgets tend to start off as variants
of some other, previously written widget. Thus, although this section
is entitled `Creating a Widget from Scratch', the Dial widget really
began with the source code for the Range widget. This was picked as a
starting point because it would be nice if our Dial had the same
interface as the Scale widgets which are just specialized descendents
of the Range widget. So, though the source code is presented below in
finished form, it should not be implied that it was written, <em>deus
ex machina</em> in this fashion. Also, if you aren't yet familiar with
how scale widgets work from the application writer's point of view, it
would be a good idea to look them over before continuing.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> The Basics
<p>
Quite a bit of our widget should look pretty familiar from the
Tictactoe widget. First, we have a header file:
<tscreen><verb>
/* GTK - The GIMP Toolkit
* Copyright (C) 1995-1997 Peter Mattis, Spencer Kimball and Josh MacDonald
*
* This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
* modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public
* License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
* version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
*
* This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
* Library General Public License for more details.
*
* You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
* License along with this library; if not, write to the Free
* Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
*/
#ifndef __GTK_DIAL_H__
#define __GTK_DIAL_H__
#include <gdk/gdk.h>
#include <gtk/gtkadjustment.h>
#include <gtk/gtkwidget.h>
#ifdef __cplusplus
extern "C" {
#endif /* __cplusplus */
#define GTK_DIAL(obj) GTK_CHECK_CAST (obj, gtk_dial_get_type (), GtkDial)
#define GTK_DIAL_CLASS(klass) GTK_CHECK_CLASS_CAST (klass, gtk_dial_get_type (), GtkDialClass)
#define GTK_IS_DIAL(obj) GTK_CHECK_TYPE (obj, gtk_dial_get_type ())
typedef struct _GtkDial GtkDial;
typedef struct _GtkDialClass GtkDialClass;
struct _GtkDial
{
GtkWidget widget;
/* update policy (GTK_UPDATE_[CONTINUOUS/DELAYED/DISCONTINUOUS]) */
guint policy : 2;
/* Button currently pressed or 0 if none */
guint8 button;
/* Dimensions of dial components */
gint radius;
gint pointer_width;
/* ID of update timer, or 0 if none */
guint32 timer;
/* Current angle */
gfloat angle;
/* Old values from adjustment stored so we know when something changes */
gfloat old_value;
gfloat old_lower;
gfloat old_upper;
/* The adjustment object that stores the data for this dial */
GtkAdjustment *adjustment;
};
struct _GtkDialClass
{
GtkWidgetClass parent_class;
};
GtkWidget* gtk_dial_new (GtkAdjustment *adjustment);
guint gtk_dial_get_type (void);
GtkAdjustment* gtk_dial_get_adjustment (GtkDial *dial);
void gtk_dial_set_update_policy (GtkDial *dial,
GtkUpdateType policy);
void gtk_dial_set_adjustment (GtkDial *dial,
GtkAdjustment *adjustment);
#ifdef __cplusplus
}
#endif /* __cplusplus */
#endif /* __GTK_DIAL_H__ */
</verb></tscreen>
Since there is quite a bit more going on in this widget, than the last
one, we have more fields in the data structure, but otherwise things
are pretty similar.
Next, after including header files, and declaring a few constants,
we have some functions to provide information about the widget
and initialize it:
<tscreen><verb>
#include <math.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <gtk/gtkmain.h>
#include <gtk/gtksignal.h>
#include "gtkdial.h"
#define SCROLL_DELAY_LENGTH 300
#define DIAL_DEFAULT_SIZE 100
/* Forward declarations */
[ omitted to save space ]
/* Local data */
static GtkWidgetClass *parent_class = NULL;
guint
gtk_dial_get_type ()
{
static guint dial_type = 0;
if (!dial_type)
{
GtkTypeInfo dial_info =
{
"GtkDial",
sizeof (GtkDial),
sizeof (GtkDialClass),
(GtkClassInitFunc) gtk_dial_class_init,
(GtkObjectInitFunc) gtk_dial_init,
(GtkArgSetFunc) NULL,
(GtkArgGetFunc) NULL,
};
dial_type = gtk_type_unique (gtk_widget_get_type (), &amp;dial_info);
}
return dial_type;
}
static void
gtk_dial_class_init (GtkDialClass *class)
{
GtkObjectClass *object_class;
GtkWidgetClass *widget_class;
object_class = (GtkObjectClass*) class;
widget_class = (GtkWidgetClass*) class;
parent_class = gtk_type_class (gtk_widget_get_type ());
object_class->destroy = gtk_dial_destroy;
widget_class->realize = gtk_dial_realize;
widget_class->expose_event = gtk_dial_expose;
widget_class->size_request = gtk_dial_size_request;
widget_class->size_allocate = gtk_dial_size_allocate;
widget_class->button_press_event = gtk_dial_button_press;
widget_class->button_release_event = gtk_dial_button_release;
widget_class->motion_notify_event = gtk_dial_motion_notify;
}
static void
gtk_dial_init (GtkDial *dial)
{
dial->button = 0;
dial->policy = GTK_UPDATE_CONTINUOUS;
dial->timer = 0;
dial->radius = 0;
dial->pointer_width = 0;
dial->angle = 0.0;
dial->old_value = 0.0;
dial->old_lower = 0.0;
dial->old_upper = 0.0;
dial->adjustment = NULL;
}
GtkWidget*
gtk_dial_new (GtkAdjustment *adjustment)
{
GtkDial *dial;
dial = gtk_type_new (gtk_dial_get_type ());
if (!adjustment)
adjustment = (GtkAdjustment*) gtk_adjustment_new (0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0);
gtk_dial_set_adjustment (dial, adjustment);
return GTK_WIDGET (dial);
}
static void
gtk_dial_destroy (GtkObject *object)
{
GtkDial *dial;
g_return_if_fail (object != NULL);
g_return_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (object));
dial = GTK_DIAL (object);
if (dial->adjustment)
gtk_object_unref (GTK_OBJECT (dial->adjustment));
if (GTK_OBJECT_CLASS (parent_class)->destroy)
(* GTK_OBJECT_CLASS (parent_class)->destroy) (object);
}
</verb></tscreen>
Note that this <tt/init()/ function does less than for the Tictactoe
widget, since this is not a composite widget, and the <tt/new()/
function does more, since it now has an argument. Also, note that when
we store a pointer to the Adjustment object, we increment its
reference count, (and correspondingly decrement when we no longer use
it) so that GTK can keep track of when it can be safely destroyed.
<p>
Also, there are a few function to manipulate the widget's options:
<tscreen><verb>
GtkAdjustment*
gtk_dial_get_adjustment (GtkDial *dial)
{
g_return_val_if_fail (dial != NULL, NULL);
g_return_val_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (dial), NULL);
return dial->adjustment;
}
void
gtk_dial_set_update_policy (GtkDial *dial,
GtkUpdateType policy)
{
g_return_if_fail (dial != NULL);
g_return_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (dial));
dial->policy = policy;
}
void
gtk_dial_set_adjustment (GtkDial *dial,
GtkAdjustment *adjustment)
{
g_return_if_fail (dial != NULL);
g_return_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (dial));
if (dial->adjustment)
{
gtk_signal_disconnect_by_data (GTK_OBJECT (dial->adjustment), (gpointer) dial);
gtk_object_unref (GTK_OBJECT (dial->adjustment));
}
dial->adjustment = adjustment;
gtk_object_ref (GTK_OBJECT (dial->adjustment));
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (adjustment), "changed",
(GtkSignalFunc) gtk_dial_adjustment_changed,
(gpointer) dial);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (adjustment), "value_changed",
(GtkSignalFunc) gtk_dial_adjustment_value_changed,
(gpointer) dial);
dial->old_value = adjustment->value;
dial->old_lower = adjustment->lower;
dial->old_upper = adjustment->upper;
gtk_dial_update (dial);
}
</verb></tscreen>
<sect2> <tt/gtk_dial_realize()/
<p>
Now we come to some new types of functions. First, we have a function
that does the work of creating the X window. Notice that a mask is
passed to the function <tt/gdk_window_new()/ which specifies which fields of
the GdkWindowAttr structure actually have data in them (the remaining
fields will be given default values). Also worth noting is the way the
event mask of the widget is created. We call
<tt/gtk_widget_get_events()/ to retrieve the event mask that the user
has specified for this widget (with <tt/gtk_widget_set_events()/, and
add the events that we are interested in ourselves.
<p>
After creating the window, we set its style and background, and put a
pointer to the widget in the user data field of the GdkWindow. This
last step allows GTK to dispatch events for this window to the correct
widget.
<tscreen><verb>
static void
gtk_dial_realize (GtkWidget *widget)
{
GtkDial *dial;
GdkWindowAttr attributes;
gint attributes_mask;
g_return_if_fail (widget != NULL);
g_return_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (widget));
GTK_WIDGET_SET_FLAGS (widget, GTK_REALIZED);
dial = GTK_DIAL (widget);
attributes.x = widget->allocation.x;
attributes.y = widget->allocation.y;
attributes.width = widget->allocation.width;
attributes.height = widget->allocation.height;
attributes.wclass = GDK_INPUT_OUTPUT;
attributes.window_type = GDK_WINDOW_CHILD;
attributes.event_mask = gtk_widget_get_events (widget) |
GDK_EXPOSURE_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK |
GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK |
GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK;
attributes.visual = gtk_widget_get_visual (widget);
attributes.colormap = gtk_widget_get_colormap (widget);
attributes_mask = GDK_WA_X | GDK_WA_Y | GDK_WA_VISUAL | GDK_WA_COLORMAP;
widget->window = gdk_window_new (widget->parent->window, &amp;attributes, attributes_mask);
widget->style = gtk_style_attach (widget->style, widget->window);
gdk_window_set_user_data (widget->window, widget);
gtk_style_set_background (widget->style, widget->window, GTK_STATE_ACTIVE);
}
</verb></tscreen>
<sect2> Size negotiation
<p>
Before the first time that the window containing a widget is
displayed, and whenever the layout of the window changes, GTK asks
each child widget for its desired size. This request is handled by the
function, <tt/gtk_dial_size_request()/. Since our widget isn't a
container widget, and has no real constraints on its size, we just
return a reasonable default value.
<tscreen><verb>
static void
gtk_dial_size_request (GtkWidget *widget,
GtkRequisition *requisition)
{
requisition->width = DIAL_DEFAULT_SIZE;
requisition->height = DIAL_DEFAULT_SIZE;
}
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
After all the widgets have requested an ideal size, the layout of the
window is computed and each child widget is notified of its actual
size. Usually, this will at least as large as the requested size, but
if for instance, the user has resized the window, it may occasionally
be smaller than the requested size. The size notification is handled
by the function <tt/gtk_dial_size_allocate()/. Notice that as well as
computing the sizes of some component pieces for future use, this
routine also does the grunt work of moving the widgets X window into
the new position and size.
<tscreen><verb>
static void
gtk_dial_size_allocate (GtkWidget *widget,
GtkAllocation *allocation)
{
GtkDial *dial;
g_return_if_fail (widget != NULL);
g_return_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (widget));
g_return_if_fail (allocation != NULL);
widget->allocation = *allocation;
if (GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED (widget))
{
dial = GTK_DIAL (widget);
gdk_window_move_resize (widget->window,
allocation->x, allocation->y,
allocation->width, allocation->height);
dial->radius = MAX(allocation->width,allocation->height) * 0.45;
dial->pointer_width = dial->radius / 5;
}
}
</verb></tscreen>.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> <tt/gtk_dial_expose()/
<p>
As mentioned above, all the drawing of this widget is done in the
handler for expose events. There's not much to remark on here except
the use of the function <tt/gtk_draw_polygon/ to draw the pointer with
three dimensional shading according to the colors stored in the
widget's style.
<tscreen><verb>
static gint
gtk_dial_expose (GtkWidget *widget,
GdkEventExpose *event)
{
GtkDial *dial;
GdkPoint points[3];
gdouble s,c;
gdouble theta;
gint xc, yc;
gint tick_length;
gint i;
g_return_val_if_fail (widget != NULL, FALSE);
g_return_val_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (widget), FALSE);
g_return_val_if_fail (event != NULL, FALSE);
if (event->count > 0)
return FALSE;
dial = GTK_DIAL (widget);
gdk_window_clear_area (widget->window,
0, 0,
widget->allocation.width,
widget->allocation.height);
xc = widget->allocation.width/2;
yc = widget->allocation.height/2;
/* Draw ticks */
for (i=0; i<25; i++)
{
theta = (i*M_PI/18. - M_PI/6.);
s = sin(theta);
c = cos(theta);
tick_length = (i%6 == 0) ? dial->pointer_width : dial->pointer_width/2;
gdk_draw_line (widget->window,
widget->style->fg_gc[widget->state],
xc + c*(dial->radius - tick_length),
yc - s*(dial->radius - tick_length),
xc + c*dial->radius,
yc - s*dial->radius);
}
/* Draw pointer */
s = sin(dial->angle);
c = cos(dial->angle);
points[0].x = xc + s*dial->pointer_width/2;
points[0].y = yc + c*dial->pointer_width/2;
points[1].x = xc + c*dial->radius;
points[1].y = yc - s*dial->radius;
points[2].x = xc - s*dial->pointer_width/2;
points[2].y = yc - c*dial->pointer_width/2;
gtk_draw_polygon (widget->style,
widget->window,
GTK_STATE_NORMAL,
GTK_SHADOW_OUT,
points, 3,
TRUE);
return FALSE;
}
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> Event handling
<p>
The rest of the widget's code handles various types of events, and
isn't too different from what would be found in many GTK
applications. Two types of events can occur - either the user can
click on the widget with the mouse and drag to move the pointer, or
the value of the Adjustment object can change due to some external
circumstance.
<p>
When the user clicks on the widget, we check to see if the click was
appropriately near the pointer, and if so, store then button that the
user clicked with in the <tt/button/ field of the widget
structure, and grab all mouse events with a call to
<tt/gtk_grab_add()/. Subsequent motion of the mouse causes the
value of the control to be recomputed (by the function
<tt/gtk_dial_update_mouse/). Depending on the policy that has been
set, "value_changed" events are either generated instantly
(<tt/GTK_UPDATE_CONTINUOUS/), after a delay in a timer added with
<tt/gtk_timeout_add()/ (<tt/GTK_UPDATE_DELAYED/), or only when the
button is released (<tt/GTK_UPDATE_DISCONTINUOUS/).
<tscreen><verb>
static gint
gtk_dial_button_press (GtkWidget *widget,
GdkEventButton *event)
{
GtkDial *dial;
gint dx, dy;
double s, c;
double d_parallel;
double d_perpendicular;
g_return_val_if_fail (widget != NULL, FALSE);
g_return_val_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (widget), FALSE);
g_return_val_if_fail (event != NULL, FALSE);
dial = GTK_DIAL (widget);
/* Determine if button press was within pointer region - we
do this by computing the parallel and perpendicular distance of
the point where the mouse was pressed from the line passing through
the pointer */
dx = event->x - widget->allocation.width / 2;
dy = widget->allocation.height / 2 - event->y;
s = sin(dial->angle);
c = cos(dial->angle);
d_parallel = s*dy + c*dx;
d_perpendicular = fabs(s*dx - c*dy);
if (!dial->button &&
(d_perpendicular < dial->pointer_width/2) &&
(d_parallel > - dial->pointer_width))
{
gtk_grab_add (widget);
dial->button = event->button;
gtk_dial_update_mouse (dial, event->x, event->y);
}
return FALSE;
}
static gint
gtk_dial_button_release (GtkWidget *widget,
GdkEventButton *event)
{
GtkDial *dial;
g_return_val_if_fail (widget != NULL, FALSE);
g_return_val_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (widget), FALSE);
g_return_val_if_fail (event != NULL, FALSE);
dial = GTK_DIAL (widget);
if (dial->button == event->button)
{
gtk_grab_remove (widget);
dial->button = 0;
if (dial->policy == GTK_UPDATE_DELAYED)
gtk_timeout_remove (dial->timer);
if ((dial->policy != GTK_UPDATE_CONTINUOUS) &&
(dial->old_value != dial->adjustment->value))
gtk_signal_emit_by_name (GTK_OBJECT (dial->adjustment), "value_changed");
}
return FALSE;
}
static gint
gtk_dial_motion_notify (GtkWidget *widget,
GdkEventMotion *event)
{
GtkDial *dial;
GdkModifierType mods;
gint x, y, mask;
g_return_val_if_fail (widget != NULL, FALSE);
g_return_val_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (widget), FALSE);
g_return_val_if_fail (event != NULL, FALSE);
dial = GTK_DIAL (widget);
if (dial->button != 0)
{
x = event->x;
y = event->y;
if (event->is_hint || (event->window != widget->window))
gdk_window_get_pointer (widget->window, &amp;x, &amp;y, &amp;mods);
switch (dial->button)
{
case 1:
mask = GDK_BUTTON1_MASK;
break;
case 2:
mask = GDK_BUTTON2_MASK;
break;
case 3:
mask = GDK_BUTTON3_MASK;
break;
default:
mask = 0;
break;
}
if (mods & mask)
gtk_dial_update_mouse (dial, x,y);
}
return FALSE;
}
static gint
gtk_dial_timer (GtkDial *dial)
{
g_return_val_if_fail (dial != NULL, FALSE);
g_return_val_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (dial), FALSE);
if (dial->policy == GTK_UPDATE_DELAYED)
gtk_signal_emit_by_name (GTK_OBJECT (dial->adjustment), "value_changed");
return FALSE;
}
static void
gtk_dial_update_mouse (GtkDial *dial, gint x, gint y)
{
gint xc, yc;
gfloat old_value;
g_return_if_fail (dial != NULL);
g_return_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (dial));
xc = GTK_WIDGET(dial)->allocation.width / 2;
yc = GTK_WIDGET(dial)->allocation.height / 2;
old_value = dial->adjustment->value;
dial->angle = atan2(yc-y, x-xc);
if (dial->angle < -M_PI/2.)
dial->angle += 2*M_PI;
if (dial->angle < -M_PI/6)
dial->angle = -M_PI/6;
if (dial->angle > 7.*M_PI/6.)
dial->angle = 7.*M_PI/6.;
dial->adjustment->value = dial->adjustment->lower + (7.*M_PI/6 - dial->angle) *
(dial->adjustment->upper - dial->adjustment->lower) / (4.*M_PI/3.);
if (dial->adjustment->value != old_value)
{
if (dial->policy == GTK_UPDATE_CONTINUOUS)
{
gtk_signal_emit_by_name (GTK_OBJECT (dial->adjustment), "value_changed");
}
else
{
gtk_widget_draw (GTK_WIDGET(dial), NULL);
if (dial->policy == GTK_UPDATE_DELAYED)
{
if (dial->timer)
gtk_timeout_remove (dial->timer);
dial->timer = gtk_timeout_add (SCROLL_DELAY_LENGTH,
(GtkFunction) gtk_dial_timer,
(gpointer) dial);
}
}
}
}
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
Changes to the Adjustment by external means are communicated to our
widget by the `changed' and `value_changed' signals. The handlers
for these functions call <tt/gtk_dial_update()/ to validate the
arguments, compute the new pointer angle, and redraw the widget (by
calling <tt/gtk_widget_draw()/).
<tscreen><verb>
static void
gtk_dial_update (GtkDial *dial)
{
gfloat new_value;
g_return_if_fail (dial != NULL);
g_return_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (dial));
new_value = dial->adjustment->value;
if (new_value < dial->adjustment->lower)
new_value = dial->adjustment->lower;
if (new_value > dial->adjustment->upper)
new_value = dial->adjustment->upper;
if (new_value != dial->adjustment->value)
{
dial->adjustment->value = new_value;
gtk_signal_emit_by_name (GTK_OBJECT (dial->adjustment), "value_changed");
}
dial->angle = 7.*M_PI/6. - (new_value - dial->adjustment->lower) * 4.*M_PI/3. /
(dial->adjustment->upper - dial->adjustment->lower);
gtk_widget_draw (GTK_WIDGET(dial), NULL);
}
static void
gtk_dial_adjustment_changed (GtkAdjustment *adjustment,
gpointer data)
{
GtkDial *dial;
g_return_if_fail (adjustment != NULL);
g_return_if_fail (data != NULL);
dial = GTK_DIAL (data);
if ((dial->old_value != adjustment->value) ||
(dial->old_lower != adjustment->lower) ||
(dial->old_upper != adjustment->upper))
{
gtk_dial_update (dial);
dial->old_value = adjustment->value;
dial->old_lower = adjustment->lower;
dial->old_upper = adjustment->upper;
}
}
static void
gtk_dial_adjustment_value_changed (GtkAdjustment *adjustment,
gpointer data)
{
GtkDial *dial;
g_return_if_fail (adjustment != NULL);
g_return_if_fail (data != NULL);
dial = GTK_DIAL (data);
if (dial->old_value != adjustment->value)
{
gtk_dial_update (dial);
dial->old_value = adjustment->value;
}
}
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> Possible Enhancements
<p>
The Dial widget as we've described it so far runs about 670 lines of
code. Although that might sound like a fair bit, we've really
accomplished quite a bit with that much code, especially since much of
that length is headers and boilerplate. However, there are quite a few
more enhancements that could be made to this widget:
<itemize>
<item> If you try this widget out, you'll find that there is some
flashing as the pointer is dragged around. This is because the entire
widget is erased every time the pointer is moved before being
redrawn. Often, the best way to handle this problem is to draw to an
offscreen pixmap, then copy the final results onto the screen in one
step. (The ProgressBar widget draws itself in this fashion.)
<item> The user should be able to use the up and down arrow keys to
increase and decrease the value.
<item> It would be nice if the widget had buttons to increase and
decrease the value in small or large steps. Although it would be
possible to use embedded Button widgets for this, we would also like
the buttons to auto-repeat when held down, as the arrows on a
scrollbar do. Most of the code to implement this type of behavior can
be found in the GtkRange widget.
<item> The Dial widget could be made into a container widget with a
single child widget positioned at the bottom between the buttons
mentioned above. The user could then add their choice of a label or
entry widget to display the current value of the dial.
</itemize>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Learning More
<p>
Only a small part of the many details involved in creating widgets
could be described above. If you want to write your own widgets, the
best source of examples is the GTK source itself. Ask yourself some
questions about the widget you want to write: is it a Container
widget? does it have its own window? is it a modification of an
existing widget? Then find a similar widget, and start making changes.
Good luck!
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>Scribble, A Simple Example Drawing Program
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Overview
<p>
In this section, we will build a simple drawing program. In the
process, we will examine how to handle mouse events, how to draw in a
window, and how to do drawing better by using a backing pixmap. After
creating the simple drawing program, we will extend it by adding
support for XInput devices, such as drawing tablets. GTK provides
support routines which makes getting extended information, such as
pressure and tilt, from such devices quite easy.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Event Handling
<p>
The GTK signals we have already discussed are for high-level actions,
such as a menu item being selected. However, sometimes it is useful to
learn about lower-level occurrences, such as the mouse being moved, or
a key being pressed. There are also GTK signals corresponding to these
low-level <em>events</em>. The handlers for these signals have an
extra parameter which is a pointer to a structure containing
information about the event. For instance, motion events handlers are
passed a pointer to a GdkEventMotion structure which looks (in part)
like:
<tscreen><verb>
struct _GdkEventMotion
{
GdkEventType type;
GdkWindow *window;
guint32 time;
gdouble x;
gdouble y;
...
guint state;
...
};
</verb></tscreen>
<tt/type/ will be set to the event type, in this case
<tt/GDK_MOTION_NOTIFY/, window is the window in which the event
occurred. <tt/x/ and <tt/y/ give the coordinates of the event,
and <tt/state/ specifies the modifier state when the event
occurred (that is, it specifies which modifier keys and mouse buttons
were pressed.) It is the bitwise OR of some of the following:
<tscreen><verb>
GDK_SHIFT_MASK
GDK_LOCK_MASK
GDK_CONTROL_MASK
GDK_MOD1_MASK
GDK_MOD2_MASK
GDK_MOD3_MASK
GDK_MOD4_MASK
GDK_MOD5_MASK
GDK_BUTTON1_MASK
GDK_BUTTON2_MASK
GDK_BUTTON3_MASK
GDK_BUTTON4_MASK
GDK_BUTTON5_MASK
</verb></tscreen>
<p>
As for other signals, to determine what happens when an event occurs
we call <tt>gtk_signal_connect()</tt>. But we also need let GTK
know which events we want to be notified about. To do this, we call
the function:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_widget_set_events (GtkWidget *widget,
gint events);
</verb></tscreen>
The second field specifies the events we are interested in. It
is the bitwise OR of constants that specify different types
of events. For future reference the event types are:
<tscreen><verb>
GDK_EXPOSURE_MASK
GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK
GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK
GDK_BUTTON_MOTION_MASK
GDK_BUTTON1_MOTION_MASK
GDK_BUTTON2_MOTION_MASK
GDK_BUTTON3_MOTION_MASK
GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK
GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK
GDK_KEY_PRESS_MASK
GDK_KEY_RELEASE_MASK
GDK_ENTER_NOTIFY_MASK
GDK_LEAVE_NOTIFY_MASK
GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE_MASK
GDK_STRUCTURE_MASK
GDK_PROPERTY_CHANGE_MASK
GDK_PROXIMITY_IN_MASK
GDK_PROXIMITY_OUT_MASK
</verb></tscreen>
There are a few subtle points that have to be observed when calling
<tt/gtk_widget_set_events()/. First, it must be called before the X window
for a GTK widget is created. In practical terms, this means you
should call it immediately after creating the widget. Second, the
widget must have an associated X window. For efficiency, many widget
types do not have their own window, but draw in their parent's window.
These widgets are:
<tscreen><verb>
GtkAlignment
GtkArrow
GtkBin
GtkBox
GtkImage
GtkItem
GtkLabel
GtkPixmap
GtkScrolledWindow
GtkSeparator
GtkTable
GtkAspectFrame
GtkFrame
GtkVBox
GtkHBox
GtkVSeparator
GtkHSeparator
</verb></tscreen>
To capture events for these widgets, you need to use an EventBox
widget. See the section on
<ref id="sec_The_EventBox_Widget" name="The EventBox Widget"> for
details.
<p>
For our drawing program, we want to know when the mouse button is
pressed and when the mouse is moved, so we specify
<tt/GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK/ and <tt/GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK/. We also
want to know when we need to redraw our window, so we specify
<tt/GDK_EXPOSURE_MASK/. Although we want to be notified via a
Configure event when our window size changes, we don't have to specify
the corresponding <tt/GDK_STRUCTURE_MASK/ flag, because it is
automatically specified for all windows.
<p>
It turns out, however, that there is a problem with just specifying
<tt/GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK/. This will cause the server to add a new
motion event to the event queue every time the user moves the mouse.
Imagine that it takes us 0.1 seconds to handle a motion event, but the
X server queues a new motion event every 0.05 seconds. We will soon
get way behind the users drawing. If the user draws for 5 seconds,
it will take us another 5 seconds to catch up after they release
the mouse button! What we would like is to only get one motion
event for each event we process. The way to do this is to
specify <tt/GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK/.
<p>
When we specify <tt/GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK/, the server sends
us a motion event the first time the pointer moves after entering
our window, or after a button press or release event. Subsequent
motion events will be suppressed until we explicitly ask for
the position of the pointer using the function:
<tscreen><verb>
GdkWindow* gdk_window_get_pointer (GdkWindow *window,
gint *x,
gint *y,
GdkModifierType *mask);
</verb></tscreen>
(There is another function, <tt>gtk_widget_get_pointer()</tt> which
has a simpler interface, but turns out not to be very useful, since
it only retrieves the position of the mouse, not whether the buttons
are pressed.)
<p>
The code to set the events for our window then looks like:
<tscreen><verb>
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (drawing_area), "expose_event",
(GtkSignalFunc) expose_event, NULL);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(drawing_area),"configure_event",
(GtkSignalFunc) configure_event, NULL);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (drawing_area), "motion_notify_event",
(GtkSignalFunc) motion_notify_event, NULL);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (drawing_area), "button_press_event",
(GtkSignalFunc) button_press_event, NULL);
gtk_widget_set_events (drawing_area, GDK_EXPOSURE_MASK
| GDK_LEAVE_NOTIFY_MASK
| GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK
| GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK
| GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK);
</verb></tscreen>
We'll save the "expose_event" and "configure_event" handlers for
later. The "motion_notify_event" and "button_press_event" handlers
pretty simple:
<tscreen><verb>
static gint
button_press_event (GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventButton *event)
{
if (event->button == 1 &amp;&amp; pixmap != NULL)
draw_brush (widget, event->x, event->y);
return TRUE;
}
static gint
motion_notify_event (GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventMotion *event)
{
int x, y;
GdkModifierType state;
if (event->is_hint)
gdk_window_get_pointer (event->window, &amp;x, &amp;y, &amp;state);
else
{
x = event->x;
y = event->y;
state = event->state;
}
if (state &amp; GDK_BUTTON1_MASK &amp;&amp; pixmap != NULL)
draw_brush (widget, x, y);
return TRUE;
}
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> The DrawingArea Widget, And Drawing
<p>
We know turn to the process of drawing on the screen. The
widget we use for this is the DrawingArea widget. A drawing area
widget is essentially an X window and nothing more. It is a blank
canvas in which we can draw whatever we like. A drawing area
is created using the call:
<tscreen><verb>
GtkWidget* gtk_drawing_area_new (void);
</verb></tscreen>
A default size for the widget can be specified by calling:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_drawing_area_size (GtkDrawingArea *darea,
gint width,
gint height);
</verb></tscreen>
This default size can be overridden, as is true for all widgets,
by calling <tt>gtk_widget_set_usize()</tt>, and that, in turn, can
be overridden if the user manually resizes the the window containing
the drawing area.
<p>
It should be noted that when we create a DrawingArea widget, we are,
<em>completely</em> responsible for drawing the contents. If our
window is obscured then uncovered, we get an exposure event and must
redraw what was previously hidden.
<p>
Having to remember everything that was drawn on the screen so we
can properly redraw it can, to say the least, be a nuisance. In
addition, it can be visually distracting if portions of the
window are cleared, then redrawn step by step. The solution to
this problem is to use an offscreen <em>backing pixmap</em>.
Instead of drawing directly to the screen, we draw to an image
stored in server memory but not displayed, then when the image
changes or new portions of the image are displayed, we copy the
relevant portions onto the screen.
<p>
To create an offscreen pixmap, we call the function:
<tscreen><verb>
GdkPixmap* gdk_pixmap_new (GdkWindow *window,
gint width,
gint height,
gint depth);
</verb></tscreen>
The <tt>window</tt> parameter specifies a GDK window that this pixmap
takes some of its properties from. <tt>width</tt> and <tt>height</tt>
specify the size of the pixmap. <tt>depth</tt> specifies the <em>color
depth</em>, that is the number of bits per pixel, for the new window.
If the depth is specified as <tt>-1</tt>, it will match the depth
of <tt>window</tt>.
<p>
We create the pixmap in our "configure_event" handler. This event
is generated whenever the window changes size, including when it
is originally created.
<tscreen><verb>
/* Backing pixmap for drawing area */
static GdkPixmap *pixmap = NULL;
/* Create a new backing pixmap of the appropriate size */
static gint
configure_event (GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventConfigure *event)
{
if (pixmap)
gdk_pixmap_unref(pixmap);
pixmap = gdk_pixmap_new(widget->window,
widget->allocation.width,
widget->allocation.height,
-1);
gdk_draw_rectangle (pixmap,
widget->style->white_gc,
TRUE,
0, 0,
widget->allocation.width,
widget->allocation.height);
return TRUE;
}
</verb></tscreen>
The call to <tt>gdk_draw_rectangle()</tt> clears the pixmap
initially to white. We'll say more about that in a moment.
<p>
Our exposure event handler then simply copies the relevant portion
of the pixmap onto the screen (we determine the area we need
to redraw by using the event->area field of the exposure event):
<tscreen><verb>
/* Redraw the screen from the backing pixmap */
static gint
expose_event (GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventExpose *event)
{
gdk_draw_pixmap(widget->window,
widget->style->fg_gc[GTK_WIDGET_STATE (widget)],
pixmap,
event->area.x, event->area.y,
event->area.x, event->area.y,
event->area.width, event->area.height);
return FALSE;
}
</verb></tscreen>
We've now seen how to keep the screen up to date with our pixmap, but
how do we actually draw interesting stuff on our pixmap? There are a
large number of calls in GTK's GDK library for drawing on
<em>drawables</em>. A drawable is simply something that can be drawn
upon. It can be a window, a pixmap, or a bitmap (a black and white
image). We've already seen two such calls above,
<tt>gdk_draw_rectangle()</tt> and <tt>gdk_draw_pixmap()</tt>. The
complete list is:
<tscreen><verb>
gdk_draw_line ()
gdk_draw_rectangle ()
gdk_draw_arc ()
gdk_draw_polygon ()
gdk_draw_string ()
gdk_draw_text ()
gdk_draw_pixmap ()
gdk_draw_bitmap ()
gdk_draw_image ()
gdk_draw_points ()
gdk_draw_segments ()
</verb></tscreen>
See the reference documentation or the header file
<tt>&lt;gdk/gdk.h&gt;</tt> for further details on these functions.
These functions all share the same first two arguments. The first
argument is the drawable to draw upon, the second argument is a
<em>graphics context</em> (GC).
<p>
A graphics context encapsulates information about things such as
foreground and background color and line width. GDK has a full set of
functions for creating and modifying graphics contexts, but to keep
things simple we'll just use predefined graphics contexts. Each widget
has an associated style. (Which can be modified in a gtkrc file, see
the section GTK's rc file.) This, among other things, stores a number
of graphics contexts. Some examples of accessing these graphics
contexts are:
<tscreen><verb>
widget->style->white_gc
widget->style->black_gc
widget->style->fg_gc[GTK_STATE_NORMAL]
widget->style->bg_gc[GTK_WIDGET_STATE(widget)]
</verb></tscreen>
The fields <tt>fg_gc</tt>, <tt>bg_gc</tt>, <tt>dark_gc</tt>, and
<tt>light_gc</tt> are indexed by a parameter of type
<tt>GtkStateType</tt> which can take on the values:
<tscreen><verb>
GTK_STATE_NORMAL,
GTK_STATE_ACTIVE,
GTK_STATE_PRELIGHT,
GTK_STATE_SELECTED,
GTK_STATE_INSENSITIVE
</verb></tscreen>
For instance, the for <tt/GTK_STATE_SELECTED/ the default foreground
color is white and the default background color, dark blue.
<p>
Our function <tt>draw_brush()</tt>, which does the actual drawing
on the screen, is then:
<tscreen><verb>
/* Draw a rectangle on the screen */
static void
draw_brush (GtkWidget *widget, gdouble x, gdouble y)
{
GdkRectangle update_rect;
update_rect.x = x - 5;
update_rect.y = y - 5;
update_rect.width = 10;
update_rect.height = 10;
gdk_draw_rectangle (pixmap,
widget->style->black_gc,
TRUE,
update_rect.x, update_rect.y,
update_rect.width, update_rect.height);
gtk_widget_draw (widget, &amp;update_rect);
}
</verb></tscreen>
After we draw the rectangle representing the brush onto the pixmap,
we call the function:
<tscreen><verb>
void gtk_widget_draw (GtkWidget *widget,
GdkRectangle *area);
</verb></tscreen>
which notifies X that the area given by the <tt>area</tt> parameter
needs to be updated. X will eventually generate an expose event
(possibly combining the areas passed in several calls to
<tt>gtk_widget_draw()</tt>) which will cause our expose event handler
to copy the relevant portions to the screen.
<p>
We have now covered the entire drawing program except for a few
mundane details like creating the main window. The complete
source code is available from the location from which you got
this tutorial, or from:
<htmlurl url="http://www.gtk.org/~otaylor/gtk/tutorial/"
name="http://www.gtk.org/~otaylor/gtk/tutorial/">
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Adding XInput support
<p>
It is now possible to buy quite inexpensive input devices such
as drawing tablets, which allow drawing with a much greater
ease of artistic expression than does a mouse. The simplest way
to use such devices is simply as a replacement for the mouse,
but that misses out many of the advantages of these devices,
such as:
<itemize>
<item> Pressure sensitivity
<item> Tilt reporting
<item> Sub-pixel positioning
<item> Multiple inputs (for example, a stylus with a point and eraser)
</itemize>
For information about the XInput extension, see the <htmlurl
url="http://www.msc.cornell.edu/~otaylor/xinput/XInput-HOWTO.html"
name="XInput-HOWTO">.
<p>
If we examine the full definition of, for example, the GdkEventMotion
structure, we see that it has fields to support extended device
information.
<tscreen><verb>
struct _GdkEventMotion
{
GdkEventType type;
GdkWindow *window;
guint32 time;
gdouble x;
gdouble y;
gdouble pressure;
gdouble xtilt;
gdouble ytilt;
guint state;
gint16 is_hint;
GdkInputSource source;
guint32 deviceid;
};
</verb></tscreen>
<tt/pressure/ gives the pressure as a floating point number between
0 and 1. <tt/xtilt/ and <tt/ytilt/ can take on values between
-1 and 1, corresponding to the degree of tilt in each direction.
<tt/source/ and <tt/deviceid/ specify the device for which the
event occurred in two different ways. <tt/source/ gives some simple
information about the type of device. It can take the enumeration
values.
<tscreen><verb>
GDK_SOURCE_MOUSE
GDK_SOURCE_PEN
GDK_SOURCE_ERASER
GDK_SOURCE_CURSOR
</verb></tscreen>
<tt/deviceid/ specifies a unique numeric ID for the device. This can
be used to find out further information about the device using the
<tt/gdk_input_list_devices()/ call (see below). The special value
<tt/GDK_CORE_POINTER/ is used for the core pointer device. (Usually
the mouse.)
<sect2> Enabling extended device information
<p>
To let GTK know about our interest in the extended device information,
we merely have to add a single line to our program:
<tscreen><verb>
gtk_widget_set_extension_events (drawing_area, GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_CURSOR);
</verb></tscreen>
By giving the value <tt/GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_CURSOR/ we say that
we are interested in extension events, but only if we don't have
to draw our own cursor. See the section <ref
id="sec_Further_Sophistications" name="Further Sophistications"> below
for more information about drawing the cursor. We could also
give the values <tt/GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_ALL/ if we were willing
to draw our own cursor, or <tt/GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_NONE/ to revert
back to the default condition.
<p>
This is not completely the end of the story however. By default,
no extension devices are enabled. We need a mechanism to allow
users to enable and configure their extension devices. GTK provides
the InputDialog widget to automate this process. The following
procedure manages an InputDialog widget. It creates the dialog if
it isn't present, and raises it to the top otherwise.
<tscreen><verb>
void
input_dialog_destroy (GtkWidget *w, gpointer data)
{
*((GtkWidget **)data) = NULL;
}
void
create_input_dialog ()
{
static GtkWidget *inputd = NULL;
if (!inputd)
{
inputd = gtk_input_dialog_new();
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(inputd), "destroy",
(GtkSignalFunc)input_dialog_destroy, &amp;inputd);
gtk_signal_connect_object (GTK_OBJECT(GTK_INPUT_DIALOG(inputd)->close_button),
"clicked",
(GtkSignalFunc)gtk_widget_hide,
GTK_OBJECT(inputd));
gtk_widget_hide ( GTK_INPUT_DIALOG(inputd)->save_button);
gtk_widget_show (inputd);
}
else
{
if (!GTK_WIDGET_MAPPED(inputd))
gtk_widget_show(inputd);
else
gdk_window_raise(inputd->window);
}
}
</verb></tscreen>
(You might want to take note of the way we handle this dialog. By
connecting to the "destroy" signal, we make sure that we don't keep a
pointer to dialog around after it is destroyed - that could lead to a
segfault.)
<p>
The InputDialog has two buttons "Close" and "Save", which by default
have no actions assigned to them. In the above function we make
"Close" hide the dialog, hide the "Save" button, since we don't
implement saving of XInput options in this program.
<sect2> Using extended device information
<p>
Once we've enabled the device, we can just use the extended
device information in the extra fields of the event structures.
In fact, it is always safe to use this information since these
fields will have reasonable default values even when extended
events are not enabled.
<p>
Once change we do have to make is to call
<tt/gdk_input_window_get_pointer()/ instead of
<tt/gdk_window_get_pointer/. This is necessary because
<tt/gdk_window_get_pointer/ doesn't return the extended device
information.
<tscreen><verb>
void gdk_input_window_get_pointer (GdkWindow *window,
guint32 deviceid,
gdouble *x,
gdouble *y,
gdouble *pressure,
gdouble *xtilt,
gdouble *ytilt,
GdkModifierType *mask);
</verb></tscreen>
When calling this function, we need to specify the device ID as
well as the window. Usually, we'll get the device ID from the
<tt/deviceid/ field of an event structure. Again, this function
will return reasonable values when extension events are not
enabled. (In this case, <tt/event->deviceid/ will have the value
<tt/GDK_CORE_POINTER/).
So the basic structure of our button-press and motion event handlers,
doesn't change much - we just need to add code to deal with the
extended information.
<tscreen><verb>
static gint
button_press_event (GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventButton *event)
{
print_button_press (event->deviceid);
if (event->button == 1 &amp;&amp; pixmap != NULL)
draw_brush (widget, event->source, event->x, event->y, event->pressure);
return TRUE;
}
static gint
motion_notify_event (GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventMotion *event)
{
gdouble x, y;
gdouble pressure;
GdkModifierType state;
if (event->is_hint)
gdk_input_window_get_pointer (event->window, event->deviceid,
&amp;x, &amp;y, &amp;pressure, NULL, NULL, &amp;state);
else
{
x = event->x;
y = event->y;
pressure = event->pressure;
state = event->state;
}
if (state &amp; GDK_BUTTON1_MASK &amp;&amp; pixmap != NULL)
draw_brush (widget, event->source, x, y, pressure);
return TRUE;
}
</verb></tscreen>
We also need to do something with the new information. Our new
<tt/draw_brush()/ function draws with a different color for
each <tt/event->source/ and changes the brush size depending
on the pressure.
<tscreen><verb>
/* Draw a rectangle on the screen, size depending on pressure,
and color on the type of device */
static void
draw_brush (GtkWidget *widget, GdkInputSource source,
gdouble x, gdouble y, gdouble pressure)
{
GdkGC *gc;
GdkRectangle update_rect;
switch (source)
{
case GDK_SOURCE_MOUSE:
gc = widget->style->dark_gc[GTK_WIDGET_STATE (widget)];
break;
case GDK_SOURCE_PEN:
gc = widget->style->black_gc;
break;
case GDK_SOURCE_ERASER:
gc = widget->style->white_gc;
break;
default:
gc = widget->style->light_gc[GTK_WIDGET_STATE (widget)];
}
update_rect.x = x - 10 * pressure;
update_rect.y = y - 10 * pressure;
update_rect.width = 20 * pressure;
update_rect.height = 20 * pressure;
gdk_draw_rectangle (pixmap, gc, TRUE,
update_rect.x, update_rect.y,
update_rect.width, update_rect.height);
gtk_widget_draw (widget, &amp;update_rect);
}
</verb></tscreen>
<sect2> Finding out more about a device
<p>
As an example of how to find out more about a device, our program
will print the name of the device that generates each button
press. To find out the name of a device, we call the function:
<tscreen><verb>
GList *gdk_input_list_devices (void);
</verb></tscreen>
which returns a GList (a linked list type from the glib library)
of GdkDeviceInfo structures. The GdkDeviceInfo structure is defined
as:
<tscreen><verb>
struct _GdkDeviceInfo
{
guint32 deviceid;
gchar *name;
GdkInputSource source;
GdkInputMode mode;
gint has_cursor;
gint num_axes;
GdkAxisUse *axes;
gint num_keys;
GdkDeviceKey *keys;
};
</verb></tscreen>
Most of these fields are configuration information that you
can ignore unless you are implemented XInput configuration
saving. The we are interested in here is <tt/name/ which is
simply the name that X assigns to the device. The other field
that isn't configuration information is <tt/has_cursor/. If
<tt/has_cursor/ is false, then we we need to draw our own
cursor. But since we've specified <tt/GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_CURSOR/,
we don't have to worry about this.
<p>
Our <tt/print_button_press()/ function simply iterates through
the returned list until it finds a match, then prints out
the name of the device.
<tscreen><verb>
static void
print_button_press (guint32 deviceid)
{
GList *tmp_list;
/* gdk_input_list_devices returns an internal list, so we shouldn't
free it afterwards */
tmp_list = gdk_input_list_devices();
while (tmp_list)
{
GdkDeviceInfo *info = (GdkDeviceInfo *)tmp_list->data;
if (info->deviceid == deviceid)
{
printf("Button press on device '%s'\n", info->name);
return;
}
tmp_list = tmp_list->next;
}
}
</verb></tscreen>
That completes the changes to `XInputize' our program. As with
the first version, the complete source is available at the location
from which you got this tutorial, or from:
<htmlurl url="http://www.gtk.org/~otaylor/gtk/tutorial/"
name="http://www.gtk.org/~otaylor/gtk/tutorial/">
<sect2> Further sophistications <label id="sec_Further_Sophistications">
<p>
Although our program now supports XInput quite well, it lacks some
features we would want in a full-featured application. First, the user
probably doesn't want to have to configure their device each time they
run the program, so we should allow them to save the device
configuration. This is done by iterating through the return of
<tt/gdk_input_list_devices()/ and writing out the configuration to a
file.
<p>
To restore the state next time the program is run, GDK provides
functions to change device configuration:
<tscreen><verb>
gdk_input_set_extension_events()
gdk_input_set_source()
gdk_input_set_mode()
gdk_input_set_axes()
gdk_input_set_key()
</verb></tscreen>
(The list returned from <tt/gdk_input_list_devices()/ should not be
modified directly.) An example of doing this can be found in the
drawing program gsumi. (Available from <htmlurl
url="http://www.msc.cornell.edu/~otaylor/gsumi/"
name="http://www.msc.cornell.edu/~otaylor/gsumi/">) Eventually, it
would be nice to have a standard way of doing this for all
applications. This probably belongs at a slightly higher level than
GTK, perhaps in the GNOME library.
<p>
Another major omission that we have mentioned above is the lack of
cursor drawing. Platforms other than XFree86 currently do not allow
simultaneously using a device as both the core pointer and directly by
an application. See the <url
url="http://www.msc.cornell.edu/~otaylor/xinput/XInput-HOWTO.html"
name="XInput-HOWTO"> for more information about this. This means that
applications that want to support the widest audience need to draw
their own cursor.
<p>
An application that draws its own cursor needs to do two things:
determine if the current device needs a cursor drawn or not, and
determine if the current device is in proximity. (If the current
device is a drawing tablet, it's a nice touch to make the cursor
disappear when the stylus is lifted from the tablet. When the
device is touching the stylus, that is called "in proximity.")
The first is done by searching the device list, as we did
to find out the device name. The second is achieved by selecting
"proximity_out" events. An example of drawing one's own cursor is
found in the 'testinput' program found in the GTK distribution.
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>Tips For Writing GTK Applications
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<p>
This section is simply a gathering of wisdom, general style guidelines and hints to
creating good GTK applications. It is totally useless right now cause its
only a topic sentence :)
Use GNU autoconf and automake! They are your friends :) I am planning to
make a quick intro on them here.
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>Contributing <label id="sec_Contributing">
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<p>
This document, like so much other great software out there, was created for
free by volunteers. If you are at all knowledgeable about any aspect of GTK
that does not already have documentation, please consider contributing to
this document.
<p>
If you do decide to contribute, please mail your text to Tony Gale,
<tt><htmlurl url="mailto:gale@gtk.org"
name="gale@gtk.org"></tt>. Also, be aware that the entirety of this
document is free, and any addition by yourself must also be free. That is,
people may use any portion of your examples in their programs, and copies
of this document may be distributed at will etc.
<p>
Thank you.
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect>Credits
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<p>
I would like to thank the following for their contributions to this text.
<itemize>
<item>Bawer Dagdeviren, <tt><htmlurl url="mailto:chamele0n@geocities.com"
name="chamele0n@geocities.com"></tt> for the menus tutorial.
<item>Raph Levien, <tt><htmlurl url="mailto:raph@acm.org"
name="raph@acm.org"></tt>
for hello world ala GTK, widget packing, and general all around wisdom.
He's also generously donated a home for this tutorial.
<item>Peter Mattis, <tt><htmlurl url="mailto:petm@xcf.berkeley.edu"
name="petm@xcf.berkeley.edu"></tt> for the simplest GTK program..
and the ability to make it :)
<item>Werner Koch <tt><htmlurl url="mailto:werner.koch@guug.de"
name="werner.koch@guug.de"></tt> for converting the original plain text to
SGML, and the widget class hierarchy.
<item>Mark Crichton <tt><htmlurl url="mailto:crichton@expert.cc.purdue.edu"
name="crichton@expert.cc.purdue.edu"></tt> for the menu factory code, and
the table packing tutorial.
<item>Owen Taylor <tt><htmlurl url="mailto:owt1@cornell.edu"
name="owt1@cornell.edu"></tt> for the EventBox widget section (and
the patch to the distro). He's also responsible for the selections code and
tutorial, as well as the sections on writing your own GTK widgets, and the
example application. Thanks a lot Owen for all you help!
<item>Mark VanderBoom <tt><htmlurl url="mailto:mvboom42@calvin.edu"
name="mvboom42@calvin.edu"></tt> for his wonderful work on the Notebook,
Progress Bar, Dialogs, and File selection widgets. Thanks a lot Mark!
You've been a great help.
<item>Tim Janik <tt><htmlurl url="mailto:timj@psynet.net"
name="timj@psynet.net"></tt> for his great job on the Lists Widget.
Thanks Tim :)
<item>Rajat Datta <tt><htmlurl url="mailto:rajat@ix.netcom.com"
name="rajat@ix.netcom.com"</tt> for the excellent job on the Pixmap tutorial.
<item>Michael K. Johnson <tt><htmlurl url="mailto:johnsonm@redhat.com"
name="johnsonm@redhat.com"></tt> for info and code for popup menus.
<item>David Huggins-Daines <tt><htmlurl url="mailto:bn711@freenet.carleton.ca"
name="bn711@freenet.carleton.ca"></tt> for the Range Widgets and Tree Widget
sections.
<item>Stefan Mars <tt><htmlurl url="mailto:mars@lysator.liu.se"
name="mars@lysator.liu.se"></tt> for the GtkCList section
</itemize>
<p>
And to all of you who commented and helped refine this document.
<p>
Thanks.
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect> Tutorial Copyright and Permissions Notice
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<p>
The GTK Tutorial is Copyright (C) 1997 Ian Main.
Copyright (C) 1998 Tony Gale.
<p>
Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
preserved on all copies.
<P>Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of
this document under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that
this copyright notice is included exactly as in the original,
and that the entire resulting derived work is distributed under
the terms of a permission notice identical to this one.
<P>Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
document into another language, under the above conditions for modified
versions.
<P>If you are intending to incorporate this document into a published
work, please contact the maintainer, and we will make an effort
to ensure that you have the most up to date information available.
<P>There is no guarantee that this document lives up to its intended
purpose. This is simply provided as a free resource. As such,
the authors and maintainers of the information provided within can
not make any guarantee that the information is even accurate.
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<appendix>
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect> GDK Event Types<label id="sec_GDK_Event_Types">
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<p>
The follwing data types are passed into event handlers by GTK+. For
each data type listed, the signals that use this data type are listed.
<itemize>
<item> GdkEvent
<itemize>
<item>drag_end_event
</itemize>
<item> GdkEventType
<item> GdkEventAny
<itemize>
<item>delete_event
<item>destroy_event
<item>map_event
<item>unmap_event
<item>no_expose_event
</itemize>
<item> GdkEventExpose
<itemize>
<item>expose_event
</itemize>
<item> GdkEventNoExpose
<item> GdkEventVisibility
<item> GdkEventMotion
<itemize>
<item>motion_notify_event
</itemize>
<item> GdkEventButton
<itemize>
<item>button_press_event
<item>button_release_event
</itemize>
<item> GdkEventKey
<itemize>
<item>key_press_event
<item>key_release_event
</itemize>
<item> GdkEventCrossing
<itemize>
<item>enter_notify_event
<item>leave_notify_event
</itemize>
<item> GdkEventFocus
<itemize>
<item>focus_in_event
<item>focus_out_event
</itemize>
<item> GdkEventConfigure
<itemize>
<item>configure_event
</itemize>
<item> GdkEventProperty
<itemize>
<item>property_notify_event
</itemize>
<item> GdkEventSelection
<itemize>
<item>selection_clear_event
<item>selection_request_event
<item>selection_notify_event
</itemize>
<item> GdkEventProximity
<itemize>
<item>proximity_in_event
<item>proximity_out_event
</itemize>
<item> GdkEventDragBegin
<itemize>
<item>drag_begin_event
</itemize>
<item> GdkEventDragRequest
<itemize>
<item>drag_request_event
</itemize>
<item> GdkEventDropEnter
<itemize>
<item>drop_enter_event
</itemize>
<item> GdkEventDropLeave
<itemize>
<item>drop_leave_event
</itemize>
<item> GdkEventDropDataAvailable
<itemize>
<item>drop_data_available_event
</itemize>
<item> GdkEventClient
<itemize>
<item>client_event
</itemize>
<item> GdkEventOther
<itemize>
<item>other_event
</itemize>
</itemize>
The data type <tt/GdkEventType/ is a special data type that is used by
all the other data types as an indicator of the data type being passed
to the signal handler. As you will see below, each of the event data
structures has a member of this type. It is defined as an enumeration
type as follows:
<tscreen><verb>
typedef enum
{
GDK_NOTHING = -1,
GDK_DELETE = 0,
GDK_DESTROY = 1,
GDK_EXPOSE = 2,
GDK_MOTION_NOTIFY = 3,
GDK_BUTTON_PRESS = 4,
GDK_2BUTTON_PRESS = 5,
GDK_3BUTTON_PRESS = 6,
GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE = 7,
GDK_KEY_PRESS = 8,
GDK_KEY_RELEASE = 9,
GDK_ENTER_NOTIFY = 10,
GDK_LEAVE_NOTIFY = 11,
GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE = 12,
GDK_CONFIGURE = 13,
GDK_MAP = 14,
GDK_UNMAP = 15,
GDK_PROPERTY_NOTIFY = 16,
GDK_SELECTION_CLEAR = 17,
GDK_SELECTION_REQUEST = 18,
GDK_SELECTION_NOTIFY = 19,
GDK_PROXIMITY_IN = 20,
GDK_PROXIMITY_OUT = 21,
GDK_DRAG_BEGIN = 22,
GDK_DRAG_REQUEST = 23,
GDK_DROP_ENTER = 24,
GDK_DROP_LEAVE = 25,
GDK_DROP_DATA_AVAIL = 26,
GDK_CLIENT_EVENT = 27,
GDK_VISIBILITY_NOTIFY = 28,
GDK_NO_EXPOSE = 29,
GDK_OTHER_EVENT = 9999 /* Deprecated, use filters instead */
} GdkEventType;
</verb></tscreen>
The other event type that is different from the others is
<tt/GdkEvent/ itself. This is a union of all the other
data types, which allows it to be cast to a specific
event data type within a signal handler.
<!-- Just a big list for now, needs expanding upon - TRG -->
So, the event data types are defined as follows:
<tscreen><verb>
struct _GdkEventAny
{
GdkEventType type;
GdkWindow *window;
gint8 send_event;
};
struct _GdkEventExpose
{
GdkEventType type;
GdkWindow *window;
gint8 send_event;
GdkRectangle area;
gint count; /* If non-zero, how many more events follow. */
};
struct _GdkEventNoExpose
{
GdkEventType type;
GdkWindow *window;
gint8 send_event;
/* XXX: does anyone need the X major_code or minor_code fields? */
};
struct _GdkEventVisibility
{
GdkEventType type;
GdkWindow *window;
gint8 send_event;
GdkVisibilityState state;
};
struct _GdkEventMotion
{
GdkEventType type;
GdkWindow *window;
gint8 send_event;
guint32 time;
gdouble x;
gdouble y;
gdouble pressure;
gdouble xtilt;
gdouble ytilt;
guint state;
gint16 is_hint;
GdkInputSource source;
guint32 deviceid;
gdouble x_root, y_root;
};
struct _GdkEventButton
{
GdkEventType type;
GdkWindow *window;
gint8 send_event;
guint32 time;
gdouble x;
gdouble y;
gdouble pressure;
gdouble xtilt;
gdouble ytilt;
guint state;
guint button;
GdkInputSource source;
guint32 deviceid;
gdouble x_root, y_root;
};
struct _GdkEventKey
{
GdkEventType type;
GdkWindow *window;
gint8 send_event;
guint32 time;
guint state;
guint keyval;
gint length;
gchar *string;
};
struct _GdkEventCrossing
{
GdkEventType type;
GdkWindow *window;
gint8 send_event;
GdkWindow *subwindow;
GdkNotifyType detail;
};
struct _GdkEventFocus
{
GdkEventType type;
GdkWindow *window;
gint8 send_event;
gint16 in;
};
struct _GdkEventConfigure
{
GdkEventType type;
GdkWindow *window;
gint8 send_event;
gint16 x, y;
gint16 width;
gint16 height;
};
struct _GdkEventProperty
{
GdkEventType type;
GdkWindow *window;
gint8 send_event;
GdkAtom atom;
guint32 time;
guint state;
};
struct _GdkEventSelection
{
GdkEventType type;
GdkWindow *window;
gint8 send_event;
GdkAtom selection;
GdkAtom target;
GdkAtom property;
guint32 requestor;
guint32 time;
};
/* This event type will be used pretty rarely. It only is important
for XInput aware programs that are drawing their own cursor */
struct _GdkEventProximity
{
GdkEventType type;
GdkWindow *window;
gint8 send_event;
guint32 time;
GdkInputSource source;
guint32 deviceid;
};
struct _GdkEventDragRequest
{
GdkEventType type;
GdkWindow *window;
gint8 send_event;
guint32 requestor;
union {
struct {
guint protocol_version:4;
guint sendreply:1;
guint willaccept:1;
guint delete_data:1; /* Do *not* delete if link is sent, only
if data is sent */
guint senddata:1;
guint reserved:22;
} flags;
glong allflags;
} u;
guint8 isdrop; /* This gdk event can be generated by a couple of
X events - this lets the app know whether the
drop really occurred or we just set the data */
GdkPoint drop_coords;
gchar *data_type;
guint32 timestamp;
};
struct _GdkEventDragBegin
{
GdkEventType type;
GdkWindow *window;
gint8 send_event;
union {
struct {
guint protocol_version:4;
guint reserved:28;
} flags;
glong allflags;
} u;
};
struct _GdkEventDropEnter
{
GdkEventType type;
GdkWindow *window;
gint8 send_event;
guint32 requestor;
union {
struct {
guint protocol_version:4;
guint sendreply:1;
guint extended_typelist:1;
guint reserved:26;
} flags;
glong allflags;
} u;
};
struct _GdkEventDropLeave
{
GdkEventType type;
GdkWindow *window;
gint8 send_event;
guint32 requestor;
union {
struct {
guint protocol_version:4;
guint reserved:28;
} flags;
glong allflags;
} u;
};
struct _GdkEventDropDataAvailable
{
GdkEventType type;
GdkWindow *window;
gint8 send_event;
guint32 requestor;
union {
struct {
guint protocol_version:4;
guint isdrop:1;
guint reserved:25;
} flags;
glong allflags;
} u;
gchar *data_type; /* MIME type */
gulong data_numbytes;
gpointer data;
guint32 timestamp;
GdkPoint coords;
};
struct _GdkEventClient
{
GdkEventType type;
GdkWindow *window;
gint8 send_event;
GdkAtom message_type;
gushort data_format;
union {
char b[20];
short s[10];
long l[5];
} data;
};
struct _GdkEventOther
{
GdkEventType type;
GdkWindow *window;
gint8 send_event;
GdkXEvent *xevent;
};
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<sect> Code Examples
<!-- ***************************************************************** -->
<p>
Below are the code examples that are used in the above text
which are not included in complete form elsewhere.
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1>Tictactoe
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2>tictactoe.h
<p>
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start tictactoe tictactoe.h */
/* GTK - The GIMP Toolkit
* Copyright (C) 1995-1997 Peter Mattis, Spencer Kimball and Josh MacDonald
*
* This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
* modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public
* License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
* version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
*
* This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
* Library General Public License for more details.
*
* You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
* License along with this library; if not, write to the
* Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
* Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
*/
#ifndef __TICTACTOE_H__
#define __TICTACTOE_H__
#include <gdk/gdk.h>
#include <gtk/gtkvbox.h>
#ifdef __cplusplus
extern "C" {
#endif /* __cplusplus */
#define TICTACTOE(obj) GTK_CHECK_CAST (obj, tictactoe_get_type (), Tictactoe)
#define TICTACTOE_CLASS(klass) GTK_CHECK_CLASS_CAST (klass, tictactoe_get_type (), TictactoeClass)
#define IS_TICTACTOE(obj) GTK_CHECK_TYPE (obj, tictactoe_get_type ())
typedef struct _Tictactoe Tictactoe;
typedef struct _TictactoeClass TictactoeClass;
struct _Tictactoe
{
GtkVBox vbox;
GtkWidget *buttons[3][3];
};
struct _TictactoeClass
{
GtkVBoxClass parent_class;
void (* tictactoe) (Tictactoe *ttt);
};
guint tictactoe_get_type (void);
GtkWidget* tictactoe_new (void);
void tictactoe_clear (Tictactoe *ttt);
#ifdef __cplusplus
}
#endif /* __cplusplus */
#endif /* __TICTACTOE_H__ */
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2>tictactoe.c
<p>
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start tictactoe tictactoe.c */
/* GTK - The GIMP Toolkit
* Copyright (C) 1995-1997 Peter Mattis, Spencer Kimball and Josh MacDonald
*
* This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
* modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public
* License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
* version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
*
* This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
* Library General Public License for more details.
*
* You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
* License along with this library; if not, write to the
* Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
* Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
*/
#include "gtk/gtksignal.h"
#include "gtk/gtktable.h"
#include "gtk/gtktogglebutton.h"
#include "tictactoe.h"
enum {
TICTACTOE_SIGNAL,
LAST_SIGNAL
};
static void tictactoe_class_init (TictactoeClass *klass);
static void tictactoe_init (Tictactoe *ttt);
static void tictactoe_toggle (GtkWidget *widget, Tictactoe *ttt);
static gint tictactoe_signals[LAST_SIGNAL] = { 0 };
guint
tictactoe_get_type ()
{
static guint ttt_type = 0;
if (!ttt_type)
{
GtkTypeInfo ttt_info =
{
"Tictactoe",
sizeof (Tictactoe),
sizeof (TictactoeClass),
(GtkClassInitFunc) tictactoe_class_init,
(GtkObjectInitFunc) tictactoe_init,
(GtkArgSetFunc) NULL,
(GtkArgGetFunc) NULL
};
ttt_type = gtk_type_unique (gtk_vbox_get_type (), &amp;ttt_info);
}
return ttt_type;
}
static void
tictactoe_class_init (TictactoeClass *class)
{
GtkObjectClass *object_class;
object_class = (GtkObjectClass*) class;
tictactoe_signals[TICTACTOE_SIGNAL] = gtk_signal_new ("tictactoe",
GTK_RUN_FIRST,
object_class->type,
GTK_SIGNAL_OFFSET (TictactoeClass, tictactoe),
gtk_signal_default_marshaller, GTK_TYPE_NONE, 0);
gtk_object_class_add_signals (object_class, tictactoe_signals, LAST_SIGNAL);
class->tictactoe = NULL;
}
static void
tictactoe_init (Tictactoe *ttt)
{
GtkWidget *table;
gint i,j;
table = gtk_table_new (3, 3, TRUE);
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER(ttt), table);
gtk_widget_show (table);
for (i=0;i<3; i++)
for (j=0;j<3; j++)
{
ttt->buttons[i][j] = gtk_toggle_button_new ();
gtk_table_attach_defaults (GTK_TABLE(table), ttt->buttons[i][j],
i, i+1, j, j+1);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (ttt->buttons[i][j]), "toggled",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (tictactoe_toggle), ttt);
gtk_widget_set_usize (ttt->buttons[i][j], 20, 20);
gtk_widget_show (ttt->buttons[i][j]);
}
}
GtkWidget*
tictactoe_new ()
{
return GTK_WIDGET ( gtk_type_new (tictactoe_get_type ()));
}
void
tictactoe_clear (Tictactoe *ttt)
{
int i,j;
for (i=0;i<3;i++)
for (j=0;j<3;j++)
{
gtk_signal_handler_block_by_data (GTK_OBJECT(ttt->buttons[i][j]), ttt);
gtk_toggle_button_set_state (GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON (ttt->buttons[i][j]),
FALSE);
gtk_signal_handler_unblock_by_data (GTK_OBJECT(ttt->buttons[i][j]), ttt);
}
}
static void
tictactoe_toggle (GtkWidget *widget, Tictactoe *ttt)
{
int i,k;
static int rwins[8][3] = { { 0, 0, 0 }, { 1, 1, 1 }, { 2, 2, 2 },
{ 0, 1, 2 }, { 0, 1, 2 }, { 0, 1, 2 },
{ 0, 1, 2 }, { 0, 1, 2 } };
static int cwins[8][3] = { { 0, 1, 2 }, { 0, 1, 2 }, { 0, 1, 2 },
{ 0, 0, 0 }, { 1, 1, 1 }, { 2, 2, 2 },
{ 0, 1, 2 }, { 2, 1, 0 } };
int success, found;
for (k=0; k<8; k++)
{
success = TRUE;
found = FALSE;
for (i=0;i<3;i++)
{
success = success &amp;&amp;
GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON(ttt->buttons[rwins[k][i]][cwins[k][i]])->active;
found = found ||
ttt->buttons[rwins[k][i]][cwins[k][i]] == widget;
}
if (success &amp;&amp; found)
{
gtk_signal_emit (GTK_OBJECT (ttt),
tictactoe_signals[TICTACTOE_SIGNAL]);
break;
}
}
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2>ttt_test.c
<p>
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start tictactoe ttt_test.c */
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
#include "tictactoe.h"
void
win (GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data)
{
g_print ("Yay!\n");
tictactoe_clear (TICTACTOE (widget));
}
int
main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
GtkWidget *window;
GtkWidget *ttt;
gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
gtk_window_set_title (GTK_WINDOW (window), "Aspect Frame");
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "destroy",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (gtk_exit), NULL);
gtk_container_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 10);
ttt = tictactoe_new ();
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), ttt);
gtk_widget_show (ttt);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (ttt), "tictactoe",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (win), NULL);
gtk_widget_show (window);
gtk_main ();
return 0;
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> GtkDial
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> gtkdial.h
<p>
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start gtkdial gtkdial.h */
/* GTK - The GIMP Toolkit
* Copyright (C) 1995-1997 Peter Mattis, Spencer Kimball and Josh MacDonald
*
* This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
* modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public
* License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
* version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
*
* This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
* Library General Public License for more details.
*
* You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
* License along with this library; if not, write to the
* Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
* Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
*/
#ifndef __GTK_DIAL_H__
#define __GTK_DIAL_H__
#include <gdk/gdk.h>
#include <gtk/gtkadjustment.h>
#include <gtk/gtkwidget.h>
#ifdef __cplusplus
extern "C" {
#endif /* __cplusplus */
#define GTK_DIAL(obj) GTK_CHECK_CAST (obj, gtk_dial_get_type (), GtkDial)
#define GTK_DIAL_CLASS(klass) GTK_CHECK_CLASS_CAST (klass, gtk_dial_get_type (), GtkDialClass)
#define GTK_IS_DIAL(obj) GTK_CHECK_TYPE (obj, gtk_dial_get_type ())
typedef struct _GtkDial GtkDial;
typedef struct _GtkDialClass GtkDialClass;
struct _GtkDial
{
GtkWidget widget;
/* update policy (GTK_UPDATE_[CONTINUOUS/DELAYED/DISCONTINUOUS]) */
guint policy : 2;
/* Button currently pressed or 0 if none */
guint8 button;
/* Dimensions of dial components */
gint radius;
gint pointer_width;
/* ID of update timer, or 0 if none */
guint32 timer;
/* Current angle */
gfloat angle;
/* Old values from adjustment stored so we know when something changes */
gfloat old_value;
gfloat old_lower;
gfloat old_upper;
/* The adjustment object that stores the data for this dial */
GtkAdjustment *adjustment;
};
struct _GtkDialClass
{
GtkWidgetClass parent_class;
};
GtkWidget* gtk_dial_new (GtkAdjustment *adjustment);
guint gtk_dial_get_type (void);
GtkAdjustment* gtk_dial_get_adjustment (GtkDial *dial);
void gtk_dial_set_update_policy (GtkDial *dial,
GtkUpdateType policy);
void gtk_dial_set_adjustment (GtkDial *dial,
GtkAdjustment *adjustment);
#ifdef __cplusplus
}
#endif /* __cplusplus */
#endif /* __GTK_DIAL_H__ */
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect2> gtkdial.c
<p>
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start gtkdial gtkdial.c */
/* GTK - The GIMP Toolkit
* Copyright (C) 1995-1997 Peter Mattis, Spencer Kimball and Josh MacDonald
*
* This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
* modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public
* License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
* version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
*
* This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
* Library General Public License for more details.
*
* You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
* License along with this library; if not, write to the
* Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
* Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
*/
#include <math.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <gtk/gtkmain.h>
#include <gtk/gtksignal.h>
#include "gtkdial.h"
#define SCROLL_DELAY_LENGTH 300
#define DIAL_DEFAULT_SIZE 100
/* Forward declarations */
static void gtk_dial_class_init (GtkDialClass *klass);
static void gtk_dial_init (GtkDial *dial);
static void gtk_dial_destroy (GtkObject *object);
static void gtk_dial_realize (GtkWidget *widget);
static void gtk_dial_size_request (GtkWidget *widget,
GtkRequisition *requisition);
static void gtk_dial_size_allocate (GtkWidget *widget,
GtkAllocation *allocation);
static gint gtk_dial_expose (GtkWidget *widget,
GdkEventExpose *event);
static gint gtk_dial_button_press (GtkWidget *widget,
GdkEventButton *event);
static gint gtk_dial_button_release (GtkWidget *widget,
GdkEventButton *event);
static gint gtk_dial_motion_notify (GtkWidget *widget,
GdkEventMotion *event);
static gint gtk_dial_timer (GtkDial *dial);
static void gtk_dial_update_mouse (GtkDial *dial, gint x, gint y);
static void gtk_dial_update (GtkDial *dial);
static void gtk_dial_adjustment_changed (GtkAdjustment *adjustment,
gpointer data);
static void gtk_dial_adjustment_value_changed (GtkAdjustment *adjustment,
gpointer data);
/* Local data */
static GtkWidgetClass *parent_class = NULL;
guint
gtk_dial_get_type ()
{
static guint dial_type = 0;
if (!dial_type)
{
GtkTypeInfo dial_info =
{
"GtkDial",
sizeof (GtkDial),
sizeof (GtkDialClass),
(GtkClassInitFunc) gtk_dial_class_init,
(GtkObjectInitFunc) gtk_dial_init,
(GtkArgSetFunc) NULL,
(GtkArgGetFunc) NULL,
};
dial_type = gtk_type_unique (gtk_widget_get_type (), &amp;dial_info);
}
return dial_type;
}
static void
gtk_dial_class_init (GtkDialClass *class)
{
GtkObjectClass *object_class;
GtkWidgetClass *widget_class;
object_class = (GtkObjectClass*) class;
widget_class = (GtkWidgetClass*) class;
parent_class = gtk_type_class (gtk_widget_get_type ());
object_class->destroy = gtk_dial_destroy;
widget_class->realize = gtk_dial_realize;
widget_class->expose_event = gtk_dial_expose;
widget_class->size_request = gtk_dial_size_request;
widget_class->size_allocate = gtk_dial_size_allocate;
widget_class->button_press_event = gtk_dial_button_press;
widget_class->button_release_event = gtk_dial_button_release;
widget_class->motion_notify_event = gtk_dial_motion_notify;
}
static void
gtk_dial_init (GtkDial *dial)
{
dial->button = 0;
dial->policy = GTK_UPDATE_CONTINUOUS;
dial->timer = 0;
dial->radius = 0;
dial->pointer_width = 0;
dial->angle = 0.0;
dial->old_value = 0.0;
dial->old_lower = 0.0;
dial->old_upper = 0.0;
dial->adjustment = NULL;
}
GtkWidget*
gtk_dial_new (GtkAdjustment *adjustment)
{
GtkDial *dial;
dial = gtk_type_new (gtk_dial_get_type ());
if (!adjustment)
adjustment = (GtkAdjustment*) gtk_adjustment_new (0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0);
gtk_dial_set_adjustment (dial, adjustment);
return GTK_WIDGET (dial);
}
static void
gtk_dial_destroy (GtkObject *object)
{
GtkDial *dial;
g_return_if_fail (object != NULL);
g_return_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (object));
dial = GTK_DIAL (object);
if (dial->adjustment)
gtk_object_unref (GTK_OBJECT (dial->adjustment));
if (GTK_OBJECT_CLASS (parent_class)->destroy)
(* GTK_OBJECT_CLASS (parent_class)->destroy) (object);
}
GtkAdjustment*
gtk_dial_get_adjustment (GtkDial *dial)
{
g_return_val_if_fail (dial != NULL, NULL);
g_return_val_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (dial), NULL);
return dial->adjustment;
}
void
gtk_dial_set_update_policy (GtkDial *dial,
GtkUpdateType policy)
{
g_return_if_fail (dial != NULL);
g_return_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (dial));
dial->policy = policy;
}
void
gtk_dial_set_adjustment (GtkDial *dial,
GtkAdjustment *adjustment)
{
g_return_if_fail (dial != NULL);
g_return_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (dial));
if (dial->adjustment)
{
gtk_signal_disconnect_by_data (GTK_OBJECT (dial->adjustment), (gpointer) dial);
gtk_object_unref (GTK_OBJECT (dial->adjustment));
}
dial->adjustment = adjustment;
gtk_object_ref (GTK_OBJECT (dial->adjustment));
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (adjustment), "changed",
(GtkSignalFunc) gtk_dial_adjustment_changed,
(gpointer) dial);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (adjustment), "value_changed",
(GtkSignalFunc) gtk_dial_adjustment_value_changed,
(gpointer) dial);
dial->old_value = adjustment->value;
dial->old_lower = adjustment->lower;
dial->old_upper = adjustment->upper;
gtk_dial_update (dial);
}
static void
gtk_dial_realize (GtkWidget *widget)
{
GtkDial *dial;
GdkWindowAttr attributes;
gint attributes_mask;
g_return_if_fail (widget != NULL);
g_return_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (widget));
GTK_WIDGET_SET_FLAGS (widget, GTK_REALIZED);
dial = GTK_DIAL (widget);
attributes.x = widget->allocation.x;
attributes.y = widget->allocation.y;
attributes.width = widget->allocation.width;
attributes.height = widget->allocation.height;
attributes.wclass = GDK_INPUT_OUTPUT;
attributes.window_type = GDK_WINDOW_CHILD;
attributes.event_mask = gtk_widget_get_events (widget) |
GDK_EXPOSURE_MASK | GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK |
GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK | GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK |
GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK;
attributes.visual = gtk_widget_get_visual (widget);
attributes.colormap = gtk_widget_get_colormap (widget);
attributes_mask = GDK_WA_X | GDK_WA_Y | GDK_WA_VISUAL | GDK_WA_COLORMAP;
widget->window = gdk_window_new (widget->parent->window, &amp;attributes, attributes_mask);
widget->style = gtk_style_attach (widget->style, widget->window);
gdk_window_set_user_data (widget->window, widget);
gtk_style_set_background (widget->style, widget->window, GTK_STATE_ACTIVE);
}
static void
gtk_dial_size_request (GtkWidget *widget,
GtkRequisition *requisition)
{
requisition->width = DIAL_DEFAULT_SIZE;
requisition->height = DIAL_DEFAULT_SIZE;
}
static void
gtk_dial_size_allocate (GtkWidget *widget,
GtkAllocation *allocation)
{
GtkDial *dial;
g_return_if_fail (widget != NULL);
g_return_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (widget));
g_return_if_fail (allocation != NULL);
widget->allocation = *allocation;
dial = GTK_DIAL (widget);
if (GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED (widget))
{
gdk_window_move_resize (widget->window,
allocation->x, allocation->y,
allocation->width, allocation->height);
}
dial->radius = MIN(allocation->width,allocation->height) * 0.45;
dial->pointer_width = dial->radius / 5;
}
static gint
gtk_dial_expose (GtkWidget *widget,
GdkEventExpose *event)
{
GtkDial *dial;
GdkPoint points[3];
gdouble s,c;
gdouble theta;
gint xc, yc;
gint tick_length;
gint i;
g_return_val_if_fail (widget != NULL, FALSE);
g_return_val_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (widget), FALSE);
g_return_val_if_fail (event != NULL, FALSE);
if (event->count > 0)
return FALSE;
dial = GTK_DIAL (widget);
gdk_window_clear_area (widget->window,
0, 0,
widget->allocation.width,
widget->allocation.height);
xc = widget->allocation.width/2;
yc = widget->allocation.height/2;
/* Draw ticks */
for (i=0; i<25; i++)
{
theta = (i*M_PI/18. - M_PI/6.);
s = sin(theta);
c = cos(theta);
tick_length = (i%6 == 0) ? dial->pointer_width : dial->pointer_width/2;
gdk_draw_line (widget->window,
widget->style->fg_gc[widget->state],
xc + c*(dial->radius - tick_length),
yc - s*(dial->radius - tick_length),
xc + c*dial->radius,
yc - s*dial->radius);
}
/* Draw pointer */
s = sin(dial->angle);
c = cos(dial->angle);
points[0].x = xc + s*dial->pointer_width/2;
points[0].y = yc + c*dial->pointer_width/2;
points[1].x = xc + c*dial->radius;
points[1].y = yc - s*dial->radius;
points[2].x = xc - s*dial->pointer_width/2;
points[2].y = yc - c*dial->pointer_width/2;
gtk_draw_polygon (widget->style,
widget->window,
GTK_STATE_NORMAL,
GTK_SHADOW_OUT,
points, 3,
TRUE);
return FALSE;
}
static gint
gtk_dial_button_press (GtkWidget *widget,
GdkEventButton *event)
{
GtkDial *dial;
gint dx, dy;
double s, c;
double d_parallel;
double d_perpendicular;
g_return_val_if_fail (widget != NULL, FALSE);
g_return_val_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (widget), FALSE);
g_return_val_if_fail (event != NULL, FALSE);
dial = GTK_DIAL (widget);
/* Determine if button press was within pointer region - we
do this by computing the parallel and perpendicular distance of
the point where the mouse was pressed from the line passing through
the pointer */
dx = event->x - widget->allocation.width / 2;
dy = widget->allocation.height / 2 - event->y;
s = sin(dial->angle);
c = cos(dial->angle);
d_parallel = s*dy + c*dx;
d_perpendicular = fabs(s*dx - c*dy);
if (!dial->button &amp;&amp;
(d_perpendicular < dial->pointer_width/2) &amp;&amp;
(d_parallel > - dial->pointer_width))
{
gtk_grab_add (widget);
dial->button = event->button;
gtk_dial_update_mouse (dial, event->x, event->y);
}
return FALSE;
}
static gint
gtk_dial_button_release (GtkWidget *widget,
GdkEventButton *event)
{
GtkDial *dial;
g_return_val_if_fail (widget != NULL, FALSE);
g_return_val_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (widget), FALSE);
g_return_val_if_fail (event != NULL, FALSE);
dial = GTK_DIAL (widget);
if (dial->button == event->button)
{
gtk_grab_remove (widget);
dial->button = 0;
if (dial->policy == GTK_UPDATE_DELAYED)
gtk_timeout_remove (dial->timer);
if ((dial->policy != GTK_UPDATE_CONTINUOUS) &amp;&amp;
(dial->old_value != dial->adjustment->value))
gtk_signal_emit_by_name (GTK_OBJECT (dial->adjustment), "value_changed");
}
return FALSE;
}
static gint
gtk_dial_motion_notify (GtkWidget *widget,
GdkEventMotion *event)
{
GtkDial *dial;
GdkModifierType mods;
gint x, y, mask;
g_return_val_if_fail (widget != NULL, FALSE);
g_return_val_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (widget), FALSE);
g_return_val_if_fail (event != NULL, FALSE);
dial = GTK_DIAL (widget);
if (dial->button != 0)
{
x = event->x;
y = event->y;
if (event->is_hint || (event->window != widget->window))
gdk_window_get_pointer (widget->window, &amp;x, &amp;y, &amp;mods);
switch (dial->button)
{
case 1:
mask = GDK_BUTTON1_MASK;
break;
case 2:
mask = GDK_BUTTON2_MASK;
break;
case 3:
mask = GDK_BUTTON3_MASK;
break;
default:
mask = 0;
break;
}
if (mods &amp; mask)
gtk_dial_update_mouse (dial, x,y);
}
return FALSE;
}
static gint
gtk_dial_timer (GtkDial *dial)
{
g_return_val_if_fail (dial != NULL, FALSE);
g_return_val_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (dial), FALSE);
if (dial->policy == GTK_UPDATE_DELAYED)
gtk_signal_emit_by_name (GTK_OBJECT (dial->adjustment), "value_changed");
return FALSE;
}
static void
gtk_dial_update_mouse (GtkDial *dial, gint x, gint y)
{
gint xc, yc;
gfloat old_value;
g_return_if_fail (dial != NULL);
g_return_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (dial));
xc = GTK_WIDGET(dial)->allocation.width / 2;
yc = GTK_WIDGET(dial)->allocation.height / 2;
old_value = dial->adjustment->value;
dial->angle = atan2(yc-y, x-xc);
if (dial->angle < -M_PI/2.)
dial->angle += 2*M_PI;
if (dial->angle < -M_PI/6)
dial->angle = -M_PI/6;
if (dial->angle > 7.*M_PI/6.)
dial->angle = 7.*M_PI/6.;
dial->adjustment->value = dial->adjustment->lower + (7.*M_PI/6 - dial->angle) *
(dial->adjustment->upper - dial->adjustment->lower) / (4.*M_PI/3.);
if (dial->adjustment->value != old_value)
{
if (dial->policy == GTK_UPDATE_CONTINUOUS)
{
gtk_signal_emit_by_name (GTK_OBJECT (dial->adjustment), "value_changed");
}
else
{
gtk_widget_draw (GTK_WIDGET(dial), NULL);
if (dial->policy == GTK_UPDATE_DELAYED)
{
if (dial->timer)
gtk_timeout_remove (dial->timer);
dial->timer = gtk_timeout_add (SCROLL_DELAY_LENGTH,
(GtkFunction) gtk_dial_timer,
(gpointer) dial);
}
}
}
}
static void
gtk_dial_update (GtkDial *dial)
{
gfloat new_value;
g_return_if_fail (dial != NULL);
g_return_if_fail (GTK_IS_DIAL (dial));
new_value = dial->adjustment->value;
if (new_value < dial->adjustment->lower)
new_value = dial->adjustment->lower;
if (new_value > dial->adjustment->upper)
new_value = dial->adjustment->upper;
if (new_value != dial->adjustment->value)
{
dial->adjustment->value = new_value;
gtk_signal_emit_by_name (GTK_OBJECT (dial->adjustment), "value_changed");
}
dial->angle = 7.*M_PI/6. - (new_value - dial->adjustment->lower) * 4.*M_PI/3. /
(dial->adjustment->upper - dial->adjustment->lower);
gtk_widget_draw (GTK_WIDGET(dial), NULL);
}
static void
gtk_dial_adjustment_changed (GtkAdjustment *adjustment,
gpointer data)
{
GtkDial *dial;
g_return_if_fail (adjustment != NULL);
g_return_if_fail (data != NULL);
dial = GTK_DIAL (data);
if ((dial->old_value != adjustment->value) ||
(dial->old_lower != adjustment->lower) ||
(dial->old_upper != adjustment->upper))
{
gtk_dial_update (dial);
dial->old_value = adjustment->value;
dial->old_lower = adjustment->lower;
dial->old_upper = adjustment->upper;
}
}
static void
gtk_dial_adjustment_value_changed (GtkAdjustment *adjustment,
gpointer data)
{
GtkDial *dial;
g_return_if_fail (adjustment != NULL);
g_return_if_fail (data != NULL);
dial = GTK_DIAL (data);
if (dial->old_value != adjustment->value)
{
gtk_dial_update (dial);
dial->old_value = adjustment->value;
}
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
<!-- ----------------------------------------------------------------- -->
<sect1> Scribble
<p>
<tscreen><verb>
/* example-start scribble-simple scribble-simple.c */
/* GTK - The GIMP Toolkit
* Copyright (C) 1995-1997 Peter Mattis, Spencer Kimball and Josh MacDonald
*
* This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
* modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public
* License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
* version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
*
* This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
* Library General Public License for more details.
*
* You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
* License along with this library; if not, write to the
* Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
* Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
*/
#include <gtk/gtk.h>
/* Backing pixmap for drawing area */
static GdkPixmap *pixmap = NULL;
/* Create a new backing pixmap of the appropriate size */
static gint
configure_event (GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventConfigure *event)
{
if (pixmap)
gdk_pixmap_unref(pixmap);
pixmap = gdk_pixmap_new(widget->window,
widget->allocation.width,
widget->allocation.height,
-1);
gdk_draw_rectangle (pixmap,
widget->style->white_gc,
TRUE,
0, 0,
widget->allocation.width,
widget->allocation.height);
return TRUE;
}
/* Redraw the screen from the backing pixmap */
static gint
expose_event (GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventExpose *event)
{
gdk_draw_pixmap(widget->window,
widget->style->fg_gc[GTK_WIDGET_STATE (widget)],
pixmap,
event->area.x, event->area.y,
event->area.x, event->area.y,
event->area.width, event->area.height);
return FALSE;
}
/* Draw a rectangle on the screen */
static void
draw_brush (GtkWidget *widget, gdouble x, gdouble y)
{
GdkRectangle update_rect;
update_rect.x = x - 5;
update_rect.y = y - 5;
update_rect.width = 10;
update_rect.height = 10;
gdk_draw_rectangle (pixmap,
widget->style->black_gc,
TRUE,
update_rect.x, update_rect.y,
update_rect.width, update_rect.height);
gtk_widget_draw (widget, &amp;update_rect);
}
static gint
button_press_event (GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventButton *event)
{
if (event->button == 1 &amp;&amp; pixmap != NULL)
draw_brush (widget, event->x, event->y);
return TRUE;
}
static gint
motion_notify_event (GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventMotion *event)
{
int x, y;
GdkModifierType state;
if (event->is_hint)
gdk_window_get_pointer (event->window, &amp;x, &amp;y, &amp;state);
else
{
x = event->x;
y = event->y;
state = event->state;
}
if (state &amp; GDK_BUTTON1_MASK &amp;&amp; pixmap != NULL)
draw_brush (widget, x, y);
return TRUE;
}
void
quit ()
{
gtk_exit (0);
}
int
main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
GtkWidget *window;
GtkWidget *drawing_area;
GtkWidget *vbox;
GtkWidget *button;
gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
gtk_widget_set_name (window, "Test Input");
vbox = gtk_vbox_new (FALSE, 0);
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), vbox);
gtk_widget_show (vbox);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (window), "destroy",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (quit), NULL);
/* Create the drawing area */
drawing_area = gtk_drawing_area_new ();
gtk_drawing_area_size (GTK_DRAWING_AREA (drawing_area), 200, 200);
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (vbox), drawing_area, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
gtk_widget_show (drawing_area);
/* Signals used to handle backing pixmap */
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (drawing_area), "expose_event",
(GtkSignalFunc) expose_event, NULL);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT(drawing_area),"configure_event",
(GtkSignalFunc) configure_event, NULL);
/* Event signals */
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (drawing_area), "motion_notify_event",
(GtkSignalFunc) motion_notify_event, NULL);
gtk_signal_connect (GTK_OBJECT (drawing_area), "button_press_event",
(GtkSignalFunc) button_press_event, NULL);
gtk_widget_set_events (drawing_area, GDK_EXPOSURE_MASK
| GDK_LEAVE_NOTIFY_MASK
| GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK
| GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK
| GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK);
/* .. And a quit button */
button = gtk_button_new_with_label ("Quit");
gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (vbox), button, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
gtk_signal_connect_object (GTK_OBJECT (button), "clicked",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (gtk_widget_destroy),
GTK_OBJECT (window));
gtk_widget_show (button);
gtk_widget_show (window);
gtk_main ();
return 0;
}
/* example-end */
</verb></tscreen>
</article>
Reference in New Issue View Git Blame Copy Permalink